Home

HP Prime Graphing Calculator User Guide

1. Tap where you want one point to be and press _ _ Tap where you want the other point to be and press __ e _ A point is automatically created midway between those two points If you choose an object first such as a segment choosing the Midpoint tool and pressing adds a point midway between the ends of that object In he case of a circle the midpoint is created at the circle s center Tap one of the two intersecting objects and press __ er_ Tap the other object and press __ _ A point is created at one of the points of intersection Keyboard shortcut Displays a list of points for you to choose the one you want to trace If you subsequently move that point a trace line is drawn on the screen to show its path In the example at the right point B was chosen to be traced When that point was moved up and to the left a path of its movement was created Trace creates an entry in Symbolic view In the example above the entry is Trace GB Turns off tracing and deletes the definition of the trace point from Symbolic view If more than one point is being traced a Geometry Erase Trace Center Element O 1 Intersections Random pts Line Segment Ray Line Geometry menu of trace points appears so that you can choose which one to untrace Untrace does not erase any existing trace lines It merely prevents any further tracing should the point be moved again Erases
2. cccccecccccesseeeceeeseeeeeeeenes 388 Triangle Solver app variables ccccccesseeececeeseeeeeeees 389 Linear Explorer app variables ccccseeeccceeeeeeeeeeeeeees 389 Quadratic Explorer app variables ccsseeecceeeeaeeeees 389 Trig Explorer app variables cccceccccesseeececeesseeeeeeeas 389 Sequence app variables ccccccccceseseeceesseeeeeeeeuseeeees 390 22 Units and constants WINS EEE TAEA A neces eed ose T 391 Unikealculdhion S sessami tic aenotea ste bonteundtae ease 392 EE Ol E EE seit sate dau TE T A TTA 394 PIYSICGll constans ararsa A A aan ied 395 histor COMSICUAIS ina RNE N 396 23 Lists Create a list in the List Catalog cccccccceecccccesseeeecseeeeeeeeeeens 399 Te hs Edi eanne beaten a A E 401 D lehngli sia serana A 403 LISTS IN OME VIEW src celecctinasd niea a E 403 Lit UNCON h ekeren cd tialiesaltuadsdicdshastunssteanstinclt adie ties 405 6 Contents Finding statistical values for lists ccccecccecceeesseeeeeeseeeaaeeees 408 24 Matrices Creating and storing Matrices cccceccccesseeecceesseeeceeesseeeees 412 Working with MGIICES 2i4 552 02 tceudt ante aceunecsietsghaccey maesidomses ine 413 Matrix crithmene asesina aes 416 Solving systems of linear equations ccccccccsseeeceeeeeeeeeees 419 Matrix functions and COMMANAS cccccceeseeeceeesseeeeeseenenes 42 Marix TOMCHONS essre a EANNA 422 Example Scassi
3. E R4 8 The app opens in Symbolic view E R6 6 E R7 8 Enter function Show There are 10 fields for defining polar functions These are labelled R1 0 through R9 8 and RO 0 2 Highlight the field you want to use either by tapping on it or scrolling to it If you are entering a new function just start typing If you are editing an existing function tap and make your changes When you have finished defining or changing the function press 3 Define the expression 5ncos 0 2 cos 0 2 Polar Symbolic View 5 Ema a ka V E R1 8 secod s coslo EVO EEAS Q E R30 E RS 6 8 Notice how the a key enters aaa whatever variable is relevant to the current app In this app the relevant variable is 0 4 If you wish choose a color for the plot other than its default You do this by selecting the colored square to the left of the function set tapping GEB and selecting a color from the color picker For more information about adding definitions modifying definitions and evaluating dependent definitions in Symbolic view see Common operations in Symbolic view on page 7 1 Set angle Set the angle measure to radians measure 5 Settings Polar Symbolic Setup Angle Measure System 6 Tap the Angle Number melts Measure field and oap ie da select Radians For more information on the Symbolic Setup view see Common operations in Symbolic Setup view on pag
4. Euler ELSE IF N 2 THEN PRINT You picked 485 486 EDITLIST EDITMAT GETKEY Gauss ELSE PRINT You picked Newton END END After execution of CHOOSE the value of n will be updated to contain O 1 2 or 3 The IF THEN ELSE command causes the name of the selected person to be printed to the terminal Syntax EDITLIST listvar Starts the List Editor loading listvar and displays the specified list If used in programming returns to the program when user taps Example EDITLIST L1 edits list L1 Syntax EDITMAT matrixvar Starts the Matrix Editor and displays the specified matrix If used in programming returns to the program when user tops Ga Example EDITMAT M1 edits matrix M1 Syntax GETKEY Returns the ID of the first key in the keyboard buffer or 1 it no key was pressed since the last call to GETKEY Key IDs are integers from O to 50 numbered from top left key O to bottom right key 50 as shown in figure 26 1 Programming je Keys 0 13 gt a Keys 14 19 Chars A Keys 20 25 VE Keys 26 30 a iv Keys 31 35 EEX lstor PI Keys 36 40 ALPHA oS stpha Keys 41 45 EELS z Keys 46 50 On Q Figure 26 1 Numbers of the keys INPUT Syntax INPUT var title label help default Opens a dialog box with the title text title with one field named label displaying help at the bottom and using the default value Updates th
5. Find solutions to sets of two or three linear equations Explore parametric functions of x and y in terms of t Example x cos f and y sin Explore polar functions of r in terms of an angle 0 Example r 2cos 40 Explore the properties of quadratic equations and test your knowledge Explore sequence functions where U is defined in terms of n or in terms of previous terms in the same or another sequence such as U _ and U _3 Example U 0 U 1 and M Opp Oy 4 n n Explore equations in one or more real valued variables and systems of equations 2 Example x 1 x x 2 To solve problems or represent data best suited to a spreadsheet Calculate one variable statistical data x Calculate two variable statistical data xand y Find the unknown values for the lengths and angles of triangles Explore the properties of sinusoidal equations and test your knowledge As you use an app to explore a lesson or solve a problem you add data and definitions in one or more of the app s views All this information is automatically saved in the app You can come back to the app at any time and all the information is still there You can also save a version of the app with a name you give it and then use the original app for another problem or purpose See Creating an app on page 97 for more information about customizing and saving apps An introduction to HP apps With one exception al
6. 2 Between the parentheses enter Lalpho J J XJ W LJ Ans 3 AR B 2 alpha J O J 4 X Base s 3 Press Ete Function proot 2 x 3 x 2 _ Sto gt simplif To find the area under the graph of 5x 6 between x 1 and x 1 With the CAS menu open select Calculus and then Integrate The function int appears on the entry line 2 Between the parentheses enter Sa EN alpha J Ls 4 X vV L Base Eval O apa J J XJ Eval O x 162 J3 3 Press Ee Various settings allow you to configure how the CAS works To display the settings press ES The modes are spread across two pages Setting Purpose Function 2 int S x 6 x 1 3 3 _ Sto gt simplif CAS Settings Angle Measure Number Format Standard Integers Decimal Exact y Complex Use V J Use i Principal y Choose angle measure Increasing Angle Measure Select the units for angle measure ments Radians or Degrees Computer algebra system CAS 53 Setting Number Format first drop down list Number Format second drop down list Integers drop down list Integers check box Exact Complex Use V 54 Purpose Cont Select the number format for dis played solutions Standard or Scientific or Engineering Select the number of digits to dis play in approximate mode man tissa exponent Select the integer base Decimal base 10 Hex b
7. COnrigurarion input Last HypZZprop ouput configuration SuceCountl SuccCount2 Sampsizel SampSize2 SigLevel Mode 32 Functions and commands HypT1mean 322 Output is a reference to where you would like the output to be placed Note if a range is specified it will limit the size of the output but can also change the orientation from vertical to horizontal if the range is wider than it is tall Configuration is a string that controls what results are shown and what order they appear in An empty string will default to show all in default order including headers h if present the header cells will be created acc Accept Reject tZ Test Z tPd prob cZ cpl cp2 std Input list is the list of input see Input Parameters below This can be a range reference a list of cell references or a simple list of values Input Parameters SuccCount SuccCount2 SampSize SampSize2 SigLevel Mode Specifies how to calculate the statistic 1 Less than 2 Greater than 3 Not Equal Example XXXXX The hypothesis test HypT1mean is a one sample T test for comparing means Syntax HypTimean ouput configuration input list Functions and commands HypTlmean ouput configuration SampMean SampStdDev SampSize NullPopProp Sighevel Mode e Output is a reference to where you would like the output to be placed Note if a range is specified it will limit the size of the o
8. Cross Product of vector with vector2 CROSS vector1 vector2 Dot Product of two arrays matrix and matrix2 DOT matrix1 matrix2 Returns the norm sqrt x1 2 x2 2 xn 2 of a vector l2norm Vect Returns the norm sum of the absolute values of the coordinates of a vector linorm Vect Returns the norm the maximum of the absolute values of the coordinates of a vector maxnorm Vect or Mtrx You can create an identity matrix with the IDENMAT function For example IDENMAT 2 creates the 2x2 identity matrix 1 0 0 1 Matrices Transposing a Matrix Reduced Row Echelon Form Matrices You can also create an identity matrix using the MAKEMAT make matrix function For example entering MAKEMAT I J 4 4 creates a 4 x 4 matrix showing the numeral 1 for all elements except zeros on the diagonal The logical operator returns O when the row number and J the column number are equal and returns 1 when they are not equal You can insert by choosing it from the relations palette gee The TRN function swaps the row column and column row elements of a matrix For instance element 1 2 row 1 column 2 is swapped with element 2 1 element 2 3 is swapped with element 3 2 and so on For example TRN 1 2 3 4 creates the matrix Lites lelara The set of equations x 2y 3z 14 2x y z 3 soya 1A can be written as the augmented matrix 1 2 314 2 1 1 3 4 2 2 14
9. External references You can refer to data in a Savings spreadsheet from outside the Spreadsheet app by using the reference SpreadsheetName CR For example in Home view you can refer to cell A6 in the built Spreadsheet A6 6 5 Savings A6 5 Savings TOTAL 65 res a a a a in spreadsheet by entering Spreadsheet A Thus the formula 6 Spreadsheet A6 would multiply whatever value is currently in cell A6 in the built in app by 6 If you have created a customized spreadsheet called say Savings you simply refer to it by its name as in 5 Savings A6 An external reference can also be to a named cell as in 5 Savings TOTAL In the same way you can also enter references to spreadsheet cells in the CAS If you are working outside a spreadsheet you cannot refer to a cell by its absolute reference Thus Spreadsheet SAS6 produces an error message Note that a reference to a spreadsheet name is case sensitive 180 Spreadsheet Referencing variables Spreadsheet Any variable can be inserted in a spreadsheet cell This includes Home variables App variables CAS variables and user variables Variables can be referenced or entered For example if you have assigned 10 to P in Home view you could enter P 5 in a spreadsheet cell press and get 50 If you subsequently changed the value of P the value in that cell automatically changes to reflect the new value This is an example of a referenced va
10. ICplx Pnt P V ar C Var D Var E Var F Geometry 155 isosceles_triangle isopolygon parallelogram polygon quadrilateral rectangle 156 Draws the isosceles triangle ABC AB AC and angle AB AC t or in the plane ABP angle AB AC angle AB AP or angle AB AC 1 isosceles triangle Pnt A or Cplx Pnt B or Colx Angle t or Pnt P or LstrP hy Wartcy I gt Draws a regular polygon having abs n vertices given by 2 vertices or 2 vertices and 1 point of the plane if n gt O and by its center and 1 vertex or its center 1 vertex and 1 point of the plane if n lt O isopolygon Puc Pac Pnt Intg in Returns and draws the parallelogram ABCD such as vector AB vector AD vector AC parallelogram Pnt A Cplx Pnt B Cplx Pnt C Cpls van b Returns and draws the polygon where its vertices are the element of I polygon LstPnt LstCplx Returns and draws the quadrilateral ABCD quadrilateral Pnt A Cplx Pnt B Cplx Pnt C Cp1x Pnt D Cp1x Returns and draws the rectangle ABCD AD k AB if k gt O ABCD is direct else indirect in the plane ABP AD AP or AD k AB rectangle Pnt A Cplx Pnt B Cplx Real k Pnt P Lst P k Var D Var C Geometry rhombus right_triangle square triangle Curve Function circle Geometry Returns and draws the rhombus ABCD such as the angle AB AD a or in the
11. e Input Parameters SampMean SampMean SampSize SampSize2 PopStdDev PopStdDev 2 SigLevel Mode Specifies how to calculate the statistic 1 Less than 2 Greater than 3 Not Equal Example XXXXX The hypothesis test HypZ1 prop is a one proportion Z est Syntax HypZlprop output configuration input list HypZlprop ouput configuration SuccCount SampSize NullPopProp SigLevel Mode e Output is a reference to where you would like the output to be placed Note if a range is specified it will limit the size of the output but can also change the orientation Functions and commands HypZ2prop from vertical to horizontal if the range is wider than it is tall e Configuration is a string that controls what results are shown and what order they appear in An empty string will default to show all in default order including headers h if present the header cells will be created acc Accept Reject tZ Test Z tP prob cZ cp cp2 std e Input list is the list of input see Input Parameters below This can be a range reference a list of cell references or a simple list of values e Input Parameters SuccCount SampSize NullPopMean SigLevel Mode Specifies how to calculate the statistic 1 Less than 2 Greater than 3 Not Equal Example XXXXX The hypothesis test HypZ2prop is a two proportion Z test for comparing means Syntax Hyp442prop OupUL
12. im V Purpose Continued Cursor keys Moves the cursor around the display Press to move to the end of a menu or screen or 4 to move to the start Displays all the available characters To enter a character use the cursor keys to highlight it and then tap QS To select multiple characters select one tap FER and continue likewise before pressing WE There are many pages of characters You can jump to a particular Unicode block by tapping and selecting the block You can also flick from page to page There are two shift keys that you use to access the operations and characters printed on the bottom of the keys and EB Key ALPHA Purpose Press to access the operations printed in blue on a key For instance to access the settings for Home view press ES Press the key to access the characters printed in orange on a key For instance to type Z press and then press For a lowercase letter press and then the letter To type more than one letter press a second time to lock the alpha shift Adding text Math keys 20 The text you can enter directly is shown by the orange characters on the keys These characters can only be entered in conjunction with the and keys Both uppercase and lowercase characters can be entered as explained in the following Keys ALPHA ALPHA ALPHA Shift C alpha alpha Shift e alpha alpha alpha ALPHA Effect
13. Here you specify the values of the known variables highlight the variable that you want to solve for and tap ETS Enter value or press SOLVE _ DEEN SOLVE 5 Enter the values for the known variables 278 7 816267 e100 Some variables may already have values against them when you display the Numeric view This occurs if the variables have been assigned values elsewhere For example in Home view you might have assigned 10 to variable U 10 U Then when you open the Numeric view to solve an equation with U as a variable 10 will be the default value for U This also occurs if a variable has been given a value in some previous calculation in an app or program To reset all pre populated variables to zero press i 6 Solve for the unknown variable A Move the cursor to the A alve Numeric View field and tap EA V 27 78 U 16 67 Therefore the acceleration A 2 4691975 D needed to increase the 199 speed of a car from 16 67 m s 60 kph to 27 78 m s 19 Ya or press Seis 100 kph over a distance of mal 100 m is approximately 2 4692 m s _ DEEN SOLVE The equation for A is V U2 2D This is a linear equation Hence we can conclude that there are no further solutions for A We can also see this if we plot the equation The Plot view shows one graph for each side of the solved equation You can choose any of the variables to be the 237 independent variable by selecting it in Numeric
14. Opens the highlighted program for editing Prompts for a new program name then opens the Program Editor Opens further menu options for the selected program Save e Rename Sort e Delete e Clear These options are described immediately below To redisplay the initial menu press or Programming 439 Button or Key Purpose Continued Save creates a copy of the selected program with a new name you are prompted to give Rename renames the selected program Sort sorts the list of programs Sort options are alphabetical and chronological Delete deletes the selected program Clear deletes all programs Transmits the highlighted program to another HP Prime or to a PC Debugs the selectedprogram Runs the highlighted program or Moves to the beginning or end of the Program Catalog Deletes the selected program Deletes all programs 440 Programming Creating a new program HINT l Open the Program Catalog and start a new program Program Enter a name for the program to lock alpha mode MYPROGRAM OK Press again A template for your program is then automatically created The template consists of a heading for a function with the Enter name for new program Fecit cancel OK EXPORT MYPROGRAMC BEGIN END COUNEIS same name as the program EXPORT MYPROGRAM and a BEGIN
15. Sets the step size increment value for an independent variable in Numeric view From Numeric Setup view enter a value for NUMSTEP In a program type n gt NumStep where n gt 0 Sets the table format From Numeric Setup view enter 0 or 1 In a program type 0 gt NumType for Automatic default 1 gt NumType for BuildYourOwn Sets the zoom factor in the Numeric view From Numeric Setup view type in a value for NUMZOOM In a program type n gt NumZoom where n gt 0 The following variables are used by the Inference app They correspond to fields in the Inference app Numeric view The set of variables shown in this view depends on the hypothesis test or the confidence interval selected in the Symbolic view Sets the alpha level for the hypothesis test From the Numeric view set the value of Alpha 501 Conf Mean Mean2 nl 502 In a program type n gt Alpha where 0 lt n lt 1 Sets the confidence level for the confidence interval From the Numeric view set the value of Conf In a program type n gt Conf where 0 lt n lt 1 Sets the value of the mean of a sample for a 1 mean hypothesis test or confidence interval For a 2 mean test or interval sets the value of the mean of the first sample From the Numeric view set the value of Meanl In a program type n gt Meanl For a 2 mean test or interval sets the value of the mean of the second sample From the Numeric vie
16. SolveForSlope SolveForYIntercept Quadratic Explorer functions SOLVE DELTA 336 Functions and commands Geometry app function GeoAppFunction Common app functions CHECK UNCHECK Functions and commands In addition to the app functions specific to each app there are two functions common to the following apps e Function Solve e Parametric e Polar Sequence e Advanced Graphing Checks that is selects the Symbolic view variable Symbn Symbn can be any of the following e F0O F9 for the Function app e E0 E9 for the Solve app e H1 H5 for the Statistics 1Var app e 1 S5 for the Statistics 2Var app e X0 Yo xX9 Y9 for the parametric app e RO R9 for the Polar app e U0 U9 for the Sequence app CHECK Symbn Example CHECK F1 checks the Function app Symbolic view variable F1 The result is that F1 X is drawn in the Plot view and has a column of function values in the Numeric view of the Function app Unchecks the Symbolic view variable Symbn UNCHECK Symbn Example UNCHECK R1 unchecks the Polar app Symbolic view variable R1 The result is that R1 6 is not drawn in the Plot 337 Ctlg menu 338 view and does not appear in the Numeric view of the Polar app The Catlg menu brings Statistics 1Var 28 40 together all the functions and Catalog commands available on the HP Prime However this section describes the functions and commands that can only be foun
17. Xmin KCICK XZoom Ymax ymin YCLCk Yzoom Co Gi Cs C9 CO ADigits AFormat Contains the number of data points in the current 2 variable analysis S1 S5 383 Corr CoefDet sCov oCov XXY MeanX X X2 sX oX serrX MeanY XY 384 Contains the correlation coefficient from the latest calculation of summary statistics This value is based on the linear fit only regardless of the fit type chosen Contains the coefficient of determination from the latest calculation of summary statistics This value is based on the fit type chosen Contains the sample covariance of the current 2 variable statistical analysis S1 S5 Contains the population covariance of the current 2 variable statistical analysis S1 S5 Contains the sum of the X Y products for the current 2 variable statistical analysis S1 S5 Contains the mean of the independent values X of the current 2 variable statistical analysis S1 S5 Contains the sum of the independent values X of the current 2 variable statistical analysis S1 S5 Contains the sum of the squares of the independent values X of the current 2 variable statistical analysis S1 S5 Contains the sample standard deviation of the independent values X of the current 2 variable statistical analysis S1 S5 Contains the population standard deviation of the independent values X of the current 2 variable statistical analysis S1 S5 Contain
18. e Underline e Strikethrough e Superscript e Subscript o Bullets e e ce e x Cancels bullet Notes and Info To import a note Sharing notes Notes and Info You can import a note from the Note Catalog into an app s Info view and vice versa Suppose you want to copy a note named Assignments from the Note Catalog into the Function Info view 1 Open the Note Catalog Select the note Assignments and tap 3 Open the copy options for copying to the clipboard Copy The menu buttons change to give you options for copying EG Marks where the copying or cutting is to begin ERTE Marks where the copying or cutting is to end GEN Select the entire program We Cut the selection ENB Copy the selection Select what you want to copy or cut using the options listed immediately above 5 Top EB or ETB 6 Open the Info view of the Function app bd i A tap the Function app icon press Ga Move the cursor to the location where you want the copied text to be pasted and open the clipboard Shift ey Paste Select the text from the clipboard and press You can send a note to another HP Prime See Sharing data on page 40 435 436 Notes and Info 26 Programming HP Prime Programs Command Structure Programming This chapter describes how to program the HP Prime In this chapter you ll learn about e programming commands e writing functions in
19. quartile3 quartiles quorem 362 Returns the orthogonal projection of the point on the curve projection Curve Pnt Returns a fraction or rational fraction A B simplitied to Q r B where R lt B or the degree of R is less than the degree of B propfrac Frac or RatFrac Returns the Taylor polynomial Q such as P x Q x a ptayl Poly P var Real a Var Unassigns a variable name purge Var With three points as arguments draws the pyramid with a face in the plane of the three points and with two vertices at the first and second points With four points as arguments draws the pyramid with vertices at the four points pyramid Pnt A Pnt B Pnt C Pnt D Returns the matrix of a quadratic form with respect to the given in VectVar q2a QuadraForm VectVar Draws the quadrilateral ABCD quadrilateral Pnt A Cplx Pnt B Cplx Pnt C Cp1x Pnt D Cp1x Returns the quantile of the elements of a list corresponding to p O lt p lt 1 quantile Lst 1 Real p Returns the first quartile of the elements of a list or the columns of a matrix quartilel Lst Mtrx Lst Returns the third quartile of the elements of a list or the columns of a matrix quartile3 Lst Mtrx Lst Returns the minimum first quartile median third quartile and maximum of the elements of a list or the columns of a matrix quartiles Lst Mtrx Lst Returns the quotient and remainder of the Euclidean div
20. wn p o v v KJ L n Selects the triangle drawing tool Follow the instructions on the screen or see page 145 x a 4 135 Key Result in Plot view Continued 4 Undo Symbolic view in detail NOTE Creating objects 136 Every object whether a i i V GSE AED Poni segmen line Y GB point 6 19 4 89 polygon or curve is given Y SC ircle GA GB GA a name and its definition is displayed in Symbolic view E8 The name is the name for it you see in Plot view but prefixed by G ZEEE Thus a point labeled A in Plot view is given the name GA in P g Symbolic view The G prefixed name is a variable that can be read by the computer algebra system CAS Thus in the CAS you can include such variables in calculations Note in the illustration above that GC is the name of the variable that represents a circle drawn in Plot view If you are working in the CAS and wanted to know what the area of that circle is you could enter area GC and press _ _ The CAS is explained in chapter 3 Calculations referencing geometry variables can only be made in the CAS or in the Numeric view of the Geometry app explained below on page 138 They cannot be made in Home view You can change the definition of an object by selecting it tapping QE and altering one or more of its defining parameters The object is modified accordingly in Plot view For example if you selected point GB i
21. 130 of your object to be and Hit Point 1 means tap at the location of the first point you want to add You can draw any number of geometric objects in Plot view See Geometric objects on page 141 for a list of the objects you can draw The drawing tool you choose line circle hexagon etc remains selected until you deselect it This enables you to quickly draw a number of objects of the same type such as a number of hexagons Once you have finished drawing objects of a particular type deselect the drawing tool by press ERM You can tell if a drawing tool is still active by the presence of on screen help at the top left side corner of the screen help such as Hit Point 1 An object in Plot view can be manipulated in numerous ways and its mathematical properties can be easily determined see page 138 Each geometric object you create is given a name In the example shown on page 129 note that the circle has been named C Each defining point is also been named the center point has been named A and the point tapped to set the radius of the circle has been named B It is not only the points that define a geometric object that are given a name Every component of the object that has any geometric significance is also named If for example you create a hexagon the hexagon is given a name as is each point at each vertex In the example at the right the pentagon is named C the points used to define the hexagon are
22. 2665 2 25547 2 25557 2 25117 25993 2 25547 259743 29914 Suppose further that you want to determine the minimum of just the numbers on stack levels 1 2 and 3 You choose the MIN function from the MATH menu and complete the entry as MIN 3 When you press __ _ the minimum of just the last three items on the stack is displayed Manipulating the stack A number of stack manipulation options are available Most appear as menu items across the bottom the screen To see these items you must first select an item in history Function PICK Copies the selected item to stack level 1 The item below the one that is copied is then highlighted Thus if you tapped four times four consecutive items will be moved to the bottom four stack levels levels 1 4 ROLL There are two roll commads Tap ESIA to move the selected item to stack level 1 This is similar to PICK but PICK duplicates the item with the duplicate being placed on stack level1 However ROLL doesn t duplicate an item It simply moves it Tap ESIS to move the item on stack level 1 to the currently highlighted level Reverse Polish Notation RPN 47 Swap Stack DROPN DUPN Echo gt LIST Show an item Delete an item 48 You can swap the position of the objects on stack level 1 with those on stack level 2 Just press 2 3 The level of other objects remains unchanged Note that the entry line must not be active at
23. 3 Tap RHA 4 Make whatever changes are necessary and then tap Deleting configurations You cannot delete the default exam configuration even if you have modified it You can only delete those that you have created To delete a configuration 1 If the Exam Mode screen is not showing press Ea EA top and top CEEA 2 Select the configuration you want to delete from the Configuration list 524 Limiting functionality 3 Tap and choose Delete 4 When asked to confirm the deletion tap press _f _ Limiting functionality 525 526 Limiting functionality Glossary Appendix A app button CAS catalog A small application designed for the study of one or more related topics or to solve problems of a particular type The built in apps are Geometry Function Solve Statistics 1Var Statistics 2Var Inference Parametric Polar Sequence Finance Linear Solver Triangle Solver Linear Explorer Quadratic Explorer Trig Explorer Spreadsheet Advanced Graphing and Datastreamer An app can be filled with the data and solutions for a specific problem It is reusable like a program but easier to use and it records all your settings and definitions An option or menu shown at the bottom of the screen and activated by touch Compare with key Computer Algebra System Use the CAS to perform calculations in symbolic mode Such calculations always return exact answers unlike calculations done i
24. Contains the upper critical value of the experimental variable associated with the positive TestScore value which was calculated from the input a level Contains the degrees of freedom for the t tests Contains the probability associated with the TestScore value For hypothesis tests contains O or 1 to indicate rejection or failure to reject the null hypothesis Contains the Z or t distribution value calculated from the hypothesis test or confidence interval inputs Contains the value of the experimental variable associated with the Test Score Variables Parametric app variables Polar app variables Variables Category Names Symbolic X1 X6 DA Y6 X2 X7 YZ Y7 X3 X8 Y3 Y8 X4 X9 Y4 Y9 X5 XO y5 YO Plot Axes Tstep Cursor Xmax GridDots Xmin GridLines Xtick Labels XzZoom Method Ymax Recenter Ymin Tmin Ytick Tmax YZoom Numeric Automatic NumStep BuildYourOwn NumT ype NumIndep NumZoom NumStart Modes AAngle ADigits AComplex AFormat Category Names Symbolic R1 R6 R2 R7 R3 R8 R4 R9 RS RO 387 Category Plot Numeric Modes Finance app variables Names Continued Omin Omax Ostep Axes Cursor GridDots GridLines Labels Method Automatic BuildYourOwn NumIndep NumStart AAngle AComplex Recenter xmaxX Xmin XELEK Xzoom Ymax Ymin eek Yzoom NumStep NumType NumZoom ADigits AFormat Category Names Numeric CPYR NbPmt BEG PMTV FV PPYR IPYR PV Modes AAngle
25. Functions and commands Plots the graph of an expression of one or two with superposition plotfunc Expr Var x intg color or plotfunc Expr VectVar Intg color Plots the graph of the implicit equation f Var1 Var2 0 plLoOtinpliczrt Expr Vari Varz Plots the graph of the function z x y in the plane where the values of z are represented by different colors plotdensity Expr x xrange y yrange z xstep lystep Draws the tangent of the differential equation y f t y where the first argument is the expression f f y y is the real variable and tis the abscissa the second argument is the vector of abscissa must be listed first and the third argument is the optional range plottield Bxpr VectVar Opt Draws eleven contour lines of the surface defined by the expression z x y for z 10 8 8 10 With a list of values as third argument contour lines will be drawn instead for the z values given in the list plotcontour Expr Xpr ist Vari LstVal Draws the solution of the differential equation y f t y that crosses the point t0 yO where the first argument is the expression f t y the second argument is the vector of abscissa must be listed first and the third argument is 10 yO plotode Expr VectVar VectInitCond Draws the polygonal line through the points of abscissa O n and ordinate l y0 yn or draws the line through the points of absci
26. Mean of x independent values Sum of x values Sum of x values The sample standard deviation of the independent column The population standard deviation of the independent column the standard error of the independent column The statistics displayed when you tap are Sie Deion Mean of y dependent values Sum of y values Sum of y values The sample standard deviation of the dependent column The population standard deviation of the dependent column The standard error of the dependent column 209 Plotting statistical data Tracing a scatter plot Tracing a curve 210 Once you have entered your data selected the data set to analyze and specified your fit model you can plot your data You can plot up to five scatter plots at a time 1 In Symbolic view select the data sets you want to plot 2 Make sure that the full range of your data will be plotted You do this by reviewing and adjusting if necessary the X Rng and Y Rng fields in Plot Setup view Ema EB 3 Press B If the data set and regression line are not ideally positioned Press and select Autoscale Autoscale can be relied upon to give a good starting scale which can then be adjusted later in the Plot Setup view The figures below the plot indicate that the cursor is at the second data point of S1 at 2 1400 Press to move to the next data point and display information about it S1 1 X 2 1
27. Once you have entered your data and defined your data set you can plot your data You can plot up to five box and whisker plots at a time however with the other types you can only plot one at a time 1 In the Symbolic view select the data sets you want to plot 2 From the Plotn menu s elect the plot type 3 For any plot but especially for a histogram adjust the plotting scale and range in the Plot Setup view If you find histogram bars too fat or too thin you can adjust them by changing the HWIDTH setting See Setting up the plot Plot Setup view on page 197 4 Press Ba If the scaling is not to your liking press and select Autoscale Autoscale can be relied upon to give a good starting scale which can then be adjusted in the Plot Setup view 195 Plot types Histogram Box and Whisker plot Normal probability plot Line plot 196 The first set of numbers below the plot indicate where the cursor is In the example at the right the cursor is between 5 and 6 but not including 6 and the frequency for that range is 6 The data set is as defined by H3 in Symbolic view You can see information about other ranges by pressing or The left whisker marks the minimum data value The box marks the first quartile the median and the third quartile The right whisker marks the maximum data value The numbers below the E X H3 Min 2 plot give the statistic at t
28. Returns the factorial of an integer or the solution to the gamma function for a non integer factorial Intg n Real a Returns the value of the abscissa at the maximum value of an expression Without a second argument it is assumed that it the abscissa is x With a variable as second argument it is taken as the abscissa fMax Expr Var Returns the value of the abscissa at the minimum value of an expression Without a second argument it is assumed that it the abscissa is x With a variable as second argument it is taken as the abscissa fMin hxpr Ver Used in programming in loops for which the number of iterations is known Returns a real number as a string with the indicated format f float s scientific e engineering format Real Str f 4 s5 e6 For a given integer n representing a fraction and an integer p the modulus returns the fraction a b such that n a b mod p fracmod Intg n Intg p Functions and commands froot fsolve function_diff gauss GETPIX_C GF gramschmidt green half_cone half_line halftan2hypexp Functions and commands Returns the list of roots and poles of a rational polynomial Each root or pole is followed by its multiplicity froot Rateoly Returns the numerical solution of an equation or a system of equations With the optional third argument you can specify a guess for the solution or an interval within which it is expected t
29. The micro A connector with the rectangular end must be inserted into the USB port on the sending calculator 3 On the sending calculator highlight the object you want to send and tap ESE In the illustration at Program Catalog Saas Sequence OKB the right a program cas ce na med Scores OKB TriangleCalcs SimpleCounter lt 1KB has been selected in the Program Catalog 4 and will be sent to the connected calculator when is tapped 4 What happens on the receiving calc Online Help Press to open the online help The help initially provided is context sensitive that is it is always about the current view and its menu items l A For example to get help on the Function app press W select Function and press a From within the help system you can navigate to other help topics You can find help on any key view or command And tapping displays a hierarchical directory of all the help topics 42 Getting started Reverse Polish Notation RPN The HP Prime provides you with three ways of entering objects in Home view e Textbook An expression is entered in much the same way was if you were writing it on paper with some arguments above or below or others In other words your entry could be two dimensional as in the following example LN 5 T e Algebraic An expression is entered on a single line Your entry is always one dimensional The same calculation as above would ap
30. beginning on page 373 In a program you can declare variables for use only within a particular function This is done using a LOCAL declaration The use of LOCAL variables enables you to declare and use variables that will not affect the rest of the calculator LOCAL variables are not bound to a particular type that is you can store floating point numbers integers lists matrices and symbolic expressions in a variable with any local name Although the system will allow you to store different types in the same local variable this is poor programming practice and should be avoided Variables declared in a program should have descriptive names For example a variable used to store the radius of a circle is better named RADIUS than VGFTRFG You are more likely to remember what the variable is used for if its name matches its purpose If a variable is needed after the program executes it can be exported from the program using the EXPORT command To do this the first command in the program that is on a line above the program name would be EXPORT RADIUS Then if a value is assigned to RADIUS the name appears on the variables menu 2 3 and is visible globally This feature allows for extensive and powerful interactivity among different environments in the HP Prime Note that if another program exports a variable with the same name the most recently exported version will be active The program below prompts the user for the va
31. on the entry line and then enter the operator Thus your entry line would look like this before entering the operator Pe However you could also have entered the arguments separately and then with a blank entry line entered the operator J Your history would look like this before entering the operator T 3 14159265359 3 3 _ th If there are no entries in history and you enter an operator or function an error message appears An error message will also appear if there is an entry on a stack level that an operator needs but it is not an appropriate argument for that operator For example pressing when there is a string on level 1 displays an error message An operator or function will work only on the minimum number of arguments necessary to produce a result Thus if you enter on the entry line 2 4 6 8 and press J stack level 1 shows 48 Multiplication needs only two arguments so the two arguments last entered are the ones that get multiplied The entries 2 and 4 are not ignored 2 is placed on stack level 3 and 4 on stack level 2 Where a function can accept a variable number of arguments you need to specify how many arguments you want it to include in its operation You do this by specifying the number in parentheses straight after the function name You then press to evaluate the function For example suppose your stack looks like this Reverse Polish Notation RPN Spreadsheet 2254
32. tsimplify type UFACTOR unapply UNTIL Functions and commands tan2sincos2 Expr With a curve as argument draws the tangent line to the curve at point A With a surface as argument draws the tangent plane to the surface at point A tangent Curve or surface C Pnt A Used in programming to introduce a statement dependent on a conditional statement Used in programming in a loop when expressing the range of values of a variable for which a statement should be executed With a vector and a point as arguments returns the point translated by the vector with two points as arguments returns the second point translated by the vector from the origin to the first point translation Vect Pnt C Returns a matrix transposed without conjugation transpose Mtrx Draws a triangle with vertices at the three points ErPrangle Pn or Cplx Pnt or Cplx Pnt or Cp1x Returns a value or a list of values truncated to n decimal places If n is not provided it is taken as O Accepts complex numbers trunc Real LstReal Int n Returns an expression with transcendentals rewritten as complex exponentials tsimplify Expr Returns the type of an expression e g list string type Expr Factorizes a unit in a unit object ufactor Unit Unie Returns the function defined by an expression and a variable unapply Expr Var Used in programming to indicate the conditions under which a s
33. want to solve a two equation set tap a 0 Infinite number of solutions L Edit 2x2 3x3 __ J Note You can enter any expression that resolves to a numerical result including variables Just enter the name of a variable For more information on assigning values to variables see Storing a value in a variable on page 39 Menu items The menu items are QEETBB moves the cursor to the entry line where you can add or change a value You can also highlight a field enter a value and press _ J The cursor automatically moves to the next field where you can enter the next value and press _ EBB displays the page for solving a system of 2 linear equations in 2 variables changes to when active ESB displays the page for solving a system of 3 linear equations in 3 variables changes to when active Linear Solver app 245 246 Linear Solver app 14 Parametric app The Parametric app enables you to explore parametric equations These are equations in which both x and y are defined as functions of t They take the forms x f t and y g t Getting started with the Parametric app Open the Parametric app Parametric app The Parametric app uses the customary app views Symbolic Plot and Numeric described in chapter 4 For a description of the menu buttons available in this app see Symbolic view Summary of menu buttons on page 76 e Plot view Su
34. 104 F maximum Avoid getting the calculator wet Battery operates at 6 0V dc 80mA maximum Status messages Message Meaning Bad Argument Incorrect input for this Type operation Bad Argument The value is out of range for this Value operation Infinity error Math exception such as 1 0 Insufficient You must recover some memory Memory to continue operation Delete one or more customized apps matrices lists notes or programs Insufficient Not enough data points for the Statistics Data calculation For two variable statistics there must be two columns of data and each column must have at least four numbers 532 Message Invalid Dimension Invalid Statistics Data Invalid Syntax Name Conflict No equations checked Receive Error Too Few Arguments Undefined Name Undefined Result Out of Memory Meaning Continued Array argument had wrong dimensions Need two columns with equal numbers of data values The function or command you entered does not include the proper arguments or order of arguments The delimiters parentheses commas periods and semi colons must also be correct Look up the function name in the index to find its proper syntax The where function attempted to assign a value to the variable of integration or summation index You must enter and check an equation in the Symbolic view before entering the Plot view Problem with data reception
35. Example In Home view store Function ali 3 5 8 12 17 23 in L5 and find the first differences for the list Shift 8 3 5 8 12 17 23 gt L5 3 5 8 12 17 23 3 5 8 12 17 23 ALIST LS 2 3 4 5 6 Q mr a ae a a m 7 5 v L ane ALPHA Enter 6 7 alpha Vv L 5 407 XLIST TILIST Calculates the sum of all elements in a list EELIST list Example SLIST 2 3 4 returns 9 Calculates the product of all elements in list TILIstT list Example TILIST 2 3 4 returns 24 Finding statistical values for lists To find statistical values such as the mean median maximum and minimum of a list you create a list store it in a data set and then use the Statistics 1 Var app Example 408 In this example use the Statistics 1 Var app to find the mean median maximum and minimum values of the elements in the list L1 being 88 90 89 65 70 and 89 1 In Home view create L1 88 90 89 65 70 89 O 1 In Home view store LI in DI ALPHA 2 1 E 2 alpha J Define D You will now be able 88 90 89 65 70 89 gt L1 88 90 89 65 70 89 re a a a oan s Function ssi 88 90 89 65 70 89 L1 88 90 89 65 70 89 L1 gt D1 88 90 89 65 70 89 ED A ED ED ES EE to see the list data in the Numeric view of the Statistics 1 Var app Lists Select Statistics 1Var Notice that your list elements are in data set D1 In the Symbolic view specify t
36. Factor List GCD LCM Create Poly to Coef Coef to Poly Roots to Coef Roots to Poly Random 308 divis Poly or Stroy Returns the list of prime factors of a polynomial or a list of polynomials Each factor is followed by its multiplicity Factors Poly or LstPoly Returns the greatest common divisor of two polynomials of several ged Poly Poly Returns the lowest common multiple of two polynomials of several lem Poly Poly With a variable as second argument returns the coefficients of a polynomial with respect to the variable With a list of as second argument returns the internal format of the polynomial symb2poly Expr Var or symbZ2poly Expr ListVar With one list as argument returns a polynomial in x with coefficients in decreasing order obtained from the list With a variable as second argument returns a polynomial in the variable as for one argument but the polynomial is in the variable specified in the second argument poly2symb Lst Var Returns the coefficients in decreasing order of the univariate polynomial of roots specified in the argument pcoef Vect Returns the rational function that has the roots and poles specified in the argument fcoeff st root pole order Returns a polynomial of variable specified in the first argument of degree n and where the coefficients are random integers in the range 99 through 99 with uniform distribution or
37. Function o 2 5 729 2 5 729 16 2 5 16 2 Eee ED OS ED SS CE Function a 66 33 11 M6 66 33 11 FE ED ED OE OD In Home view enter the name of the vector or matrix and press Enter If the vector or matrix is empty zero is returned inside double square brackets 415 To display one element To store one element To send a matrix In Home view enter matrixname row column For example if M2 is 3 4 5 6 then M2 1 2 Ete Jreturns 4 In Home view enter value tap ESB and then enter matrixname row column For example to change the element in the first row and second column of M5 to 728 and then display the resulting matrix 728 Function kl Eas 728 gt M5 1 2 2 5 728 16 2 An attempt to store an eS a a SD element to a row or column beyond the size of the matrix results in re sizing the matrix to allow the storage Any intermediate cells will be filled with zeroes You can send matrices between calculators just as you can send apps programs lists and notes See Sharing data on page 40 for instructions Matrix arithmetic Example 416 You can use the arithmetic functions x and powers with matrix arguments Division left multiplies by the inverse of the divisor You can enter the matrices themselves or enter the names of stored matrix variables The matrices can be real or complex For the next examples store 1 2 3 4 in M1 an
38. INPUT ROLLS Num of ol Le N Enter numrolls 25 FLOOR ROLLS PROLLS IF ROLLS lt 1 THEN MSGBOX u must enter a num gt 1 END UNTIL ROLLS gt 1 END PLOT BEGIN 1 gt Xmin MAX D1 1 gt Xmax Oy Ymin MAX D2 1 gt Ymax START YV LEW 1 1 END 463 The program DICESIMVARS The ROLLMANY routine is an adaptation of the program presented earlier in this chapter Since you cannot pass parameters to a program called through a selection from a custom Views menu the exported variables SIDES and ROLLS are used in place of the parameters that were used in the previous versions The program above calls two other user programs ROLLDIE and DICESIMVARS ROLLDIE appears earlier in this chapter Here is DICESIMVARS Create a program with that name and enter the following code EXPORT ROLLS SIDES EXPORT DICESIMVARS BEGIN 10 gt ROLLS 6 gt SIDES END Press to see the DiceSimulation 14 291 custom app menu Here you can set the number of sides of the dice the TT number of rolls and paR execute a simulation After running a simulation press to see a histogram of your simulation results Doesn t work in build 3105 Program commands 464 This section describes each program command The commands under the menu are described first The commands under the menu are described in Commands under the Cmds menu on page 470 Programming Comman
39. LO F edit Delete send name Lists 399 2 Tap on the name you L want to assign to the new list L1 L2 etc The list editor appears If you re creating a new list rather than M TOMEI changing make sure you choose a list with out any elements in it 3 Enter the values you want in the list pressing __ t _ after each one Values can be real or ik complex numbers or PWN an expression If you enter a expression It is evaluated and the result is inserted in _ ins Delete Size Lists the list 4 When done press lw a List to return to the List catalog or press EAB io go to Home view List Catalog The buttons and keys in the List Catalog are Buttons and keys Button or Key Purpose Opens the highlighted list for editing You can also just tap on a list name or Deletes the contents of the selected list Transmits the highlighted list to another HP Prime E3 Clear Clears all lists PM Ct a 1 ee ee ee ee ee t a BERT st Moves to the ena or the beginning sche x kof the catalog ee a a a a a a a ae a a a a a a a a a a w oe Ce ee a a 400 Lists The List Editor The List Editor is a special environment for entering data into lists There are two ways to open the List Editor once the List Catalog is open e Highlight the list and tap or Tap the name of the list List
40. Linear Solver app functions cc eeceeeeceeeeeseeeeeeeeeeeeaaeee ees 334 Triangle Solver app functions cccceeccceeeseeeceeeesseeeeeeens 335 Linear Explorer functions cccccccesseeccceesseeeeeeeseeeeeeeeaas 336 Quadratic Explorer functions ccccceeseeecceeeseeeeeessneeeees 336 Geometry app function sssccncerencnatceniacnehtes iuecsdeereerebiciatel 337 COMMONIG PP AUNCHONS esee E EE G ISL CAN men iaiachaz cima e A a naalonsdaenaadlnae anaes 338 Creating your own functions Aci ox atseeialbatcectitaiotetely 371 21 Variables ELODIE VN ADCS seror ae r E E 377 App yanaDleS eirese AAG 378 Function app Var lOO OSs ijacs toate trie cucicaoactiaagt annie ceisedetencatnes 378 Geometry app variables lt s c5 0c4tesatarhladiteshdacteducudeoudes 379 Spreadsheet app variables cccceceeeccccesseeeceseesaeeeees 379 Advanced Graphing app variables cccccceeeeeeeeeeees 380 Solve app variables 4 idsadtss ne cedunesueacadenasosaten Ee 380 Statistics 1Var app variables ccccccceesecccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeees 381 Statistics 2Var app variables sssnnenessennseseerssrreesseen 383 Inference app variables cccccsecccccceeeeeeceeeeeeeeeseesenes 385 Parametric app variables ccceccccceeseeeccceeseeeeeeeeneees 387 Polar app VOriGleS 4 4055 i 0cet tossed a 387 Finance app variables ccccccesseecceceeeeeecceeeseeeeeseeaeees 388 Linear Solver app variables
41. Pnt M or Real a y ellipse p x y conic si deg p 2 excircle A B C draws the A excircle of the ABC triangle excircle Pnt or Cplx Pnt or Cplx Pnt or Cp1x hyperbola F1 F2 M hyperbola focus F1 F2 through M or MF 1 MF2 2 a geo2d and hyperbola p x y draws the conic if deg p 2 hyperbola Focus F1 Focus F2 Pnt M or Real a incircle A B C draws the incircle of the ABC triangle incircle Pnt or Cplx Pnt or Cplx Pnt or Cp1x locus M A draws the locus of M or locus d A draws the envelope of d when A element C C is a curve The example instructions below must be written in a geometric level on different lines locus Pnt Elem Geometry parabola Transform homothety inversion projection reflection rotation Geometry parabola F A focus F top A in the plane ABP or parabola A c of equa y yA c xxA 2 c 1 2 p and FA p 2 geo2d and parabola P x y draws the conic if deg P 2 parabola Pnt F Pnt xAt i yA Pnt A Real c 1 LENEXEN homothety C k A point Al such as vect C A1 k vect C A i e in 2 d it is the similarity center C coeff abs k and angle arg k homothety Pnt C Real k Pnt A inversion C k A point Al such as A1 on line C A and mes_alg CA1 CA k inversion Pnt C Real k Pnt A isobarycenter Pnt or Cols Pnt or Cplx Pnt or Cpilx projection C A is the orthogonal projection of A on the curv
42. Power Exponent 6 Ifyou want to 7 Logistic choose a color for _ Quadratic Cubic the graph of the data in Plot view see Choose a color for plots on page 74 7 If you have more than one analysis defined in Symbolic view deselect any analysis you are not currently interested in Explore statistics Find the correlation r between advertising time and sales Num x Se i 8 995309 1 The correlation is fk ap te r 0 8995 scov ZXY 9 Find the mean advertising time 6 666667E 1 The mean advertising time a i 3 33333333333 X is 3 33333 minutes Statistics 2Var app 201 Setup plot Plot the graph Display the equation 202 10 Find the mean sales F The mean sales 7 is approximately 1 796 Press X y LY ES sY 7312623 2 oY 0576446E2 serrY 3 1562746E2 1795 83333333 return to Numeric view 11 Change the plotting range to ensure that all the data points are plotted and to select a different data point indicator if you wish em Setup 100 4000 12 Plot the graph Notice that the regression curve that is a curve to best fit the data points is plotted by default Statistics 2Var Plot Setup S1 Mark I S2 Mark S3 Mark S4 Mark 33 S5 Mark gt i X Rng 1 8 30 Y Rng 100 4000 Y Tick 1 Enter horizontal tick spacing Cae ee S1 1 X
43. Valid values are in the range 64 to 65 If m or bits is omitted the default value is used Example SETBITS 1111 b15 returns 1111b 15 Syntax SETBASE integer m c Displays integer expressed in base m in whatever base is indicated by c where can be 1 for binary 2 for octal or 3 for hexadecimal Parameter m can be b for binary d for decimal o for octal or h for hexadecimal If m is omitted the input is assumed to be in the default base Likewise if c is omitted the output is displayed in the default base Examples SETBASE 340 1 returns 11100b while GETBASE 1101 returns 0h if the default base is hexadecimal I O commands are used for inputting data into a program and for outputting data from a program They allow users to interact with programs These commands start the Matrix and List editors Syntax CHOOSE var title item1 item2 itemn Displays a choose box with the title and containing the choose items If the user selects an object the variable whose name is provided will be updated to contain the number of the selected object an integer 1 2 3 or O if the user taps EREA Returns true not zero if the user selects an object otherwise return false 0 Example Enean eT CHOOSE N PickHhero PickHero puler Gauss Euler W WW LAJ Gauss Newton Newton TF N 1 THEN CHOOSE TEST PRINT You CHOOSE_TEST picked a ae ee ee ee
44. cells is given a blue border To name an empty cell row or column go the cell row header or column header enter a name and tap ERED To name a cell block row or column whether it is empty or not 1 Select the cell block row or column 2 Tap and select Name 3 Enter a name and tap MS The name you give a cell or block of cells can be used in a formula For example if you name a cell TOTAL you could enter in another cell the formula TOTAL 1 1 Spreadsheet The following is a more complex example involving the naming of an entire column 1 Select cell A that is the header cell for column A 2 Enter COST and tap 3 Select cell B that is the header cell for column B Hiss rs es Re es 4 Enter AMR cosT 0 33 and tap 5 Enter some values in column A and observe the calculated results in column B Entering content Direct entry Spreadsheet You can enter content directly in the spreadsheet or import data from a statistics app A cell can contain any valid calculator object a real number 3 14 a complex number a ib an integer 1Ah a list 1 2 a matrix or vector 1 2 a string text a unit 2_m or an expression that is a formula Move to the cell you want to add content to and start entering the content as you would in Home view Press when you have finished You can also enter content into a number of cells with a single entry Just sele
45. element Curve or Real interval Pat or Real With three points F1 F2 and M as arguments draws an ellipse with foci at F1 and F2 that passes though M With two points and a real F1 F2 and a as arguments draws an ellipse with foci at F1 and F2 that passes through point M such that MF1 MF2 2a With one second degree polynomial p x y as argument draws the ellipse defined when the polynomial is set to equal O ellipse Pnt F1 Pnt F2 Pnt M or Real a or ellipse p x y Used in programming to introduce the false clause in a conditional statement Used in programming to end a set of statements that should be taken as a single statement With three arguments draws the equilateral triangle ABC of side AB With four arguments draws the equilateral triangle ABC in the plane ABP equilateral triangle Pnt A or Cols Pnt B or Cplx Pnt P Var C Functions and commands EVAL evalc evalf exact exbisector excircle EXP exponential_ regression EXPORT EXPR Functions and commands Evaluates an expression eval Expr Returns an complex expression written in the form real i imag evalc Expr With one argument returns the numerical evaluation of it With a second argument returns the numerical evaluation of the first argument with the number of significant figures taken from the second argument evalf Expr Int Converts an irrational expression to a rational
46. for 2 D or of a complex number or of the the list of rectangular coordinates polar Coordinates Pn or Colx or lstRececoord Returns the point having the line as polar with respect to the circle pole Crcle Line Draws a convex polyhedron with vertices among the arguments polyhedron SegPnt A B C Returns the real number d 2 R 2 d distance between point and center R radius powerpc Circle Pnt or Cplx Draws a prism with plane base ABCD and with edges parallel to AA1 the faces are parallelograms prism LstPnt A B C D Pnt A1 Geometry pyramid radical_axis reciprocation single_inter slopeat slopeatraw sphere vector Geometry Draws the regular direct pyramid ABCD with vertices A B and a face in the plan A B C when there are 3 arguments and the pyramid ABCD when there are 4 arguments pyramid Pnt A Pnt B Pnt C Pnt D Returns the line of points with same powerpc with respect to the 2 circles radical axis Crcle Crcle Returns the list where a point resp a line are replaced with its polar resp pole with respect to the circle C reciprocation Crcle Lst Pnt Line Gives one of the intersections of 2 curves or surfaces or the intersection near A or not in L single inter Curve Curve Pnt A LstPnt L slopeat d zO displays at the point zO with a legend the value of the slope of the line or segment d Sslopeat Line Pnt Cpl
47. if you have provided insufficient data If you are determining the lengths and angles of a right angled triangle a simpler input form is available by tapping Gs Getting started with the Triangle Solver app Open the Triangle Solver app Triangle Solver app The following example calculates the unknown length of the side of a triangle whose two known sides of lengths 4 and 6 meet at an angle of 30 degrees 1 Open the Triangle Triangle Solver 10849 Solver app Enter 3 out of 6 values Select Triangle Solver c The app opens in i a Numeric view l E Enter length of side a Fait Degree Rect _ Solve 271 Set angle measure Note Specify the known values 2 2 2 If there is unwanted data from a previous calculation you can clear it all by pressing Clear Make sure that your angle measure mode is appropriate By default the app starts in degree mode If the angle information you have is in radians and your current angle measure mode is degrees change the mode to degrees before running the solver Tap or depending on the mode you want The button is a toggle button The lengths of the sides are labeled a b and e and the angles are labeled A B and C It is important that you enter the known values in the appropriate fields In our example we know the length of two sides and the angle at which those sides meet Hence if we specify the lengths of sides a and b we must enter
48. only in a particular app is described in the chapter dedicated to that app Numeric view provides a table of evaluations Each definition in Symbolic view is evaluated for a range of values for the independent variable You can set the range and fineness of the independent variable or leave it to the default settings Big Defn Width Press to open Numeric view Unlike in Plot view zooming in Numeric view does not affect the size of what is displayed Instead it changes the increment between consecutive values of the independent variable that is the NUMSTEP setting in the Numeric Setup view see page 95 Zooming in decreases the increment zooming out increases the increment The row that was highlighted before the zoom remains unchanged For the ordinary zoom in and zoom out options the degree of Zooming is determined by the zoom factor In Numeric view this is the NUMZOOM field in the Numeric Setup view The default value is 4 Thus if the current increment that is the NUMSTEP value is 0 4 zooming in will further divide that interval by four smaller intervals So instead of xvalues of 10 10 4 10 8 11 2 etc the xvalues will be 10 10 1 10 2 10 3 10 4 etc Zooming out An introduction to HP apps Zoom options Zoom keys Zoom menu does the opposite 10 10 4 10 8 11 2 etc becomes10 11 6 13 2 14 8 16 4 etc _Zoom Big Defn Width fj Zoom Big Defn Width Befo
49. orange on a key will be entered in lowercase when a key is pressed See Adding text on page 20 for more information The user keyboard is active All the following key presses will enter the customized objects associated with the key See The User Keyboard Customizing key presses on page 455 for more information The user keyboard is active The next key press will enter the custom ized object associated with the key See The User Keyboard Customiz ing key presses on page 455 for more information Current time The default is 24 hour format but you can choose AM PM format See Home settings on page 27 for more information Navigation Touch gestures Annunciator Meaning Continued i Battery charge indicator The HP Prime offers two modes of navigation touch and keys In many cases you can tap on an icon field menu or object to select or deselect it For example you can open the Function app by tapping once on its icon in the Application Library However to open the Application Library you will need to press a key GB Selections can often be made either by tapping or by using the keys For instance as well as tapping an icon in the Application Library you can also press the cursor keys until the app you want to open is highlighted and then press _ t _ In the Application Library you can also type the first one or two letters of an app s name to highli
50. plane Pnt or Eg Pnt or Line Pnt Draws the points of the plane whose coordinates satisfy the inequations of two plotinequation Expr x xrange y yrange xste p lystep With a complex a t i b t and a list of values for the variable t as arguments draws the parametric representation of the curve defined by x a t and y g t over the interval specified in the second argument With a list of expressions of two a u v b u v c u v and a list of values for the u u0 u1 v v0 v1 as arguments draws the surface detined by x a u v y b u v and z c u v over the intervals specitied by in the second argument plotparam Cplx Lst Var Lst Var For an expression f x draws the polar curve r f x for x over the interval VarMin to VarMax plotpolar Expr Var VarMin VarMax Displays the pth terms of the sequence u 0 a u n f u n 1 359 point polar polar_coordinates polar_point pole POLYCOEF POLYEVAL polygon polygonplot polygonscatterplo t polyhedron 360 plotseg Expr f Var Var a xm xM Intg p With a complex as argument plots it With the coordinates of a point in three dimensions as argument plots it point Cplx Vect sahil the line of the conjugated points of A with respect to a circle polar Crcle Pnt or Cplx A Returns the list of the norm and of the argument of the affix of a point complex number or list of rectangular coordinates polar coordin
51. sincos Expr With two curves or two surfaces as arguments returns one of the intersections of the two curves or surfaces With to curves or surfaces and a point or list of points as arguments returns an intersection of the curves or surfaces that is nearest to the point or not in the list of points single inter Curve Curve Pnt A LstPnt L Displays the value at point zO of the slope of the line or segment d A legend is provided slopeat Line Pnt Cp1x z0 Displays the value at point zO of the slope of the line or segment d slopeatraw Line Pnt Cplx z0 With two points as arguments draws the sphere of diameter made by the line from one point to another With a point and a real as arguments draws the sphere with center at the point and radius given by the real sphere Pnt or Vect Pnt or Real Returns the natural spline through the points given by two lists The polynomials in the spline are in variable x and of degree spline Lst 1x Lst ly Var x Intg d Returns the square root of an expression sqrt Expr Draws the square of side AB in the plane ABP square Pnt A or Cplx Pnt B or Cp1x Pnt P Var C Var D Returns the standard deviance of the elements in a list with the second argument as pound or returns the list of standard deviances of the columns of a matrix What does the pound mean stddev Lst Mtrx Lst 367 stddevp STEP sto sturmseq
52. sturmsegq Poly Var a b 309 Functions and commands Chinese Remainder Special Cyclotomic Groebner Basis Groebner Remainder Hermite Lagrange Laguerre Legendre Chebyshev Tn Chebyshev Un 310 Returns the Chinese remainder of the polynomials written as lists of coefficients or in symbolic form chianrem lst Expry ist Expr bst Expr Lst Expr Returns the list of coefficients of the cyclotomic polynomial of an integer cyclotomic Int Returns the Groebner basis of the ideal spanned by a list of polynomials gbasis LstPoly LstVar Returns the remainder of the division of a polynomial by the Groebner basis of a list of polynomials greduce Poly LstPoly LstVar Returns the Hermite polynomial of degree n hermite Intg n Returns the Lagrange polynomial for two lists The list in the first argument corresponds to the abscissa values and the list in the second argument corresponds to the ordinate values Lagrange LSE xk bst yk or lagrange Mtrx 2 n Returns the Laguerre polynomial of degree n laguerre Intg n Returns the Legendre polynomial of degree n legendre Intg n Returns the Tchebyshev polynomial of first kind of degree n tchebyshevl Intg n Returns the Tchebyshev polynomial of second kind of degree n tchebyshev2 Intg n Functions and commands Plot Function Implicit Density Slopefield Contour ODE List
53. the same seed value on two or more calculators you ensure that the same random numbers appear on each calculator when RAND is executed RANDSEED value 293 Density Normal Binomial 294 Normal probability density function Computes the probability density at value x given the mean u and standard deviation o of a normal distribution If only one argument is supplied it is taken as x and the assumption is that u 0 and o 1 NORMALD U 0 x Example NORMALD 0 5 and NORMALD 0 1 0 5 both return 0 352065326764 Student s t probability density function Computes the probability density of the Student s t distribution at x given n degrees of freedom STUDENT n x Example student 3 5 2 returns 0 00366574413491 x probability density function Computes the probability density of the x distribution at x given n degrees of freedom CHISQUARE n x Example CHISQUARE 2 3 2 returns 0 100948258997 Fisher or Fisher Snedecor probability density function Computes the probability density at the value x given numerator n and denominator d degrees of freedom FISHER n d x Example FISHER 5 5 2 returns 0 158080231095 Binomial probability density function Computes the probability of k successes out of n trials each with a probability of success of p Returns Comb n k if there is no third argument Note that n and k are integers with k lt n BINOMIAL n k p Example Suppose
54. 2 1400 13 Return to the Symbolic view 4Setup Note the expression in the Fit1 field It shows that the slope Statistics 2Var Symbolic View TI E Type Linear E Fit1 425 875 X 376 25 IPE Type2 Linear We Fit2 M X B GEE Enter independent column Statistics 2Var app Predict values Statistics 2Var app m of the regression line is 425 875 and the y intercept b is 376 25 Let s now predict the sales figure if advertising were to go up to 6 minutes 14 Press or to set Return to the Plot view The trace option is active by default This option will move 1 3 X 3 1100 the cursor from data point to data point as you press or As YOu move from data point to data point the corresponding x and y values appear at the bottom of the screen In this example the x axis represents minutes of advertising and the y axis represents sales However there is no data point for 6 minutes Thus we cannot move the cursor to x 6 Instead we need to predict what y will be when x 6 based on the data we do have To do that we need to trace the regression curve not the data points we have the cursor to trace the regression line rather than the data points The cursor jumps PREDY 1653 875 from whatever data point it was on to the regression curve Repeatedly press until x 6 If the x value is not shown at the bottom left
55. 216 The table below summarizes the options available in Symbolic view for the two inference methods hypothesis test and confidence interval Hypothesis Test Confidence Interval ZTest 1 u the Z Zint 1 u the confidence Test on one mean interval for one mean based on the Normal distribution ZTest u up the Zint 11 u the confidence Z Test on the interval for the difference difference between between two means based on two means the Normal distribution Z Test 1 z the Z Z Int 1 2 the confidence Test on one interval for one proportion proportion based on the Normal distribution ZTest ny n the Zint n n the confidence ZTest on the interval for the difference difference between between two proportions two proportions based on the Normal distribution T Test 1 u the T T Int 1 u the confidence Test on one mean interval for one mean based on the Student s t distribution T Test u4 us the T Int u4 uo the confidence T Test on the interval for the difference difference between between two means based on two means the Student s t distribution If you choose one of the hypothesis tests you can choose an alternative hypothesis to test against the null hypothesis For each test there are three possible choices for an alternative hypothesis based on a quantitative comparison of two quantities The null hypothesis is always that the two quantities are equal Thus the alternati
56. 3 Tap and choose Measure gt Area Note that area appears on the entry line ready fro you specity the object whose area you are interested in 6coordinates 7 distance All the Geometry commands are explained in Geometry functions and commands on page 151 138 Geometry NOTE Tap BEB choose Curves and then the curve whose area you are interested in The name of the object is placed between the parentheses You could have entered the command and object name manually that is without choosing them from menus If you enter object names manually remember that the name of the object in Plot view must be given a G prefix if it is used in any calculation Thus the circle named C in Plot view must be referred to as GC in Numeric view and Symbolic view Press or tap The area is displayed 6 Top EES Enter radius GC and Geometry Numeric View araa 1 1 area GC 157 079632679 tap The radius is displayed Note that the syntax used here is the same as you use in the CAS to calculate the properties of geometric objects Fecit v New 1 Delete The Geometry functions and their syntax are described in Geometry functions and commands on page 151 Press to go back to Plot view Now manipulate the circle is some way that changes its area and radius For example select the center point A and use the cursor keys to move it to a new location Remember t
57. 6 will take you straight to the List category Press gt to move to the sub menu of list functions select a or press function and either tap List functions are enclosed in parentheses They have arguments that and separated by commas as in CONCAT L1 L2 An argument can be either a list variable name such as L1 or the actual list For example REVERSE 11 2455 s Common operators like x and can take lists as arguments If there are two arguments and both are lists then the lists must have the same length since the calculation pairs the elements If there are two arguments and one is a real number then the calculation operates on each element of the list Example 5 1 2 3 returns 5 10 15 Besides the common operators that can take numbers matrices or lists as arguments there are commands that can only operate on lists By default a List function is presented on the Math menu using its descriptive name not its common command name Thus the shorthand name CONCAT is presented as Concatenate and POS is presented as Position 405 Make List Sort Reverse Concatenate 406 If you prefer the Math menu to show command names instead deselect the Menu Display option on page 2 of the Home Settings screen see page 26 Calculates a sequence of elements for a new list using the syntax MAKELIST expression variable begin end increment Evaluates expression with respect to variab
58. 81 82 sorting the app list 297 Triangle Solver 213 app functions 502 Common 468 Finance 464 Function 460 Inference 464 Linear Solver 466 Statistics 1 Var 462 Statistics 2Var 463 Triangle Solver 467 app variables list of 484 Mode 455 Numeric view 445 Plot view 437 Results 456 Symbolic view 441 app views Symbolic view 83 arc cosine 301 arc sine 301 arc tangent 301 area between curves 128 arguments conventions 355 B backspace 18 bad argument 510 bar plot 149 battery indicator 14 block commands 412 Boolean operators 18 box and whisker plot 149 branch commands 413 butons menu 17 buttons command 17 541 C calculus functions 306 CAS 479 CAS variables 495 catalog 479 clearing an app 296 characters 34 display 34 clone memory 381 cobweb graph 199 coefficient of determination 163 command button 17 commands app 410 assignment 413 block 412 branch 413 definition of 410 480 drawing 414 I O 422 loop 426 matrix 429 string 431 test 433 variable 435 complex number 307 complex number functions 307 complex numbers 38 storing 39 confidence interval 168 contidence intervals 180 constants 307 308 mathematical 307 physical 331 509 program 508 context sensitive menu 17 copying display 35 notes 369 programs 396 542 correlation coefficient 163 covariance 161 critical value s displayed 170 D data set definition 154 DataStreamer 80 debugging programs 394 decimal changing format 28 default value r
59. A A 15 C ntextsensitive Meniere e a E EE ear ues 17 Eniiveand edik keys eaea n aE A 17 SMN KEV s eS EE E TO REO 19 Adding Tei marea eee A A A ee Tee 20 MAKE VS arie O A E T ocua ease eacn cada 20 AS E TENET E anaes E 25 TOOIDOK Me US css a EE tite a a eG 26 OUT TONS e teres oc ret tinaeet ls Oeste E E A 26 System wide settings cccccccsssecccecsseeceeceseeeeessaeeeeeessaeeeeess 27 Fomes ehin cna T E nas 27 Specifying a Home Setting ccccccsseecccceeseeeceeesseeseeeesanees 31 Mathematical calculations cccccccessecccceeeeeeeeceeeaeeeeeeasaeeeeees 32 Choosing an entry type ccccccccceseeeccceesseeeeceesseeeeeeeeseeees 33 Eniering expressio NS erra eE A 34 Reusing previous expressions and results ccccesseeeeeeeees 36 Storing a value in a variable ccccc ccc eeeccceeeeeeeeeeesae ees 39 Complex numbers sca Gviacncreietietd uaeinting Gia otetedenaetaeeccen tees 40 SES ES e e PEE I E E EE TE E EE 40 SE E o A EAE litt EA E N E meaecereas 42 2 Reverse Polish Notation RPN Fistory In REIN ModS 225 aks unseat wile cei As ida dea phouentrea dea tace alias 44 SEMPleVCGICUGNONS ssie 45 Manip lating the stack 2024 noi cusinc cat asi eure anansieaebaadle 47 3 Computer algebra system CAS AS estas easier one E es 51 Contents CAS OGG UICC S ennn tecat doar aiadd EEEE 52 DOMINOS eren sie eccsnccus grec a te eateccntate 53 An introduction to HP apps Application OBTA cea r taasee whch cect ata a eae eas
60. COM QUINN ONS esee aa sasteuseieun neste arc tesedtcarewies 519 Modifying the default configuration ccccccceseeecceeeeee ees 520 Creating a new configuration cccccccsseeccceeseeeeeeesseeeeees 521 Activating Exam Mode i sax ci Secitus caren suialon ta atodectiu ase acebeasedaehitts 522 Cancelling exam MOde cccccceseecccceeseeeceeeesseeeecessaeeees 524 Modifying configurations w0 4224 acaybacseetuagedsnsvatursasecaeseedentors 524 To change a configuration sssssssesssinssssiirsssrrrsrrrrere 524 Deleting configurations ccccccceseeececeeseeeeeceesseeeseeaenes 524 A Glossary B Troubleshooting Calculator not responding ccccscecccceeeeeecceesseeeeceesaeeseeseeas 531 Tores EN nene ir a A E ATA 531 To restore factory SetHiINGS ccccccccssseecceeeeeeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeas 531 If the calculator does not turn on sssssseesssnesssseeeesssrnessen 531 Operating MiS srein E asaatdauetaseens 532 Staus MESSAGES srne a A E needles 532 C Product Regulatory Information Federal Communications Commission Notice ccccceseeeeees 535 European Union Regulatory Notice ccccccceesseesceeeseeeeees 537 e E EEEN E E E E A EE 541 8 Contents Preface Manual conventions The following conventions are used in this manual to represent the keys that you press and the menu options that you choose to perform operations Preface A key that initiates an unshitted function is
61. Cplx Pnt or Cplx Shows the orthocenter of a triangle or of the triangle made with 3 points orthocenter Pnt or Cplix Pnt or Cplx Pnt or Cpilx A point za resp A point a b c draws a point of affix za resp of coordinates a b c with the legend A point Cplx za Vect Defines at random the coordinates between 5 and 5 of the 2 d points given as argument point2d SeqVar A B C Turns on tracing of the specified point Draws a line with slope m going through the point a b DrawSlp Real a Real b Real m Draws the tangent to y f x at x a LineTan Expr f x Var Expr a 153 altitude bisector exbisector half_line line median_line parallel 154 Draws a line through A that crosses segment BC at right angles altitude A B C Draws the bisector of the angle AB AC given by 3 points A B C bisector Pnt A or Cplx Pnt B or Cplx Pnt C or Cols Draws the exterior bisector of the angle AB AC given by 3 points A B C exbisector Pnt A or Cplx Pnt B or Cplx Pnt C or Cplx half_line A B draws the half line AB with A as origin half line Pnt or Cplx Pnt or Cpl1x line A B or line a x b y c 0 or line a x b y c z d 0 aa x bb y cc z dd 0 draws the line AB in the plane or in the 3D space line A slope m draws the line going through A with slope m or of equation the argument in the plane or in 3D space lin
62. END pair that will enclose the statements for the function The Program Editor Programming A program name can contain only alphanumeric characters letters and numbers and the underscore character The first character must be a letter For example GOOD NAME and Spin2 are valid program names while HOT STUFF contains a space and 2Cool1 starts with number and includes are not valid Until you become familiar with the HP Prime commands the easiest way to enter commands is to select them from the Catalog menu EA MEH or from the Commands menu in the Program Editor EES To enter variables 44 symbols mathematical functions units or characters use the keyboard keys Program Editor The buttons and keys in the Program Editor are buttons and keys Button or Key Meaning Checks the current program for errors If your programs goes beyond one screen you can quickly jump from screen to screen by and tapping either side of this button Tap the left side of the button to display the previous page tap the right side to display the next page The left tap will be inactive if you have the first page of the program displayed or Opens a menu from which you can choose from common programming commands The commands are grouped under the options e Strings e Drawing e Matrix e App Functions e Integer 1 0 e More Press to return to the main menu The commands in this menu
63. Ener When done press Matrix to return to the Matrix Catalog or press to return to Home view The matrix entries are automatically saved You can enter and operate on matrices directly in Home view The matrices can be named or unnamed Enter the vector or matrix on the entry line The vector or matrix must be enclosed in square brackets Start Matrices To store a matrix To display a matrix Matrices each row of a matrix with square brackets as well For a pair of square brackets press ee ale Separate each element and each row with a comma 23 Eval O 2 When you have finished entering the elements press Enter The vector or matrix is added to History with any expressions among the elements evaluated 3 Press to evaluate and display the vector or matrix You can store it a vector or matrix in a variable You can do this before it is added to History or you can copy it from History When you ve entered a vector or matrix in the entry line or copied it from History to the entry line tap GEER enter a name for it and press __ _ The vector and matrix names variable names available to you are MO through M9 The screen at the left shows the matrix 2 5 729 16 2 being stored in M5 Note that you can enter an expression like 5 2 for an element of the matrix and it will be evaluated The screen at the right shows the vector 66 33 11 being stored in M
64. HP or a compatible battery recommended by HP Keep the battery away from children e If you encounter problems when charging the calculator stop charging and contact HP immediately To reduce the risk of electric shock or damage to equipment only plug the AC adapter into an AC outlet that is easily accessible at all times To reduce potential safety risks only use the AC adapter provided with the calculator a replacement AC adapter provided by HP or an AC adapter purchased as an accessory from HP On off cancel operations To turn on To cancel To turn off Press to turn on the calculator When the calculator is on pressing the key cancels the current operation For example it will clear whatever you have entered on the entry line It will also close a menu and a screen Press EA On Off turn the calculator off To save power the calculator turns itself off after several minutes of inactivity All stored and displayed information is saved Getting started The Home View The CAS View Protective cover The display To adjust the contrast To clear the display Getting started Home view is the starting point for many calculations Most mathematical functions are available in the Home view Some additional functions are available in the computer algebra system CAS A history of your previous calculation is retained and you can re use a previous calculation or its result To displ
65. Ifa field allows you to choose an item from a menu you can tap on it the field or the label for the field tap on it again to display the options and tap on the item you want You can also choose an item from an open list by pressing the cursor keys and pressing when the option you want is highlighted e Ifa field is a toggle field one that is either selected or not selected tap on it to select the field and tap on it again to select the alternate option Alternatively select the field and tap GR The illustration at the right shows an input form Font Size Medium Font Textbook Display Menu Display with all three types of field Calculator Name Time 6 52 PM 3 Date 2013 4 1 19 YYY is a free form data entry a field Font Size provides Appearance Enter a name for your calculator a menu of options onc gE gaa CaN GD Textbook Display is a toggle field Getting started Reset input To reset a field to its default value highlight the field and form fields press To reset all fields to their default values press Clear System wide settings System wide settings are values that determine the appearance of windows the format of numbers the scale of plots the units used by default in calculations and much more There are two system wide settings Home settings and CAS settings Home settings control Home view and the apps CAS settings control how calculations ar
66. K_Div KS_ Div KA_Div KSA_Div ea K_Dot KS_Dot KA_Dot KSA_Dot v K Down KS _Down KA _Down KSA_Down K_Enter KS_Enter KA_Enter KSA_Enter K_ Home KS_Home KA Home KSA Home 4 K_Left KS_Left KA Left KSA_ Left K_Right KS_Right KA_Right KSA_Right Programming 457 458 Internal name of keys and key states Key LN Q x LOG K 3 cz Ed i 29 BE Pia 5 m z si Q ny r l E s me g Fg ASIN G lt a 1 ymb B 2 2 F oP Oo z gt K gt a _2 ClView 7X 2 Q ot e oD 3 on Hel User me iii 5 Cc Paste Clear Cc 7 ERs 220 mi Ted ayy v 2 i BA A n w a Name K_Ln K_Llog K_ Minus K_Neg K_ Num K_On K_Plot K_Plus K_ Power K_Sin K_Sq K_Symb K_Tan K_Up K_Vars K_View K_Xttn key KS_Ln KS_Llog KS_Minus KS_Neg KS_Num KS_On KS_Plot KS_Plus KS_ Power KS_Sin KS_Sq KS_Symb KS_Tan KS_Up KS_Vars KS_View KS_Xttn ALPHA key KA_Ln KA_Log KA_Minus KA_Neg KA_Num KA_On KA_Plot KA_Plus KA_Power KA_Sin KA_Sq KA_Symb KA_Tan KA_Up KA_Vars KA_View KA_Xttn key KSA_Ln KSA_Log KSA_Minus KSA_Neg KSA_Num KSA_On KSA_Plot KSA_Plus KSA Power KSA_Sin KSA_Sq KSA_Symb KSA_Tan KSA_Up KSA_Vars KSA_View KSA_Xttn Programming Internal name of keys and key states Key Name key key key N A gt x gt x App
67. Makes the next character upper case Lock mode makes all characters uppercase until the mode is reset With uppercase locked makes the next character lowercase Makes the next character lowercase Lock mode makes all characters lowercase until the mode is reset With lowercase locked makes the next character uppercase With lowercase locked makes all characters uppercase until the mode is reset Reset uppercase lock mode Reset lowercase lock mode You can also enter text and other characters by displaying the characters palette eas The most common math functions have their own key on the keyboard or a key in combination with the key Getting started Math template Getting started Example 1 To calculate SIN 10 press 10 and press Enter The answer displayed is 0 544 if your angle measure setting is radians Example 2 To find the square root of 256 press 256 and press Enter The answer displayed is 16 Notice that the key initiates the operator represented in blue on the next key pressed in this case V on the key The mathematical functions not represented on the keyboard are on the Math CAS and Catlg menus see chapter 20 Functions and commands starting on page 283 Note that the order in which you enter operands and operators is determined by the entry mode By default the entry mode is textbook which means that you enter operands and operators just as you would
68. Program Catalog or to go to Home view You are ready now to execute the program From Home view enter the name of the program with a pair of parentheses after it If the program takes any arguments insert these in the parentheses separated by commas To run the program press From the Program Catalog highlight the program you want to run and tap GMa When a program is executed from the catalog the system looks for a function named 445 Multi function programs 446 START no parameters If it finds one that function is run Otherwise it looks for a function with the same name as the program If the system finds one it runs it Otherwise nothing happens You can also run a Function program from the USER menu one of the Toolbox menus Tap MYPROGRAM amp and MYPROGRAM i appears on the entry line Tap and the program executes displaying a message box Tap times to step through the FOR loop Notice that the number shown increments by 1 each time Function MYPROGRAM MYPROGRAM After the program terminates you can resume any other activity with the HP Prime If a program has arguments when you press a screen appears prompting you to enter the program parameters What you see will differ slightly depending on where you started the program If you start the program from the Home view the HP Prime displays the contents of Ans Home variable containing the
69. Suppose you wanted to create the function SINCOS A B SIN A COS B C 37 Press Define __ TC co Nor rr 2 Inthe Name field enter Function a name for the function for example SINCOS and tap Enter the name for your user function 3 In the Function field enter the function SN ABSA act 595 FSBO ABC New fields appear Define Name SINCOS below your tunction one Function SIN A COS B C for each potential parameter it will take You need to decide which ones are to be parameters when the function is called In this example we ll make A and B parameters The value of C will be provided by global variable C which by default is zero At Bx Check if you want this to be an input variable 4 Make sure that A and B are selected and C is not 5 Tap You can run your function by entering it on the entry line in Home view or be selecting it from the USER menu You enter the value for each variable you chose to be a parameter In this example we chose A and B to be parameters Thus you might enter SINCOS 0 5 0 75 372 Functions and commands Variables 21 Creating variables Variables Variables are placeholders for objects such as function definitions numbers matrices the results of calculations and the like Some are built in and cannot be deleted But you can also create your own Many built in variables are automatically assigned ob
70. The keys you can use to manipulate the graph or equation appear below the equation The x and y intercepts are given at the bottom There are two types or levels of linear equation available for you to explore y ax and y ax b You choose between them by tapping or EEE The keys available to you to manipulate the graph or equation depend on the level you have chosen For example the screen for a level 1 equation shows this e gt This means that you can press ht bur and LJ If you choose a level 2 equation the screen shows this e3Tl This means that you can press but J and x7n The app opens in graph mode indicated by the dot on the Graph button at the bottom of the screen In graph mode the and keys translate the graph amp q Graphs incr i tev2 test vertically effectively _ 0 5X 2 eT te X Int 4 _ Y Int 2 changing the y intercept of the line Tap to change the magnitude of the increment for vertical translations The and keys as well as and decrease and increase the slope Press to change the sign of the slope The form of the linear function is shown at the top right of the display with the current equation that matches the graph just below it As you manipulate the graph the equation updates to reflect the changes The Explorer apps Equation mode Test mode Tap to enter
71. a A aees 426 25 Notes and Info lhe Note Cald Og acata a 429 The Note EdilOr earreries Trn a E E ATN 430 26 Programming Tne Program Caldlog e sran a A 438 Creating a new program ss ssssessessesersersersrserseserserserseseesee 44 The Progratn Edilio centa 44 The HP Prime programming language cccccesseeeceeeeeeeees 450 The User Keyboard Customizing key presses 000666 455 APP POG GINS ipa E EAR E 459 Pogram commands sistre n T N 464 Commands under the Tmplt menu scccccceseeeeeeeenees 465 BIOEK iaa S 465 BELONG eparina a N 465 OO o PE IPEN SEE EEA E E E EAT ETE 466 MW GVHD nfn i E ENA EEO 470 FUNE ON essea a E A A Meet ne celina teleotestecantes 470 Commands under the Cmds menu c cccsseeeceeeeeeeeeeeeees 470 SPOS eap a NR 470 DOWO ieee a 473 MON XGcerasict tales a a a T 480 APO FUNCOMS ciero ea edd aed o e 482 MEGER scair aa A a eel geas 483 O re EE E A re eee eee 485 MOTE eurs O AEE 489 Variables and PrOGrOMScisurs tiauie ennai acealaieidisdbaaadicontieats 492 27 Integer arithmetic Thedetavl Dase enna oe ret en oe eae eR eS ere 514 Changing the default base cccccecccccceseeeceeeeseeeeeeeeens 515 Examples of integer arithmetic cccceccccceeeeeceeeeeeeeeeeeens 516 Integer MMAMIGU ATOR sercedarcncsaenieecvpeawenncendedeaues deed estos 517 Contents 7 Base funcions izes sesrcactsctetelerde icc tiesa a lashed best lector 518 28 Limiting functionality EX Cini
72. according to the law specified in the third argument randPoly Var var Intoatn law Functions and commands Minimum Algebra Quotient Remainder Degree Factor by Degree Coef of GCD Zero Count With only a matrix as argument returns the minimal polynomial in x of a matrix written as a list of its coefficients With a matrix and a variable as arguments returns the minimum polynomial of the matrix written in symbolic form with respect to the variable pmin Mtrx Var Returns the Euclidean quotient of two polynomials written as vectors or in symbolic form quo Vect Vect Var or quo Poly Poly Var Returns the Euclidean remainder of two polynomials written as vectors or in symbolic form rem Vect Vect Var or rem Poly Poly Var Returns the degree of a polynomial degree Poly Returns a polynomial factorized in x n where n is the degree of polynomial factor xn Poly Returns the greatest common divisor GCD of the coefficients of a polynomial content Poly P Var With a polynomial and a variable as arguments returns the list of the Sturm sequences and multiplicities of the square tree factors of the polynomial with respect to the variable With a polynomial a variable and two reals as arguments returns the number of sign changes of the polynomial over the interval specitied by the two reals sturmsegq Poly Var or
73. all trace lines but leaves the definition of the trace points in Symbolic view While a Trace definition is still in Symbolic view if you move the point again a new trace line is created Tap a circle and press t Preerrerrer Tap one object and press __ _ Tap another object and press _ _ Each point of intersection is labeled and labeled identically Note that an intersections object is created in Symbolic view even if the two objects selected do not intersect Displays a palette for you to choose to add 1 2 3 or 4 points The points are placed randomly Tap where you want one endpoint to be and press __ _ Tap where you want the other endpoint to be and press e _ A segment is drawn between the two end points Keyboard shortcut Tap where you want the endpoint to be and press e _ Tap a point that you want the ray to pass through and press fner_ A ray is drawn from the first point and through the second point Tap at a point you want the line to pass through and press Fnter_ Tap at another point you want the line to pass through and press __ _ A line is drawn the two points Keyboard shortcut 143 Vector Angle bisector i 4 Bisector Perpend icular bisector 21 Bisector Parallel 7 Perpend icular 41 Tangent Median 144 Tap where you want one endpoint to be and press _ t _ Tap where you want the other endpoint to be and press __ fuer A vector i
74. and CAS commands in a definition For the sake of simplicity we can ignore these operations in this example However they can be useful and are described in detail in Common operations in Symbolic view on page 71 You can change the range of the x and y axes and the spacing of the interval marks along the axes 119 4 Display Plot Setup view Setup For this example you can leave the plot settings at their default values If your settings do not match those in the illustration at the right example press Advanced Graphing Plot Setup Y Rng 10 9 10 9 X Tick 1 Y Tick 1 Enter minimum horizontal value eae pagen Y Clear to restore the default values See Common operations in Plot Setup view on page 86 for more information about setting the appearance of plots Plot the 5 selected definitions Explorethe 6 graph 120 Plot the selected definitions Plot 4Setup Display the Plot view menu items Note that you have otions to zoom trace go to a specified x or y value and display the definition of the selected graph X 15 9 YD Zoom Traces GoTo Defn Menu You can use the zoom and split screen functionality discussed in chapter 5 A special feature of the Advanced Graphing app enables you to edit the definition of a graph from within the Plot view Advanced Graphing app 7 Tap GER The de
75. and enter 360 Plot the 9 Plot the functions functions Parametric app 249 Explore the graph 250 The menu button gives you access to common tools for exploring plots Em displays a range of zoom options The and keys can also be used to zoom in and out EZEZ when active enables a tracing cursor to be moved along the contour of the plot with the coordinates of the cursor displayed at the bottom of the screen R specify a T value and the cursor moves to the corresponding x and y coordinates Ene display the functions responsible for the plot Detailed information about these tools is provided in Common operations in Plot view on page 77 Typically you would modify a plot by changing its definition in Symbolic view However you can modify some plots by changing the Plot Setup parameters For example you can plot a triangle instead of a circle simply by changing two plot setup parameters The definitions in Symbolic view remain unchanged Here is how it is done 10 Press Setup 11 Change T Step to 120 12 Top MESA 13 From the Method menu select Fixed Step Segments 14 Press G33 A triangle is displayed instead of a circle This is because the new value of T Step makes the points being plotted 120 apart instead of the nearly continuous 5 And by selecting Fixed Step Segments the points 120 apart are connected with line segments Parametric app Display
76. app They can be used to overwrite the value of the corresponding variable in Home Modes Sets the angle mode From Symbolic setup choose System Degrees or Radians for angle measure System default will force the angle measure to agree with that in Modes In a program type 0 gt AAngle for System default 1 gt AAngle for Degrees 2 gt AAngle for Radians Sets the complex number mode From Symbolic setup choose System ON or OFF System detault will force this setting to agree with the corresponding setting in Home Modes In a program type Programming ADigits AFormat Results variables Programming 0 gt AComplex tfor System default 1 gt AComplex for ON 2 AComplex for OFF Defines the number of decimal places to use for the Fixed number format in the app s Symbolic Setup Affects results in the Home view From Symbolic setup enter a value in the second field of Number Format In a program type n gt ADigits where 0 lt n lt 11 Defines the number display format used for number display in the Home view and to label axes in the Plot view From Symbolic setup choose Standard Fixed Scientific or Engineering in the Number Format field In a program store the constant number or its name into the variable AFormat O System 1 Standard 2 Fixed 3 Scientific 4 Engineering Example Scientific gt AFormat or 3 gt AFormat The Function Line
77. are 3 other that are optional and have default values These occur as arguments to the Finance app functions in the following set order Functions and commands NbPmt the number of payments TPYR the annual interest rate pv the present value of the investment or loan PMTV the payment value FV the future value of the investment or loan PPYR the number of payments per year 12 by default 333 CalcFV CalclPYR CalcNbPmt CalcPMTV CalcPV DoFinance CPYR the number of compounding periods per year 12 by default END payments made at the end of the period The arguments PPYR CPYR and END are optional if not supplied PPYR 12 CPYR PPYR and END 1 Solves for the future value of an investment or loan Calcry NDPmt LPYR PV 2MIV 7PPYR CPYR END Solves for the interest rate per year of an investment or loan CalcIPYR NOPmey PV PMIV FV APPIR CPLR END Solves for the number of payments in an investment or loan CaLeNbrmt LPYR PVe PMTV FV p PPYR CPYR END Solves for the value of a payment for an investment or loan Ca lGPpMTV NbPic LPYR PV EV PPYR CPYR END Solves for the present value of an investment or loan CalcoPy NbPmt LEYR PMTV EV PPYR CPYR END Calculate TVM results Solves a TVM problem for the variable TVMVar The variable must be one of the Finance app s Numeric view Performs the same calculation as tapping in the Numeric view of t
78. are described in Commands under the Cmds menu beginning on page 470 442 Programming Programming Button or Key Meaning Continued Vars Chars A Chars Ema gt and mo Del Opens a menu from which you can select common programming commands The commands are grouped under the options e Block Branch e Loop e Variable e Function Press to return to the main menu The commands in this menu are described in Commands under the Tmplt menu beginning on page 465 Displays menus for selecting variable names and values Displays a palette of characters If you display this palette while a program is open you can choose a character and it will be be added to your program at the cursor point To add one character highlight it and tap or press 1 ee To add a character without closing the characters palette select it and tap ER Moves the cursor to the end or beginning of the current line Starts a new line Deletes the character to the left of the cursor 443 Button or Key Meaning Continued Deletes the character to the right of the cursor Deletes the entire program 1 To continue the MYPROGRAM MYPROGRAM a example which we emo began on page 441 use the cursor keys to position the cursor where you want to insert a mds L Tmalt h Ce L command In this example you need to position the cursor between BEGIN and END 2 Tap to
79. bottom of the and then either tapping screen can only be activated by tapping Press when you are at the top of the menu to immediately display the last item in the menu Press when you are at the bottom of the menu to immediately display the first item in the menu e Press to jump straight to the bottom of the menu e Press a to jump straight to the top of the menu e Enter the first few characters of the item s name to jump straight to that item e Enter the number of the item shown in the menu to jump straight to that item A menu will close automatically when you select an item from it If you want to close a menu without selecting anything from it use one of the following techniques e To close the last opened menu or sub menu press To close all open menus press B3 25 Toolbox menus Input forms 26 The Toolbox menus are a collection of menus offering functions and commands useful in mathematics and programming The Math CAS and Catlg menus offer over 400 functions and commands The items on these menus are described in detail in chapter 20 Functions and commands starting on page 283 An input form is a screen that provides one or more fields for you to enter data or select an option It is another name for a dialog box e Ifa field allows you to enter data of your choice you There can select it add your data and tap is no need to tap first e
80. by the sequences selected in Symbolic view Enter the known values and solve for the unknown value Enter numbers text formulas etc The Numeric view is the primary view for this app Enter data for analysis Enter data for analysis Enter known data about a triangle and solve for the unknown data Not used 67 Numeric Setup view 68 Parametric Polar Quadratics Explorer Sequence Solve Spreadsheet Statistics 1 Var Statistics 2Var Triangle Solver The table below outlines what is done in the Numeric Setup view of each app App Use the Numeric Setup view to Advanced Specity the numbers to be calculated Graphing according to the open sentences specified in Symbolic view and set the zoom factor Finance Not used Function Specify the numbers to be calculated according to the functions specified in Symbolic view and set the zoom factor Geometry Not used Inference Not used Linear Explorer Not used Linear Solver Not used Specify the numbers to be calculated according to the functions specified in Symbolic view and set the zoom factor Specify the numbers to be calculated according to the functions specified in Symbolic view and set the zoom factor Not used Specify the numbers to be calculated according to the sequences specitied in Symbolic view and set the zoom factor Not used Format cells rows columns or the entire spreadsheet Not used Not used Not
81. communicate with the rest of the calculator and with other programs Once a variable has been exported from a program it will appear among the User variables in the Variables menu next to the program that exported it This chapter deals with App variables and User variables For information on Home and CAS variables see chapter 21 Variables beginning on page 373 Not all app variables are used in every app S1Fit for example is only used in the Statistics 2Var app However most of the variables are used in common by the Function app the Parametric app the Polar app the Sequence app the Solve app the Statistics 1Var app the Statistics 2Var app and others If a variable is not available in all of these apps or is available only in some other apps then a list of the apps where the variable can be used appears under the variable name The following sections list the app variables by the view in which they are used To see the variables listed by the Programming Plot view variables Axes Cursor GridDots GridLines Hmin Hmax Statistics 1 Var Programming menus in which they appears on the Variables menu see App variables beginning on page 378 Turns axes on or off In Plot Setup view check or uncheck AXES In a program type 0 gt Axes to turn axes on 1 gt Axes to turn axes off Sets the type of cursor Inverted or blinking is useful if the background is solid In Plot
82. equation mode A dot ys will appear on the Eq button at the bottom of the screen eT t X Int 0 _ Y Int 0 In equation mode you oe use the cursor keys to Eqr Graph incr1 tev2 Test _ move between parameters in the equation and change their values observing the effect on the graph displayed Press or to decrease or increase the value of the selected parameter Press or 4 to select another parameter Press to change the sign of a Tap to enter test mode In Test mode you ri Z Nuts test your skill at matching t ee eg ae eat ae an equation to the graph shown Test mode is like equation mode in that you use the cursor keys to qu que select and change the value of each parameter in the equation The goal is to try to match the graph that is shown The app displays the graph of a randomly chosen linear function of the form dictated by your choice of level Tap or to change the level Now press the cursor keys to select a parameter and set its value When you are ready tap to see if you have correctly matched your equation to the given graph Tap to see the correct answer and tap to exit Test mode Quadratic Explorer app The Explorer apps The Quadratic Explorer app can be used to investigate the behavior of y a x h v as the values of a h and v change 277 Open the app Graph mode 278 Press and
83. express or implied warranty of any kind with regard to this manual and specifically disclaims the implied warranties and conditions of merchantability and fitness for a particular purpose and Hewlett Packard Company shall not be liable for any errors or for incidental or consequential damage in connection with the furnishing performance or use of this manual and the examples herein 1994 1995 1999 2000 2003 2006 2010 2013 Hewlett Packard Development Company L P The programs that control your HP Prime are copyrighted and all rights are reserved Reproduction adaptation or translation of those programs without prior written permission from Hewlett Packard Company is also prohibited For hardware warranty information please refer to the HP Prime Quick Start Guide Product Regulatory and Environment Information is provided on the CD shipped with this product Preface Getting started The HP Prime Graphing Calculator is an easy to use yet powertul graphing calculator designed for secondary mathematics education and beyond It offers hundreds of functions and commands and includes a computer algebra system CAS for symbolic calculations In addition to an extensive library of functions and commands the calculator comes with a set of HP apps A HP app is a special application designed to help you explore a particular branch of mathematics or to solve a problems of a particular type For example there is a HP app that
84. fields GTB closes the dialog and saves your changes If you don t want to save your changes press instead 3 Make whatever changes you want 4 To save your changes tap otherwise press E3 Note Ifyou save changes the next time you select that same result in Home view and open the Edit Integer dialog the value shown in the Was field will be the value you saved not the value of the result Base functions Numerous functions related to integer arithmetic can be invoked from Home view CAS view and within programs BITAND BITSL BR RB BITNOT BITSR GETBASE SETBASE BITOR BITXOR GETBITS SETBITS These are described in Integer beginning on page 483 518 Integer arithmetic 28 Limiting functionality Certain functions of the Exam Mode Configuration 17 591 calculator can be L erre disabled for a set period Fyne with the disabling Hunis controlled by a Lene password This feature Us PUEROS will primarily be of fE New Notes and Programs interest to teachers pv J J cancei ok proctors and invigilators who want to ensure that the calculator is used appropriately by students sitting an examination In the illustration above user customized apps the help system and the computer algebra system have been selected for disabling The settings and a list of the functions that can be disabled are accessible from the Home Settings screen When you disable functio
85. following example illustrates the process of creating a custom app The app is based on the built in Statistics 1Var app It simulates the rolling of a pair of dice each with a number of sides specified by the user The results are tabulated and can be viewed either in a table or graphically 1 In the Application Application Library Librray select the Ee Statistics 1Var app Function poeta Geometry Spreadsheet but don t open it Apps Statistics 1Var Statistics 2Var Inference DataStreamer Select f Statistics e Solve Linear Solver Quad Trig Explorer Ex pl Fsave Reset sort send _ Start_ ratic orer Var Tap EE Enter a name for the new app such as DiceSimulation twice Tap The new app appears in the Application Library Open the new app 6 Open the Program Catalog Tap the program to DiceSimulation it EXPORT DiceSimulation open IT BEGIN Each customised ti app has one program associated with it Initially this Program is empty 55s SS C2777 GS You customize the app by entering functions into that program At this point you decide how you want the user to interact with the app In this example we will want the user to be able to 461 The program DiceSimulation 462 e start the app e specify the number of sides that is faces on each die e specify number of times to roll the dice e start the app agai
86. from another calculator Re send the data The command requires more arguments than you supplied The global variable named does not exist The calculation has a mathematically undefined result such as 0 0 You must recover a lot of memory to continue operation Delete one or more customized apps matrices lists notes or programs 533 534 Appendix C Product Regulatory Information Federal Communications Commission Notice Product Regulatory Information This equipment has been tested and found to comply with the limits for a Class B digital device pursuant to Part 15 of the FCC Rules These limits are designed to provide reasonable protection against harmful interference in a residential installation This equipment generates uses and can radiate radio frequency energy and if not installed and used in accordance with the instructions may cause harmful interference to radio communications However there is no guarantee that interference will not occur in a particular installation If this equipment does cause harmful interference to radio or television recep tion which can be determined by turning the equipment off and on the user is encouraged to try to correct the interference by one or more of the following measures e Reorient or relocate the receiving antenna e Increase the separation between the equipment and the receiver e Connect the equipment into an outlet on a circuit different fro
87. function Fn that is closest to the X value guess EXTREMUM Fn guess Example EXTREMUM X X 2 0 returns 0 5 Intersection of two functions Finds the intersection if one exists of the two functions Fn and Fm that is closest to the X value guess Functions and commands ROOT SLOPE ISECT Fn Fm guess Example ISECT X 3 x 2 returns 1 5 Root of a function Finds the root of the function Fn if one exists that is closest to the X value guess ROOT Fn guess Example ROOT 3 X2 2 returns 1 732 Slope of a function Returns the slope of the function Fn at the X value if value exists SLOPE Fn value Example SLOPE 3 X2 2 returns 4 Solve app functions SOLVE Functions and commands The Solve app has a single function that solves a given equation or expression for one of its En may be an equation or expression or it may be the name of one of the Solve Symbolic EO E9 Solve Solves an equation for one of its Solves the equation En for the variable var using the value of guess as the initial value for the value of the variable var If En is an expression then the value of the variable var that makes the expression equal to zero is returned SOLVE En var guess Example SOLVE X X 2 X 3 returns 2 This function also returns an integer that is indicative of the type of solution found as follows 0 an exact solution was found 1 an approximate solution was found
88. g triangle square perimeter Polygon radius C gives the radius of the circle C radius Crcle Returns 1 if the points are aligned 2 if the points are the same and O otherwise is collinear LstPnt Returns 1 if the points are on a circle and O otherwise Ie CONOY LICI ESCENE Returns 1 if the 3 resp 4 arguments are conjugated toward a circle resp 2 lines and O otherwise is conjugate Crcele Line Pnt Line Pnt Line Pnt Line Test if 4 points are in the same plane is coplanar Pnt Pnt Pnt Pnt Returns 1 if the point is on the geometric object and O otherwise is element Pnt Geo0bj Geometry is_equilateral is_isoceles is_orthogonal is_parallel is parallelogram is_perpendicular is rectangle Geometry Returns 1 if the 3 points or the object build an equilateral triangle and O otherwise is equilateral Pnt Cplx Pnt Cplx Pnt Cp1lx Returns 1 2 or 3 if the 3 points or the object build an isosceles triangle with vertices 1 2 or 3 returns 4 if the 3 points or the object build an equilateral triangle and O otherwise is isosceles Pnt or Cplx Pnt or Cplx Pnt or Cplx Returns 1 if the 2 circles are orthogonal orthogonal tangents at a point of intersection or if the 2 lines are orthogonal and O otherwise is Orthogonal Line Crcle Line Crcele Returns 1 if 2 lines are parallel and O otherwise is_parallel Line or Plan Line or Plan Re
89. highlight Page 3 of the Home Settings input form is for setting Exam mode This mode enables certain functions of the calculator to be disabled for a set period with the disabling controlled by a password This feature will primarily be of interest to those who supervise examinations and who need to ensure that the calculator is used appropriately by students sitting an examination It is described in detail in chapter 28 Limiting functionality starting on page 519 Page 4 of the Home Settings input form is for configuring your HP Prime to work on a wireless network Visit www hp com support for further information Specifying a Home setting Getting started This example demonstrates how to change the number format from the default setting Standard to Scientific with two decimal places Press Home Settings sental Settings to open the Angle Measure Radians Home Settings Number Format Standard Y Entry Textbook input form Integers Hex T32 Complex at b i The Angle Language English Measure field is Decimal Mark Dot hi kli ht d Choose angle measure ighlighted C choose Paen O 2 Tap on Number Format either the field label or the field This selects the field You could also have pressed to select it 31 3 Tap on Number Format again A Angle Measure Radians menu of number Entry format options Integers l Complex a b i appears PP Language En
90. igquorem Intg a Intg b Draws the isobarycenter of the given points isobarycenter Pnt or Cplx Pnt or Cplx Pnt or Cplx With two points and n gt 0 draws a regular polygon with vertices at the two points and abs n vertices in total With three points and n gt 0 draws a regular polygon with vertices at the first two points and the third point is in the plane of the polygon With two points and n lt O draws a regular polygon with center at the first point and a vertex at the second point Functions and commands isosceles_triangle jacobi_symbol KILL laplacian lcoeff legendre_symbol length Iged lin line_segments Functions and commands With three points and n lt O draws a regular polygon with center at the first point vertex at the second point and the third point is a point in the plane of the polygon isopolygon Pit Pnt Pnt int n Draws the isosceles triangle ABC With an angle t as the third argument it is equal to angle AB AC With a point P as the third argument the triangle is in the plane formed by A B and P and angle AB AC is equal to angle AB AP With a list consisting of a point and an angle as the third argument t P the triangle is in the plane formed by A B and P and the angle AB AC is equal to t isosceles triangle Pnt or Cplx A Pnt or Cplx B Angle t or Pnt P or ESGP ce Jy L Verte 1 Returns the Jacobi symbol of the given integers jacobi
91. including headers h if present the header cells will be created acc Accept Reject tT tM prob df ct cX cX2 stD e Input list is the list of input see Input Parameters below This can be a range reference a list of cell references or a simple list of values e Input Parameters SampMean 1 SampMean2 SampStdDev SampStdDev2 SampSize SampSize2 pooled O false or 1 true Functions and commands ConfZ1mean Functions and commands SigLevel Mode Specifies how to calculate the statistic 1 Less than 2 Greater than 3 Not Equal Example XXXXX The ConfZ1mean calculates the confidence interval for a one sample Ztest Syntax ConfZlmean ouput configuration input LLST ConfZlmean ouput configuration SampMean SampSize PopStdDevm ConfLevel e Output is a reference to where you would like the output to be placed Note if a range is specified it will limit the size of the output but can also change the orientation from vertical to horizontal if the range is wider than it is tall e Configuration is a string that controls what results are shown and what order they appear in An empty string will default to show all in default order including headers h if present the header cells will be created Z ZzX zXh std e Input list is the list of input see Input Parameters below This can be a range reference a list of cell references or a simple list o
92. integers as input and returns the result of shifting the bits in the first integer to the right by the number places indicated by the second integer If there is no second integer the bits are shifted to the right by one place Examples BITSR 112 2 returns 28 BITSR 10 returns 5 Syntax BITXOR intl int2 a intn Returns the bitwise logical exclusive OR of the specified integers Example BITAND 9 26 returns 19 Syntax B gt R integerm Converts an integer in base m to a decimal integer base 10 The base marker m can be b for binary o for octal or h for hexadecimal Example B R 1101b returns 13 Syntax GETBASE integer m Returns the base for the specified integer in whatever is the current default base O default 1 binary 2 octal 3 hexadecimal Examples GETBASE 1101b returns 1h if the detault base is hexadecimal while GETBASE 1101 returns Oh Syntax GETBITS integer Returns the number of bits used by integer expressed in the default base Example GETBITS 22122 returns 20h if the default base is hexadecimal Syntax R B integer Converts a decimal integer base 10 to an integer in the default base Example RB 13 returns 1101b if the default base is binary or Dh if the default base is hexadecimal Syntax SETBITS integer m bits Programming I O Programming SETBASE CHOOSE Sets the number of bits to represent integer
93. it has the same effect as pressing 27 In other apps enters a different character Function app 5 Decide if you want to give one or more function a custom color when it is plotted evaluate a dependent function deselect a definition that you don t want to explore incorporate variables math commands and CAS commands in a definition For the sake of simplicity we can ignore these operations in this example However they can be useful and are described in detail in Common operations in Symbolic view on page 71 Set Up the You can change the Function Plot Setup plot range of the x and y axes and the spacing of XR fis9 15 9 the tick marks along the iat TY 10 9 axes X Tick 1 Y Tick 1 6 Display Plot Setup view Enter minimum horizontal value Setup For this example you can leave the plot settings at their default values If your settings do not match those in the illustration above press Clear to restore the default values See Common operations in Plot Setup view on page 86 for more information about setting the appearance of plots Plot the 7 Plot the functions functions FICK 1 Function app 105 Trace a 8 By default the trace functionality is active This graph enables you to move a cursor along the contour of a plot If more than two plots are shown the plot that is the highest in the list of functions in Symbolic view is the plot that
94. last result when the program has finished If you start the program from the Program Catalog by tapping the button the HP Prime returns you to the Program Catalog when the program ends If there is more than one EXPORT function in a program when is tapped a list appears for you to choose which function fo run To see this feature create a program with the text EXPORT NAME1 _ Programming Debug a Program BEGIN END EXPORT NAME2 BEGIN END Now note that when you tap or DETA a list with NAME1 and NAME2 appears You cannot run a program that contains syntax errors If the program does not do what you expect it to do or if there is a run time error detected by the system you can execute the program step by step and look at the values of local variables Let s debug the program created above MYPROGRAM 1 In the Program Catalog select MYPROGRAM Select MYPROGRAM Top GEES If there is more than one EXPORT function in a file a list appears for you to choose which function to debug While debugging a Program Catalog Function OKB ExportName lt 1KB MYPROGRAM lt 1KB FOR N FROM 1 TO 3 DO MSGBOX Counting N El N 4 skip step vars stop cont program the title of the program appears at the top of the display Below that is the current line of the program being debugged The current value of each variable is visible in the main body of the scree
95. means or two proportions sets the sample standard deviation of the first sample From the Numeric view set the value of s1 In a program type npypsil For a test or interval involving the difference of two means or two proportions sets the sample standard deviation of the second sample From the Numeric view set the value of s2 In a program type n gt s2 Sets the population standard deviation for a hypothesis test or confidence interval For a test or interval involving 503 o2 x x2 Finance app variables CPYR 504 the difference of two means or two proportions sets the population standard deviation of the first sample From the Numeric view set the value of o1 In a program type nrol For a test or interval involving the difference of two means or two proportions sets the population standard deviation of the second sample From the Numeric view set the value of 02 In a program type n gt O2 Sets the number of successes for a one proportion hypothesis test or confidence interval For a test or interval involving the difference of two proportions sets the number of successes of the first sample From the Numeric view set the value of x1 In a program type n gt x1 For a test or interval involving the difference of two proportions sets the number of successes of the second sample From the Numeric view set the value of x2 In a program type n gt x2 The fol
96. mortgage Finance app Start the Finance app Specify the number of payments per year P YR Specity whether payments are made at the beginning or end of periods Enter values for I3YR PV PMT and FV Enter the number of payments per amortization period in the Group Size field By default the group size is 12 to reflect annual amortization Tap GYRE The calculator displays an amortization table For each amortization period the table shows the amounts applied to interest and principal as well as the remaining balance of the loan Using the data from the previous example of a home mortgage with balloon payment see page 267 calculate how much has been applied to the principal how much has been paid in interest and the balance remaining after the first 10 years that is after 12 x 10 120 payments 1 Make your data Time Value of Money all match that shown in N 360 I YR 6 5 the figure to the right Pv 150000 P YR 12 FV 0 End Group Size 12 Enter payment amount or solve Fest Jamon sove Tap P Principal Interest Balance Won aun hWN 269 Amortization graph 270 3 Scroll down the table P Principal Interest Balance to payment group 10 Note that after 10 years 22 835 53 has been paid off the principal and 90 936 47 paid in interest leaving a balloon payment due of 127 164 47 Pl Press to see the Steen amortizat
97. named A and B and the remaining four vertices are named D E G and H Moreover each of the six segments is also given a name J K L M and N These names are not displayed in Plot view but you can see them if you go to Symbolic view see Symbolic view in detail on page 136 Zoom Point Line Polygo j Curve Transfo Naming objects and parts of objects enables you to refer to them in calculations This is explained in Numeric view in detail on page 138 Geometry Selecting an object Hiding names Moving objects Coloring objects Geometry You can rename an object See Renaming an object on page 137 To select an object just tap on it The color of a selected item changes to cyan To select a point in Plot view just press e _ A list of all the points appears Select the one you want You can choose to hide the name of an object in Plot view 1 Press Ga 2 Select Toggle Caption The Select Object menu appears 3 Select the object whose label that is caption you want to hide 4 Press B3 Redisplay a hidden name by repeating this procedure Points To move a point press _ _ A list of all the points appears Select the one you want to move then tap on the new location for it and press _ _ You can also press the arrow keys to move a selected point A point can be selected directly by tapping on it If the bottom right of the screen shows the name of
98. number vector such as 1 2 7 3 Matrices are two dimensional arrays They are composed of at least two rows and at least one column Two dimensional matrices are represented by nested brackets for example 1 2 3 4 5 6 You can also create complex matrices for example 1 2 3 4 4 5 6 7 There are ten matrix variables available named MO to M9 You can use them in calculations in Home view or in a program You can retrieve matrix names from the Vars menu or just type their names from the keyboard 411 Creating and storing matrices Matrix Catalog buttons and keys 412 The Matrix Catalog e M1 1 1 023KB contains the matrix SEs variables MO M9 Once m3 11 023KB M4 1 1 023KB you select a matrix MS 1 1 023KB M6 1 1 023KB name you can create oo a pret edit and delete matrices 8 1 1 023KB y M9 1 1 023KB in the Matrix Editor You mo 1 1 023KB can also senda matrixto x_BSENSW Tae another HP Prime To open the Matrix Catalog press EA 4 _ Matrix In the Matrix Catalog the size of a matrix is shown beside the matrix name An empty matrix is shown as 1 1 The number of elements in it is shown beside a vector You can also create and store matrices named or unnamed in Home view For example the command POLYROOT 1 0 1 0 gt M1 stores the roots of the complex vector of length 3 into the variable M1 M1 will thus contain the three roots of 3
99. of 10 that generates value XPON value Example XPON 123456 returns 5 since 10 equals 123456 Maximum The greater of two values MAX valuel value2 Example 289 Minimum Modulus Find Root Percentage Complex Argument Conjugate 290 MAX 8 3 11 4 returns 2 75 Note that in Home view a non integer result is given as a decimal fraction If you want to see the result as a vulgar fraction press RS This opens the computer algebra system If you want to return to Home view to make further calculations press Eg Minimum The lesser of two values MIN valuel value2 Example MIN 210 25 returns 25 Modulo The remainder of value 1 value2 valuel MOD value2 Example 74 MOD 5 returns 4 Function root tinder like the Solve app Finds the value for the given variable at which expression most nearly evaluates to zero Uses guess as initial estimate FNROOT expression variable guess Example FNROOT A 9 8 600 1 A 1 returns 61 224489796 x percent of y that is x 100 y 6 X Y Example 20 50 returns 10 Argument Finds the angle detined by a complex number Inputs and outputs use the current angle format set in Home modes ARG x y i Example ARG 3 3 i returns 45 degrees mode Complex conjugate Conjugation is the negation sign reversal of the imaginary part of a complex number Functions and commands Real Part Imaginary Part Unit Vector Expone
100. of a triangle in the direction opposite their common vertex and then draw a circle tangent both to these lines and to the third side of the triangle you have an excircle Tap at each vertex of the triangle pressing after each tap The excircle is drawn tangent to the side defined by the last two vertices tapped In the example at the right the last two vertices tapped were A and C or C and A Thus the excircle is drawn tangent to the segment AC orrori You can plot expressions of the following types in Plot view e Function e Parametric e Polar e Sequence e Slopefield 147 Tap Fees select Plot and then the type of expression you want to plot The entry line is enabled for you to define the expression Note that the variables you specify for an expression must be in lowercase In this example Function has been selected as the plot type and the graph of y 1 x is plotted Zoom Point Line Polygo j Curve Transfo Geometric transformations Translation 148 The Transform menu displayed by tapping AEN provides numerous fools for you to transform a geometric object in Plot view Translation is moving each point of an abject the same distance and in the sam direction You create a vector to indicate the distance and direction of the translation choose the object to be translated and copy of the object to moved in line with the vector Suppose you want to move circle B a
101. of the loan being the purchase price less the deposit 5 Leave P YR and Time Value of Money Aceh it C YR both at 12 N 60 I YR 5 5 PV 16500 P YR 12 their default values put rv 12 Leave End as the FV 0 End y ayment option Also P y P g Group Size 12 leave future value FV as 0 as your gool is FEEBSEBCMEBEN to end up with a future value of the loan of 0 6 Move the cursor to Time Value of Money Liste the PMT field and tap N 60 I YR 5 5 alias PV 16500 P YR 12 EIB The PMT O mpna owe value is calculated as FV 0 End y 315 17 In other words your monthly Group Size 12 ill b Enter payment amount or solve Payment wih Oe edit _ amort __ solve 315 17 The PMT value is negative to indicate that it is money owed by you Note that the PMT value is greater than 300 that is greater than the amount you can afford to pay each month So you ned to re run the calculations this time setting the PMT value to 300 and calculating a new PV value 7 Inthe PMT field enter 300 move the cursor to the PV field and tap ESN 264 Finance app The PV value is Time Value of Money calculated as N 60 I YR 5 5 15 705 85 this PMT 300 CNR 12 being the maximum FV 0 End y you can borrow l Group Size 12 Thus with your 3 000 d it Enter present value or solve r eposit YOU PARERE can afford a car with a price tag of up to 18 705 85 Cash flow
102. on page 93 To sort the values in the selected column in ascending or descending order Move the cursor to the column of interest tap BETB select Ascending or Descending and tap Gi Only visible if NUMTYPE is set to BuildYourOwn See Custom tables on page 93 Toggles the display between medium and large font Toggles between showing the value of the cell and the definition that generated the value An introduction to HP apps Button Purpose Cont Displays a menu for you to choose to display the evaluations of 1 2 3 or 4 defintions If you have more than four definitions seelcted in Symbolic view you can press to scroll rightwards and see more columns Pressing 4 scrolls the columns lettwards Common operations in Numeric Setup view Scope Advanced Graphing Function Parametric Polar Sequence Press to open Numeric Setup view The Numeric Setup view is used near to vuus p OoOo O O NUMSTEP 0 1 e set the starting number for NUMTYPE Automatic the independent variable in Numzoom 4 automatic tables displayed in Numeric view the NUMSTART field Enter table start value e set the increment between consecutive numbers in automatic tables displayed in Numeric view the NumstEeP field e specify whether the table of data to be displayed in Numeric view is to be based on the specified starting number and increment automatic table or to based on particul
103. open MYPROGRAM the menu of common grein OSRAMO programming END commands for Prgm Commands blocking branching looping variables and functions In this example we ll select a LOOP command from the menu 3 Select Loop and MYPROGRAM EXPORT MYPROGRAM then select FOR from fren the sub menu 8 CONTINUE i TT a Notice that a MYPROGRAM a FOR FROM _TO_DO Sue MYPROGRAM FOR FROM TO DO _ template is END inserted All you ly END need do is fill in the missing information Lcmds tmpit __ check __ 444 Programming Run a Program Programming 4 Using the cursor keys and keyboard fill in the missing parts of the command In this case make the statement match the following FOR N FROM 1 TO 3 DO MYPROGRAM EXPORT MYPROGRAMC BEGIN FOR N FROM 1 TO 3 DO END END COUNEIS 5 Move the cursor to a blank line below the FOR statement 6 Tap to open the menu of common programming commands 7 Select 1 0 and then select MSGBOX from the sub menu 8 Fill in the argument of the MSGBOX command and type a semicolon at the end of the command MYPROGRAM EXPORT MYPROGRA BEGIN 1 CHOOSE Cmds 2EDITLIST EXPORT MYPROGRAMC BEGIN FOR N FROM 1 TO 3 DO MSGBOX Counting N END END cds Tmplt check 9 Tap to check the syntax of your program 10 When you are finished press to return to the
104. operating on units These are available by pressing and tapping EAS Converts one unit to another unit of the same category CONVERT 5 m 1 ft retums16 4041994751 ft You can also use the last answer as the first argument in a new conversion calculation Pressing places the last answer on the entry line You can also select a value from history and tap to copy it to the entry line Meters kilograms seconds amperes Converts a complex unit into the base components of the MKSA system MKSA 8 175 cm s returns 08175_m s 1 Unit factor conversion Converts a measurement using a compound unit into a measurement expressed in constituent units For example a Coulomb a measure of electric charge is a compound unit derived from the SI base units of Ampere and second 1 C 1 A 1 s Thus UFACTOR 100 C 1_ A returns 100 A s Units and constants USIMPLIFY Unit simplification For example a Joule is defined as one kg m2 s2 Thus USIMPLIFY 5 kg m2 s2 returns 5 J Physical constants The values of 34 math and physical constants can be selected by name and used in calculations These constants are grouped into four categories math chemistry physics and quantum mechanics A list of all these constants is given in List of constants on page 396 To display the constants press and then tap Const Function Constants Example Suppose you want to know the potential energy of a mass of 5 units accord
105. operations restores certain conditions and clears temporary memory locations However it does not clear stored data variables apps programs etc To reset Press and hold and simultaneously and then release them If this doesn t work you should restore factory settings see below To restore factory settings If the calculator does not respond to a reset see above you should restore factory settings This will entirely erase the calculator s memory You will lose everything you have stored 1 Press and hold then and then Esc 2 Release all keys in the reverse order If the calculator does not turn on It the HP Prime does not turn on follow the steps below until the calculator turns on You may find that the calculator turns on before you have completed the procedure If the calculator still does not turn on contact Customer Support for further information 1 Press and hold oe tae 10 seconds then release 531 2 Press and hold 2 Jand simultaneously then release __ then release J 3 Press and hold and___ simultaneously Release then release _ and then release amp 4 Remove the batteries press and hold Lor for 10 seconds then put the batteries back in and press Operating limits Operating temperature 0 to 45 C 32 to 113 F Storage temperature 20 to 65 C 4 to 149 F Operating and storage humidity 90 relative humidity at 40 C
106. or Pity bine or Pnt Line or Pnt Geometry 165 harmonic_division icosahedron is harmonic Returns the 4 points resp lines and affects the last argument such as the 4 points resp lines are in a harmonic division harmonic division Pnt or Line Pnt or Line Pnt or Line Var Draws an icosahedron with center A vertex B and such that the plane ABC contains one vertex among the 5 nearest vertices from B icosahedron Pnt A Pnt B Pnt C Returns 1 if the 4 points are in a harmonic division and O otherwise is NarMmonitetPnt or Cplx Pnt or Cplx Pnt or Cplx Pnt or Cplx is harmonic_circle_bundle Returns 1 if the circles build a beam 2 if they have the same center 3 if they are the same and O otherwise 19 harmonio circe bundle lst Crele is harmonic_line_bundle is_ rhombus length LineHorz 166 Returns 1 if the lines have a common point 2 if they are parallels 3 if they are the same and O otherwise is harmonic line bundle Lst Line Returns 1 or 2 if the 4 points or the object build a rhombus 2 for a square and O otherwise is rhombus Pnt or Cplx Pnt or Cplx Pnt or Cplx Pnt or Cols Returns the size of a list a string or a sequence length Lst or Str or Seq Draws the horizontal line y a Geometry line_segments LineVert octahedron open_polygon orthogonal parallelepiped perimeterat perimeteratraw Geometry LineHorz A Returns the list of t
107. or real expression exact Expr Draws the exterior bisector of the angle AB AC given by A B and C exbisector Pnt or Cplx A Pnt or Colx 3 Pnt or Cplx C Draws the excircle of the triangle ABC excircle Pnt or Cplx A Pnt or Cplx B Pnt or Cplx C Returns the solution to the mathematical constant e to the power of an expression exp Expr Returns the coefficients a b of y b a x where y is the exponential which best approximates the points whose coordinates are the elements in two lists or the rows of a matrix exponential regression Lst Mtrx A Lst Export Exports the function FunctionName so thot it is globally available and appears on the User menu 3 ea EXPORT FunctionName Parses the string sfr into a number or expression expr str Examples 347 ezgcd f2nd faces factorial fMax fMin FOR format fracmod 348 expr 2 3 returns 5 expr X 10 returns 100 If the variable X has the value 90 Uses the EZ GCD algorithm to return the greatest common divisor of two polynomials with at least two ezgcd Poly Poly Returns a list consisting of the numerator and denominator of an irreducible form of a rational fraction f2nd RatFrac Returns the list of the faces of a polygon or polyhedron Each face is a matrix of n rows and three columns where n is the number of vertices of the polygon or polyhedron faces Polygon or Polyedr
108. plane ABP angle AB AD angle AB AP or such that angle AB AD a rhombus Pnt A Cp1x Pnt B Cplx Angle a P nt P Lst P a Var C Var D Draws the A_rectangular triangle ABC with AC k AB or in the plane ABP AC AP or AC k AB right triangle Pnt A or Cplx Pn B or Cp1x Real k or Pnt P or Lst P k Var C Returns and draws the square of side AB ABCD is direct in the plane ABP square Pnt A or Cplx Pnt B or Cols Pnt P Var C Var D triangle A B C draws the triangle ABC triangle Pnt or Cplx Pnt or Cplx Pnt or Cp1x Defines a function plot plotfunc Expr Define for 2 d a circle with a diameter arg2 Point or with center and radius arg2 Complex abs arg2 radius or the arc AB A angle a B angle b arg1 arg2 angle 0 or by its equation and for 3 d with a diameter and a third point circle Pnt or Cplx Pnt arg2 or Cplx arg2 Real a Real b Var A Var B 157 circumcircle conic ellipse excircle hyperbola incircle locus 158 circumcircle A B C circumcircle of the triangle ABC circumcircle Pnt or Cplx Pnt or Cplx Pnt or Cplx Defines a conic by its equation with x y as default variables and draws it conic Expr LstVar ellipse F 1 F2 M ellipse focus F1 F2 through M or such as MF1 MF2 2 a geo2d and ellipse p x y draws the conic it deg p 2 ellipse Pnt F1 Pnt F2
109. points in the current 1 variable analysis H1 H5 Contains the minimum value of the data set in the current l variable analysis H1 H5 Contains the value of the first quartile in the current 1 variable analysis H1 H5 Contains the median in the current 1 variable analysis H1 H5 Contains the value of the third quartile in the current 1 variable analysis H1 H5 Contains the maximum value in the current 1 variable analysis H1 H5 Contains the sum of the data set in the current 1 variable analysis H1 H5 Contains the sum of the squares of the data set in the current 1 variable analysis H1 H5 Contains the mean of the data set in the current 1 variable analysis H1 H5 Contains the sample standard deviation of the data set in the current 1 variable analysis H1 H5 Contains the population standard deviation of the data set in the current 1 variable analysis H1 H5 Contains the standard error of the data set in the current l variable analysis H1 H5 Variables Statistics 2Var app variables Results Nbltem Variables Category Results explained below Symbolic Plot Numeric Modes Names Nbltem Corr CoefDet sCov oCov XXY MeanX 2X X2 S1 SZ 53 S4 59 Axes Cursor GridDots GridLines Labels Method Recenter xmax Cl CZ C3 C4 Ge AAngle AComplex sX OX serrX MeanY 2Y DY 2 sY oY serrY S1Type S2Type S3Type S4Type S5Type
110. probabilities One Sample Z Test Menu name Inputs Zlest 1 u On the basis of statistics from a single sample this test measures the strength of the evidence for a selected hypothesis against the null hypothesis The null hypothesis is that the population mean equals a specified value Ho H Lo You select one of the following alternative hypotheses against which to test the null hypothesis Hi u lt nuo Hi u gt no H u po The inputs are Field name Definition 3 Sample mean n Sample size Uo Hypothetical population mean o Population standard deviation a Significance level Inference app Results The results are Result Description Test Z Z test statistic Test x Value of X associated with the test Z value P Probability associated with the Z Test statistic Critical Z Boundary value s of Z associated with the a level that you supplied Critical x Boundary value s of x required by the a value that you supplied Two Sample Z Test Menu name ZTest u u2 Inputs Inference app On the basis of two samples each from a separate population this test measures the strength of the evidence for a selected hypothesis against the null hypothesis The null hypothesis is that the means of the two populations are equal Hy u Uo You select one of the following alternative hypotheses to test against the null hypothesis Hz 7 lt p2 Hz Wy gt M2 Hz u p3 The inputs
111. programs An app is a unified collection of views programs notes and associated data Creating an app program allows you to redefine the app s views and how a user will interact with those views This is done with a dedicated program functions with special names and b by redefining the views in the Views menu Using These programs are run when the keys shown in the table dedicated below are pressed These program functions are designed program to be used in the context of an app functions Program Equivalent Keystrokes Symb Symbolic view SymbSetup Symbolic Setup Plot Plot view PlotSetup Plot Setup Num Numeric view ee NumSetup Numeric Setup Info Info view START Starts an app RESET Resets or initializes an app Programming 459 Redefining the Views menu Customizing an app 460 The Views menu allows any app to define views in addition to the standard seven views shown in the table above By default each HP app has its own set of additional views contained in this menu The VIEWS command allows you to redefine these views to run programs you have created for an app The syntax for the VIEWS command is VIEWS text By adding VIEWS text before the declaration of a function you will override the list of views for the app For example if your app program defines three views SetSides RollDice and PlotResults when yOu press you will see SefS
112. r Eber radius 1 3 MSGBOX The area is n radius 2 END If the user enters 10 for TAEAE DiceSimulation the radius the message pisamia aes box shows this DRAWPATTERN 1KB MAXFACTORS lt 1KB MYPROGR The area is 314 159265359 ia Syntax PRINT expression or string Prints the result of expression or string to the terminal Programming More Programming WAIT ZCHANGE The terminal is a program text output viewing mechanism which is displayed only when PRINT commands are executed When visible you can press or to view the text L Jto erase the text and any other key to hide the terminal Pressing stops the interaction with the terminal PRINT with no argument clears the terminal There are also commands for outputting data in the Graphics section In particular the commands TEXTOUT and TEXTOUT_P can be used for text output This example prompts the user to enter a value for the radius of a circle and prints the area of the circle on the terminal EXPORT AREACALC BEGIN Radius of Circle etal LOCAL radiuss E INPUT radius Radius of Circle r gt Enter radius P D Enter radius 10 p a TT ar PRINT The The area is 314 159265359 area is r radius 2 END Notice the use of the LOCAL variable for the radius and the naming convention that uses lower case letters for the local variable Adhering to such a convention will improve the
113. readability of your programs Syntax WAIT n Pauses program execution for n seconds With no argument or with n O pauses program execution for one minute Syntax CHANGE x y 489 490 ZTOTAL CAS EVALLIST EXECON The percentage change in going from x to y Example 3CHANGE 20 50 returns 150 Syntax STOTAL x y The percentage of x that is y Example TOTAL 20 50 returns 250 Syntax CAS Exp or CAS function or CAS variable Evaluates the expression or variable using the CAS Syntax EVALLIST list Evaluates the content of each element in a list and returns an evaluated list Creates a new list based on the elements in one or more lists by iteratively modifying each element according to an expression that contains the ampersand character amp The syntax EXECON expression with amp Sty list lista Where the expression is amp plus an operator o plus a number n each element in the list is operated on by o and n and a new list created Examples EXECON amp 1 1 2 3 returns 2 3 4 Where the amp is followed directly by a number the position in the list is indicated For example EXECON amp 2 amp 1 1 4 3 5 returns 3 1 2 In the example above amp 2 indicates the second element and amp 1 the first element in each pair of elements The minus operator between them subtracts the first from the second in each pair un
114. represented by an image of that key SIN EEX USN lars E etc A key combination that initiates a shifted unction or inserts a character is represented by the appropriate shift key E or FEES followed by the key for that function or character initiates the natural exponential function and inserts the pound character The name of the shifted function may also be given in parentheses after the key combination E3 Clear Setup A key pressed to insert a digit is represented by that digit 5 7 8 etc All fixed on screen text such as screen and field names appear in bold CAS Settings XSTEP Decimal Mark etc A menu item selected by touching the screen is represented by an image of that item Note that you must use your finger to select a menu item Using a stylus or something similar will not select whatever is touched Notice e Items you can select from a list and characters on the entry line are set in a non proportional font as follows Function Polar Parametric Ans etc Cursor keys are represented by and You use these keys to move from field to field on a screen or from one option to another in a list of options Error messages are enclosed inverted commas Syntax Error This manual and any examples contained herein are provided as is and are subject to change without notice Except to the extent prohibited by law Hewlett Packard Company makes no
115. second ORNG field to 4r by entering Ori PEDE x 9 Press to return to Plot view and see the complete plot The values generated by the equation can be seen in Numeric view 10 Press AB Suppose you want to see just whole numbers for 0 in other words you want the increment between consecutive values in R1 8 12 5663706144 Maia Polar Plot Setup 12 5663706144 BRNG 0 OSTEP 0 1308996939 XRNG 15 9 15 9 YRNG 10 9 10 9 XTICK 1 YTICK 1 Enter maximum angle value R1 8 12 5663706144 Baie Big Defn Width the 8 column to be 1 You set this up in the Numeric Setup view An introduction to HP apps Numeric Setup View i um B 11 Press z Polar Num Setup NUMSTART 0 12 Change the NUMSTEP field numsterfi SSS to 1 NUMTYPE Automatic NUMZOOM 4 13 Press to return to Numeric view You will see that the 0 A OERA column now contains consecutive integers starting from zero and the corresponding values calculated by the equation specified in Symbolic view are listed in the R1 column Common operations in Symbolic view Scope Advanced Graphing Function Parametric Polar Sequence Solve See dedicated app chapters for information about the other apps Symbolic view functionality that is common to many apps is described in detail in this section Functionality that is available only in a particular app is descr
116. select the Type field 3 Tap the field again to see the menu of fit types Select your preferred fit type from the menu See Fit models on page 207 Statistics 2Var app Fit models Twelve fit models are available Linear Default Fits the data to a straight line y mx b Uses a least squares fit Logarithmic Fits the data to a logarithmic curve y m lnx b Fits the data to a power curve y SDR Exponent Fits the data to an exponent curve y ab Inverse Fits the data to an inverse variation y y x b Logistic Fits the data to a logistic curve L i mae ae TES ade oe where L is the saturation value for growth You can store a positive real value in L or if L O let L be computed automatically Quadratic Fits the data to a quadratic curve y ax bx c Needs at least three points Fits the data to a cubic polynomial y ax b xt cext d Quartic Fits to a quartic polynomial y ax bx cx dx e Trigonometric Fits the data to a trigonometric curve y a sin bx c d Needs at least three points User Defined Define your own fit see below Statistics 2Var app 207 To define your own fit 1 Press to display the Symbolic view 2 For the analysis you are interested in S1 through S5 select the Type field 3 Tap the field again to see a menu of fit types 4 Select User Defined from the menu 5 Select the corresponding Fit field 6 Enter a
117. shorthand for your last answer and it can be part of a new expression You could now enter other components of a calculation such as operators number variables etc and create a new calculation You don t need to first select Ans before it can be part of a new calculation If you press a binary operator key to begin a new calculation Ans is automatically added to 37 To reuse an expression or result from the CAS 38 the entry line as the first component of the new calculation For example to multiply the last answer by 13 you could enter 13L fer But the first two keystrokes are unnecessary All you need to enter is L J13 E The variable Ans is always stored with full precision whereas the results in history will only have the precision determined by the current Number Format setting see page 28 In other words when you retrieve the number assigned to Ans you get the result to its full precision but when you retrieve a number from history you get exactly what was displayed You can repeat the previous calculation simply by pressing fner_ This can be useful if the previous calculation involved Ans For example suppose you want to calculate the nth root of 2 when n is 2 4 8 16 32 and so on 1 Calculate the square root of 2 2 Now enter VAns This calculates the fourth root of 2 3 Press repeatedly Each time you press the root is twice the previous 1 41421356237 roo
118. simplified using the formulas sin x 2 cos x 2 1 and tan x sin x cos x privileging cosine trigcos Expr Returns an expression simplified using the formulas sin x 2 cos x 2 1 and tan x sin x cos x privileging tangent 305 atrig2In tlin tCollect trigexpand trig2exp Integer Divisors Factors Factor List GCD LCM Prime Test if Prime 306 trrgtan Expr Returns an expression with inverse trigonometric functions rewritten as logarithmic functions atrig21n Expr Returns a trigonometric expression with the products and integer powers linearized tlin ExprTrig Returns a trigonometric expression linearized and with any sine and cosine of the same angle put together tCollect Expr Returns a trigonometric expression in expanded form trigexpand Expr Returns an expression with trigonometric functions rewritten as complex exponentials without linearization trig2exp Expr Returns the list of divisors of an integer or a list of integers idivis Intg a or LstIntg Returns an integer decomposed into its prime factors factor Intg a Returns the list of prime factors of an integer or a list of integers Each factor is followed by its multiplicity ifactors Intg a or LstIntg Returns the greatest common divisor of two integers gcd Intg a Intg b Returns the lowest common multiple of two integers lcm Intg a Intg b Tests wh
119. start and for as long as this variable is less than or equal to finish executes the sequence of commands and then adds 1 increment to var Example 2 This program draws an interesting pattern on the screen EXPORT DRAWPATTERN BEGIN LOCAL iner yincr colLor STARTAPP Function RECT 4 xincer i Xmax Xin 7 254 yiner lt Ymax Yin 110 FOR X FROM Xmin TO Xmax STEP xincr DO 467 FOR DOWN FOR DOWN STEP WHILE 468 FOR Y FROM Ymin TO Ymax STEP yincr DO color FLOOR X 2 Y 2 MOD 4 PIXON X Y color END END FREEZE END Syntax FOR var FROM start DOWNTO finish DO commands Sets variable var to start and for as long as this variable is less than or equal to finish executes the sequence of commands and then adds 1 incremenf to var If DOWNTO is used the start value of the variable is decreased until the finish value is reached Syntax FOR var FROM start DOWNTO finish STEP increment DO commands Sets variable var to start and for as long as this variable is less than or equal to finish executes the sequence of commands and then adds 1 incremenf to var If DOWNTO is used the start value of the variable is decreased until the finish value is reached Syntax WHILE fest DO commands END Evaluate test If result is true not O executes the commands and repeat Example A perfect number is one that is equal to the sum of all its proper divisors For example
120. subMat suppress surd sylvester table tail TAN tan2cossin2 tan2sincos2 368 Returns the population standard deviance of the elements in a list with the second argument as pound or returns the list of standard deviances of the columns of a matrix What does the pound mean stddevp Lst Mtrx Lst Used in prgramming to indicate the step in an iteration or the step size of an incrementation Stores a real or string in a variable sto Real or Str Var Returns the Sturm sequence for a polynomial or a rational fraction sturmseq Poly Var Extracts from a matrix a sub matrix with first element A n 1 n2 and last element A n3 n4 subMat Mtrx A Intg nl Intg n2 Intg n3 Int g n4 Returns a list without the nth element suppress Lst Intg n Returns an expression to the power of 1 n surd Expr Intg n Returns the Sylvester matrix of two polynomials sylvester Poly Poly Var Defines an array where the indexes are strings or real numbers table SeqEqual index name element value Returns a list or sequence or string without its first element tail Lst or Seq or Str Tangent tan x tan value Returns an expression with tan x rewritten as 1 cos 2 x sin 2 x tan2cossin2 Expr Returns an expression with tan x rewritten as sin 2 x 1 cos 2 x Functions and commands tangent THEN TO translation transpose triangle trunc
121. symbol Intg Intg Used in programming to stop a step by step execution with debugging Returns the Laplacian of an expression with respect to a list of laplacian Expr LstVar Returns the coefficient of the term of highest degree of a polynomial The polynomial can be expressed in symbolic form or as a list lcoeff Poly Lst Returns the Legendre symbol of the given integers legendre_ symbol Intg Intg Returns the length of a list string or sequence length Lst or Str or Seq Returns the greatest common divisor of a list of integers or polynomials lgcd Seq or Lst Returns an expression with the exponentials linearized lin Expr Returns the list of the line segments one line one segment of a polyhedron line segments Polygon or Polyedr P 353 linear_interpolate linear_regression LineHorz LineTan LineVert list2mat LN Iname Inexpand LOCAL locus LOG log10 354 Takes a regular sample from a polygonal line detined by a matrix of two rows linear interpolate Mtrx xmin xmax xstep Returns the coefficients a and b of y a x b where y is the line that best approximates the points whose coordinates are the elements in two lists or the rows of a matrix linear regression Lst Mtrx A Lst Draws the horizontal line y a LineHorz Expr a Draws the tangent to y f x at x a LineTan Expr f x Var Expr a Draws the vertical line x a LineVe
122. the trace curve Geometry 35 Press to return to Numeric view 36 Select each calculation in turn and tap RB All calculations should now be deselected 37 Press to return to Plot view 38 Press and select point GD 39 Tap and select More gt Trace AO Press and select point GB 41 Using the cursor keys move B along the curve You will notice that a shadow curve is traced out as you move B This is the curve of the derivative of 3sin x a5 3 4 Plot view in detail Geometry In Plot view you can directly draw objects on the screen using various drawing tools For example For example to draw a circle tap and select Circle Now tap where you want the center of the circle tobe and B ie press __ _ Next tap a point that is fo be on the circumference and press __ e _ A circle is drawn with a center at the location of your first tap and with a radius equal to the distance between your first tap and second tap Creating or selecting an object always involves at least two steps tap and press _ _ Only by pressing do you confirm your intention to create the point or select an object When creating a point you can tap on the screen and then use the cursor keys to accurately position the point before pressing er Note that there are on screen instructions to help you For example Hit Center means tap where you want the center 129 Object naming
123. the Canadian Interference Causing Equipment Regula tions Avis Canadien Cet appareil num rique de la classe B respecte toutes les exigences du R glement sur le mat riel brouilleur du Can ada Product Regulatory Information European Union Regulatory Notice Product Regulatory Information Products bearing the CE marking comply with the follow ing EU Directives e Low Voltage Directive 2006 95 EC e EMC Directive 2004 108 EC e Ecodesign Directive 2009 125 EC where applicable CE compliance of this product is valid if powered with the correct CE marked AC adapter provided by HP Compliance with these directives implies conformity to applicable harmonized European standards European Norms that are listed in the EU Declaration of Confor mity issued by HP for this product or product family and available in English only either within the product docu mentation or at the following web site www hp eu cer tificates type the product number in the search field The compliance is indicated by one of the following con formity markings placed on the product For non telecommunications products and for EU harmonized telecommunications products such as Bluetooth within power class below 10mW For EU non harmonized telecommunications products If applicable a 4 digit notified body number is inserted between CE and Please refer to the regulatory label provided on the prod uct The point of contact fo
124. the angle as since C is the angle where A and B meet If instead we entered the lengths as b and e we would need to specify the angle as A The illustration on the screen will help you determine where to enter the known values 3 Go to a field whose value you know enter the value or press _ _ Repeat for and either tap each known value Triangle Solver dest a In a type 4 Enter 3 out of 6 values and press e b Inbtype6 n and press Bi ae Enter length of side a c InCtype 30 SSPE SSeS and press _f _ Triangle Solver app Solve for the 4 Tap ENB The unknown values app displays the values of the unknown variables As the illustration at the right shows the length of the unknown side in Triangle Solver heb AL Solution found aps A 38 2619661998 b 6 B 111 7380338 c 3 22967190568 C 30 b Enter length of side a Edit __ Degree Rect __ Solve our example is 3 22967 The other two angles have also been calculated Choosing triangle types The Triangle Solver app has two input forms a general input form and a simpler specialized form for right angled triangles If the general input form is displayed and you Triangle Solver hae Enter length of side a Edit __ Degree Rect __ Solve are investigating a right angled triangle tap to display the simpler input form To return to the general input f
125. the inversion circle and press Geometry 3 Enter the inversion ratio r and press _ t 4 Tap on a line where you want the inversion point B to be and press aa In the example at the Zoom Point Line Polygo C right the inversion ratio is 6 and the inversion point was a point tapped on line AB Note that the center point and inversion point are not created as separate points Reciprocation To create a point that is the reciprocation of another point or a line with respect to a circle 1 Tap and select Reciprocation 2 Tap the circle and press L fer_ 3 Tap the point or line that is to generate the reciprocation point and press _ In the example at the right point H is the reciprocation of line G 15 10 0 Pointer 3 11 7 59 ee on circie L Geometry functions and commands The list of geometry specitic functions and commands in this section covers those that can be found by tapping in both Symbolic and Numeric view and those that are only available from the Catlg menu The sample syntax provided has been simplified Geometric objects are referred to by a single uppercase character such as A B C and so on However calculations referring to geometric objects in the Numeric view of the Geometry app and in the CAS must use the G prefixed name given for it in Symbolic view For example altitude A B C is the simplified form given in this se
126. the left starting with 1 421 The argument matrix can refer to either a vector or a matrix Matrix functions Transpose Determinant RREF Create Make 422 The matrix functions are available in the Matrix category on the Math menu Select Matrix Select a function Transposes matrix For a complex matrix TRN finds the conjugate transpose TRN matrix Determinant of a square matrix DET matrix Reduced Row Echelon Form Changes a rectangular matrix to its reduced row echelon form RREF matrix Creates a matrix of dimension rows x columns using expression to calculate each element If expression contains the variables and J then the calculation for each element substitutes the current row number for and the current column number for J You can also create a vector by the number of elements e instead of the number of rows and columns MAKEMAT expression rows columns MAKEMAT expression elements Examples MAKEMAT 0 3 3 returns a 3 x 3 zero matrix Lig ORO OO Oh cP OGY sO MAKEMAT V2 2 3 returns the 2 x 3 matrix LEN2eNQEN2 TS IN2 Noe Ne il MAKEMAT I J 1 2 3 returns the 2 x 3 matrix Miyarsa a Note in the example above that each element is the sum of the row number and column number minus 1 Matrices Identity Random JordanBlock Hilbert Isometric Vandermonde Basic Norm Row Norm Column Norm Matrices MAKEMAT V2 2 returns the 2 element vector V
127. the method by Enter minimum horizontal value which graphs are plotted The An introduction to HP apps contiguration options are spread across two pages Tap to move from the first to the second page and to return to the first page Tip When you go to Plot view to see the graph of a definition selected in Symbolic view there may be no graph shown The likely cause of this is that the spread of plotted values is outside the range settings in Plot Setup view A quick way to bring the graph into view is to press and select Autoscale This also changes the range settings in Plot Setup view Page 1 Setup field Purpose TRNG Sets the range of T values to be plotted Parametric Note that here are two fields one for the only minimum and one for the maximum value TSTEP Sets the increment between consecutive T Parametric only values ORNG Sets the range of angle values to be Polar only plotted Note that here are two fields one for the minimum and one for the maximum value OSTEP Sets the increment between consecutive Polar only angle values SEQPLOT Sets the type of plot Stairstep or Cobweb Sequence only NRNG Sets the range of N values to be plotted Sequence Note that here are two fields one for the only minimum and one for the maximum value HWIDTH Sets the width of the bars in a histogram Stats 1 Var only HRNG Sets the range of values to be included in a Stats 1 Var histogram Note tha
128. the point you have accurately tapped the point otherwise the pointer coordinates are shown indicating that the point is not selected Composite objects To move a multi point object see Translation on page 148 An object is colored black by default and cyan when it is selected If you want to change the color of an object 1 Press GR 2 Select Change Color The Select Object menu appears 3 Select the object whose color you want to change The Choose Color palette appears 4 Select the color you want 5 Press Esc 131 Filling objects Removing fill Undoing Clearing an object 132 Note that for object with closed contours such as a circle or polygon it is the fill color that is changed An object with closed contours such as a circle or polygon can be filled with color 1 Press aa 2 Select Fill with Color The Select Object menu appears 3 Select the object you want to fill The object is highlighted 1 Press aa 2 Select Change Color The Choose Color palette appears 3 Select the color you want 15 10 5 0 Pointer 2 29 5 19 4 Press E P ress E3 To remove the fill from an object 1 Press 9 2 Select Fill with Color The Select Object menu appears 3 Select the object You can undo your last addition or change to Plot view by pressing let uJ However you must have keyboard shortcuts activated for this to work See page 135 To clear
129. the quadratic function y x 1 3 103 Open the Function app Define the expressions 104 NOTE 1 Open the Function Function Symbolic View cxar app Baol o i 7 E F2 X Select E F3 X FUNCTION H Fax E FS X Recall that you can mp rew open an app just by m F7 tapping its icon Enter function You can also open it by using the cursor keys to highlight it and then pressing ze The Function app starts in Symbolic view This is the defining view It is where you symbolically define that is specify the functions you want to explore Show The graphical and numerical data you see in Plot view and Numeric view are derived from the symbolic expressions defined here There are 10 fields for defining functions These are labelled F1 xX through F9 X and FO X 2 Highlight the field you want to use either by tapping on it or scrolling to it If you are entering a new expression just start typing If you are editing an existing expression tap and make your changes When you have finished defining or changing the expression press __ _ Enter the linear function in F1 X xt n Enter Base 3 Define D Enter the quadratic Function Symbolic View cine function in F2 X Y MEFIQ0 1 x V E F2 X X 1 3 aC 3 _ Fue m rao E FS X H F6 X E F7 X Enter function Show You can tap the button to assist in the entry of equations In the Function app
130. the time otherwise a comma will be entered Tapping displays further stack manipulation tools Deletes all items in the stack from the highlighted item down to and including the item on stack level 1 Items above the highlighted item drop down to fill the levels of the deleted items If you just want to delete a single item from the stack see Delete an item below Duplicates all items between and including the highlighted item and the item on stack level 1 If for example you have selected the item on stack level 3 selecting DUPN duplicates it and the two items below it places them on stack levels 1 to 3 and moves the items that were duplicated up to stack levels 4 to 6 Places a copy of the selected result on the entry line and leaves the source result highlighted Not working Creates a list of results with the highlighted result the first element in the list and the item on stack level 1 the last Function eae Function _ Stack ROLLE ROLL PICK Before After To show a result in full screen textbook format tap EITS Tap to return to the history To delete an item from the stack 1 Select it You can do this by pressing or until the item is highlighted or by tapping on it Reverse Polish Notation RPN Delete all items 2 Press 8 To delete all items thereby clearing the history press Esc Reverse Polish Notation RPN 49 50 Reverse Polish Notation RPN Comput
131. through A that crosses segment BC equidistant from both endpoints Geometry Altitude Polygon Triangle Quadilateral Ngon Polygon5 Polygon6 Hexagon Special Eq triangle 1Equilateral 4 Square Parallel ogram Geometry Tap on a vertex A and press _ tap on the line opposite the vertex and press __ _ A line is drawn through A that crosses segment BC at right angles The Polygon menu provides tools for drawing various polygons Tap at each vertex pressing after each tap Keyboard shortcut Tap at each vertex pressing after each tap Produces a pentagon Tap at each vertex pressing after each tap Produces a hexagon Tap at each vertex pressing after each tap Produces a regular hexagon that is one with sides of equal length Tap at each vertex pressing after each tap Produces an equilateral triangle Tap at one vertex and press Eter _ Tap at another vertex and press __ The location of the third vertex is automatically calculated and the triangle is drawn Tap at one vertex and press __ e _ Tap at another vertex and press _ Tap at a third vertex and press _ft _ The location of the fourth vertex is automatically calculated and the square is drawn Tap at one vertex and press e _ Tap at another vertex and press _ Tap at a third vertex and press _ft _ The location of the fourth vertex is automatically calculated and the parallelogram is draw
132. to be displayed Takes a conic expression and a vector of and returns the origin of the conic the matrix of a basis in which the conic is reduced O or 1 0 if the conic is degenerate the reduced equation of the conic and a vector of the conic s parametric equations reduced conic Expr LstVar 363 ref reflection remove reorder REPEAT residue restart resultant RETURN revlist rhombus 364 Returns the solution to a system of linear equations written in matrix form ref Mtrx M With a line D and a point C as arguments returns the reflection of the point across the line i e the line is taken as a line of symmetry With a point A and a curve C as arguments returns the reflection of the curve about the point i e the point is taken as the point of symmetry reflection Pnt A or Line D Pnt C or Curve C Returns a list with the elements that satisty the Boolean function removed remove FncBool f le Lst 1 Reorders the in an expression according to the order given in LstVar reorder Expr LstVar Used in programming to indicate a statement or statements that should be repeated until a given condition is true Returns the residue of an expression at a residue Expr Var v Cplx a Purges all the restart NULL Returns the resultant i e the determinant of the Sylvester matrix of two polynomials resultant Poly Poly Var Used in pro
133. to the given graph Tap to see the correct answer and tap to exit Test mode The Explorer apps 20 Functions and commands Many mathematical functions are available from the calculator s keyboard These are described in Keyboard functions on page 285 Other functions and commands are collected together in the Toolbox menus 33 There are five Toolbox menus Functions and commands Math A collection of non symbolic mathematical functions see Keyboard functions on page 285 CAS A collection of symbolic mathematical functions see CAS menu on page 298 App A collection of app functions that can be called from elsewhere in the calculator such as Home view CAS view the Spreadsheet app and in a program see App menu on page 312 Note that the Geometry app functions can be called from elsewhere in the calculator but they are not available from the App menu For that reason the Geometry functions are not described in this chapter They are described in the Geometry chapter User The functions that you have created see Creating your own functions on page 371 and the programs you have created that contain global Catlg All the functions and commands onthe Math menu onthe CAS menu used in the Geometry app used in programming 283 Setting the form of menu items used in the Matrix Editor used in the List Editor and some additional f
134. tool is still active by the presence of on screen help in the top left side corner of the screen help such as Hit Point 1 The steps provided in this section are based on touch entry For example to add a point the steps will tell you to tap on the screen where you want the point to be However you can also use the cursor keys to position the cursor where you want the point to be and then press __ e _J The drawing tools for the geometric objects listed in this section can be selected from the menu buttons a the bottom of the screen Some objects can also be entered using a keyboard shortcut For example you can select the triangle drawing tool by pressing Keyboard shortcuts are only available if they ave been turned on in Plot Setup view See page 134 Tap to display a menu and submenus of options for entering various types of points The menus and submenus are Tap where you want the point to be and press Keyboard shortcut 141 Point On Midpoint Intersection More Trace Stop Trace 142 Tap the object where you want the new point to be and press fner_ If you select a point that has been placed on an object and then move that point the point will be constrained to the object on which it was placed For example a point placed on a circle will remain on that circle regardless of how you move the point If there is no object where you tap a point is created if you then press
135. v contain the gt frequencies in this E Plot2 Histogram V H3 D1 D2 example D2 WH Plot3 Line E Enter frequency column a R 8 If you want to choose a color for the graph of the data in Plot view see Choose a color for plots on page 74 9 If you have more than one analysis defined in Symbolic view deselect any analysis you are not currently interested in 10 Return to Numeric view Num 4Setup 11 In column D2 enter Statistics 1Var Numeric View deusten D1 D2 D3 D4 the frequency data 5 165 3 shown in the table 170 8 175 2 above 180 1 5 3 Enter z 160 g Erer 2 Enter Enter 190 Statistics 1Var app 12 Recalculate the X statistics Min Q1 Med Max The mean height a R now Is sX ox approximately 19 167 631 cm tL Size column ok 13 Configure a histogram plot for the data setup Statistics 1Var Plot Setup al Setup H Width 1 H Rng 160 180 Enter parameters XRng iss 82 iate to vour Y Rng 0 9 appropriate to your ye data Those shown at ytick 1 the right will ensure P Enter minimum horizontal value that all the data in Edit Pagey t this particular example is displayed in Plot view 14 Plot a histogram of the data Ploti L Setup X H1 160 161 F 5 Entering and editing statistical data Each column in Numeric view is a dataset and is represented
136. values In Plot Setup View enter values for TRNG In a program type n gt Tmin n gt Tmax 495 Tstep Parametric Xtick Ytick Xmin Xmax Ymin Ymax Xzoom 496 where n lt n Sets the step size for the independent variable In Plot Setup View enter a value for TSTEP In a program type n gt Tstep where n gt 0 Sets the distance between tick marks for the horizontal axis In Plot Setup View enter a value for Xtick a program type n gt Xtick where n gt 0 Sets the distance between tick marks on the vertical axis In Plot Setup View enter a value for Ytick In a program type n gt Ytick where n gt 0 Sets the minimum and maximum horizontal values of the plot screen In Plot Setup View enter values for XRNG In a program type n gt Xmin n gt Xmax where n lt n Sets the minimum and maximum vertical values of the plot screen In Plot Setup View enter the values for YRNG In a program type n gt Ymin n gt Ymax where n lt n Sets the horizontal zoom factor Programming Yzoom Symbolic view variables AltHyp Inference EO E9 Solve FO F9 Function Programming In Plot View press REME then ERIN Scroll to Set Factors select itand press BE Enter the value for x Zoom In a program type n gt Xzoom where n gt 0 The default value is 4 From Plot setup press REME then EEI Scroll to Set Factors se
137. values between 1 and 10 that differ by 2 F is whatever value has been assigned to it elsewhere 193 such as in Home view If F happened to be 5 column D2 is populated with 4 4 20 44 76 Sort data values 1 In Numeric view place the highlight in the column you want to sort and tap BEJA 2 Specify the sort order Ascending or Descending 3 If relevant specify the Frequency column 4 lop Gia Computed statistics Tapping displays the following results for each dataset selected in Symbolic view Statistic Definition n Number of data points Min Minimum value Q1 First quartile median of values to left of median Med Median value Q3 Third quartile median of values to right of median Max Maximum value xX Sum of data values with their frequencies a Sum of the squares of the data values 7 Mean sX Sample standard deviation oX Population standard deviation serrX Standard error When the data set contains an odd number of values the median value is not used when calculating Q1 and Q3 For 194 Statistics 1Var app Plotting To plot statistical data Statistics 1Var app example for the data set 3 5 7 8 15 16 17 only the first three items 3 5 and 7 are used to calculate Q1 and only the last three terms 5 16 and 17 are used to calculate Q3 You can plot e Histograms Box and Whisker plots Normal Probability plots Line plots Bar graphs e Pareto charts
138. various calculator settings These are explained below The history displays a record of your past calculations The entry line displays the object you are currently entering or modifying The object could be a parameter expression list matrix line of programming code etc The menu buttons are options that are relevant to the current display These options are selected by tapping the corresponding menu button Only a labeled button has a function You close a menu without making a selection from it by pressing BS Annunciators Annunciators are symbols or characters that appear in the title bar They indicate that certain settings are current and also provide time and battery power information Annunciator Meaning lt Lime green The angle mode setting is currently degrees T lime green The angle mode setting is currently radians Getting started Getting started Annunciator tS Cyan CAS White A Z orange a z orange tU Yellow W Yellow Time Meaning Continued The Shift key is active The function shown in blue on a key will be activated when a key is pressed Press to cancel shift mode You are working in CAS view not Home view The Alpha key is active The charac ter shown in orange on a key will be entered in uppercase when a key is pressed See Adding text on page 20 for more information The Alpha Shitt key combination is active The character shown in
139. view So in this example make sure that A is highlighted The current equation is V U 2AD The plot view will plot two equations one for each side of the equation One of these is Y V2 with V 27 78 making Y 771 7284 This graph will be a horizontal line The other graph will be Y U 2AD with U 16 67and D 100 making Y 200A 277 8889 This graph is also a line The desired solution is the value of A where these two lines intersect 7 Plot the equation for variable A Select Auto Scale Select Both sides of En where n is the number of the selected equation E1 771 7264 8 Tap and then GE Using the cursor keys move the trace cursor along either graph until it nears the intersection Note that the value of A displayed near the bottom left corner e eee of the screen closely matches the value of A you calculated above The Plot view provides a convenient way to find an approximation to a solution when you suspect that there are a number of solutions Move the trace cursor close to the solution that is the intersection of interest to you and then open Numeric view The solution given in Numeric view will be will be for the solution nearest the trace cursor NOTE By dragging a finger horizontally or vertically across the screen you can quickly see parts of the plot that are initially outside the x and y ranges you set Solve app Several equations You can define up to ten equ
140. you send the app to another calculator Such notes do not appear in the Notes Catalog They can only be read when the associated app is open Notes created via the Notes Catalog are not specific to any app and can be viewed at any time by opening the Notes Catalog Such notes can also be sent to another calculator To create a note 1 Open the Note NETIN Te from the Notes Catalog Catalog ee a a A30 Notes and Info To create a note for an app Note Editor buttons and keys Notes and Info 2 Create a new note 3 Enter a name for your note In this example we ll call the note MYNOTE MYNOTE 4 Write your note using the editing Enter name for new note ca Enter name for new note MYNOT ET cancel 0k keys and formatting options described in the following sections When you are finished exit the Note Editor by pressing EB or pressing and opening an app Your work is automatically saved THIS IS MY Format syle te To access your new note return to the Notes Catalog You can also create a note that is specific to an app and which stays with the app should you send the app to another calculator See Adding a note to an app on page 96 Notes created this way take advantage of all the formatting features of the Note Editor see below The following buttons and keys are available while you are adding or editing a note 431 432
141. you want to know the probability that just 6 heads would appear during 20 tosses of a fair coin BINOMIAL 20 6 0 5 returns 0 03696441652002 Functions and commands Poisson Cumulative Normal Functions and commands Poisson probability mass function Computes the probability of k occurrences of an event during a future interval given u the mean of the occurrences of that event during that interval in the past For this function k is a non negative integer and u is a real number POISSON m K Example Suppose that on average you get 20 emails a day What is the probability that tomorrow you will get 15 POISSON 20 15 returns 0 0516488535318 Cumulative normal distribution function Returns the lower tail probability of the normal probability density function for the value x given the mean u and standard deviation of a normal distribution If only one argument is supplied it is taken as x and the assumption is that u 0 and o 1 NORMAL CDF u 6 X Example NORMAL CDF 0 1 2 returns 0 97724986805 Cumulative student s t distribution function Returns the lower tail probability of the student s t orobability density function at x given n degrees of freedom STUDENT CDF Nn X Example student cdf 3 3 2 returns 0 0246659214814 Cumulative y distribution function Returns the lower tail probability of the y probability density function for the value x given n degrees of freedom CH
142. 2 an extremum was found that is as close to a solution as possible 313 3 neither a solution an approximation nor an extremum was found See chapter 12 Solve app beginning on page 235 for more information about the types of solutions returned by this function Spreadsheet functions 314 The spreadsheet functions can be selected from the App Toolbox menu EA gt gt Spreadsheet They can also be selected from the View menu fea when the Spreadsheet app is open The typical syntax of a spreadsheet function is runctionName Output conriguration input optional parameters e Output is either a reference to a single cell in which case the output is controlled by the configuration string or a cell range reference where the output size is restricted by the size of the range If the output range is wider than it is tall it will change the output to horizontal layout instead of the default vertical layout e Configuration is a string that controls which values are output Leaving the quotation marks empty produces the default output The order of the values can also be controlled by the order that they appear in the string Input is the input list for the function This can be a cell range reference a simple list or anything that results in a list of values _ denotes optional parameters For example STAT1 B1 A25 A37 produces the following output Spreadshe
143. 2 V2 Identity matrix Creates a square matrix of dimension size x size whose diagonal elements are 1 and off diagonal elements are zero I DENMAT size Returns a list of size n or a n x m matrix that contains random integers in the range 99 through 99 with uniform distribution or that contains random numbers according to the law put between quote randMat Intg n Intg m Interval or quote DistribLaw Returns a matrix n x n with a on the diagonal 1 above and O everywhere else JordanBlock Expr a Intg n Returns the order n Hilbert matrix Hjk 1 j k 1 j k 1 n fil bere inte mn Matrix of an isometry given by its proper elements mkisom Vect Sign 1 or 1 Returns the Vandermonde matrix V 0 V 1 vandermonde Vect V Finds the norm of a matrix ABS matrix Row Norm Finds the maximum value over all rows for the sums of the absolute values of all elements in a row ROWNORM matrix Column Norm Finds the maximum value over all columns of the sums of the absolute values of all elements in a column COLNORM matrix 423 Spectral Norm Spectral Radius Condition Rank Pivot Trace Advanced Eigenvalues Eigenvectors Jordan Diagonal 424 Spectral Norm of matrix SPECNORM matrix Spectral Radius of a square matrix SPECRAD matrix Condition Number Finds the 1 norm column norm of a square matrix COND matrix Rank of a rectangular matrix RA
144. 2360679775 Math menu Press to open the Statistics 1Var Toolbox menus one of which Math is the Math menu The ithmetic functions and commands Trigonometry available on the Math menu are listed as they are categorized on the menu vah ZT ETI ETD Numbers Ceiling Smallest integer greater than or equal to value CEILING value Examples CEILING 3 2 returns 4 CEILING 3 2 returns 3 Floor Greatest integer less than or equal to value FLOOR value Example FLOOR 3 2 returns 3 FLOOR 3 2 returns 4 IP Integer part IP value Example IP 23 2 returns 23 288 Functions and commands FP Round Truncate Mantissa Exponent Arithmetic Maximum Functions and commands Fractional part FP value Example FP 23 2 returns 2 Rounds value to decimal places Also accepts complex numbers ROUND value places ROUND can also round to a number of signiticant digits if places is a negative integer as shown in the second example below Examples ROUND 7 8676 2 returns 7 87 ROUND 0 0036757 3 returns 0 00368 Truncates value to decimal places Also accepts complex numbers TRUNCATE value places Example TRUNCATE 2 3678 2 returns 2 36 Mantissa that is the significant digits of value where value is a floating point number MANT value Example MANT 21 2534 returns 2 12 Exponent of value That is the integer component of the power
145. 32 you can delete an object in Symbolic view 1 Highlight the definition of the object you want to delete 2 Tap or press 8 To delete all objects press Ea You can change the name that is automatically given to an object For example you could rename a circle from GC to GCircle or rename one square from GJ to GHouse and another from GL to GPaddock The new names will also appear in Plot view and can also be referenced in Numeric view and in the CAS 137 Note that a name must be a single string of characters that is it must contain no spaces Also the G prefix must be retained 1 Highlight the definition of the object you want to rename 2 Top WIEN 3 Make your change and tap WMA Functionality removed as at 3015 Symbolic Setup view The Symbolic view of the Geometry app is common with many apps It is used to override certain some system wide settings For details see Symbolic Setup view on page 64 Numeric view in detail Numeric view B enables you to do calculations in the Geometry app The results displayed are dynamic if you manipulate an object in Plot view or Symbolic view any calculations in Numeric view that refer to that object are automatically updated to reflect the new properties of that object Consider circle C in the illustration at the right To calculate the area and radius of C 1 Press to open Numeric view 2 Tap
146. 400 Note if you find that the tracer cursor is moving along the regression line rather than from data point to data point press or to select the points and not the line If the regression line is not showing tap MGB The coordinates of the tracer cursor are shown at the bottom of the screen If they are not visible tap EEM Note if you find that the tracer cursor is moving between the data points rather than along the regression line press or to select the line and not the points Tap to display the data sets that being represented by of the regression line Statistics 2Var app Symb B Press fay to see the Statistics 2Var Symbolic View equation of the V si c1 c2 Type1 Linear regression line in i Symbolic view Type2 Linear If the equation is too wide E Fit2 mx s for the screen select it Enter function and press EEA The example above shows that the slope of the regression line m is 425 875 and the y intercept b is 376 25 Plot view menu items The menu items in Plot view are Displays the Zoom menu Turns trace mode on or off Shows or hides a curve that best fits the data points according to the selected regression model Enables you to specity a value on the regression line to jump to or a data point to jump to if your cursor is on a data point rather than on the regression line You might need to press or to move the cursor fo the ob
147. 50 000 house mortgage at 6 5 annual interest You expect to sell the house in 10 years repaying the loan in a balloon payment Find the size of the balloon payment that is the value of the mortgage after 10 years of payment The following cash flow diagram illustrates the case of a mortgage with balloon payment I YR 6 5 PV 150 000 NN 30x 12 360 for PMT N 10x 12 120 for balloon payment P YR 12 End mode 119 120 Balloon payment FV 2 1 Start the Finance app Select Finance 2 Return all fields to their default values 3 Enter the known TVM Time Value of Money sief variables as shown N 360 I YR 6 5 fi PV 150000 P YR 12 in the figure E 9 FV 0 End y Group Size 12 Enter payment amount or solve 4 Highlight PMT and L edit jAmort Solve tap EIS The pm field shows 984 10 In other words the monthly payments are 948 10 5 To determine the balloon payment or future value FV for the mortgage after 10 years enter 120 for N highlight FV and tap SNe The FV field shows 127 164 19 indicating that the future value of the loan that is how much is still owing as 127 164 19 Calculating amortizations Amortization calculations determine the amounts applied towards the principal and interest in a payment or series of payments They also use TVM variables To calculate amortizations 268 Finance app Example Amortization for a home
148. 6 is a pertect number because 6 1 2 3 The example below returns true when its argument is a perfect number EXPORT ISPERFECT n BEGIN LOCAL d sum 2 P gt d 1 gt sum WHILE sum lt n AND d lt n DO IF irem n d 0 THEN Programming REPEAT BREAK CONTINUE Programming sumt td gt sum END d 1 gt d END RETURN sumS ny END The following program displays all the perfect numbers up to 1000 EXPORT PERFECTNUMS BEGIN LOCAL k FOR k FROM 2 TO 1000 DO IF ISPERFECT k THEN MSGBOX k is perfect press OK END END END Syntax REPEAT commands UNTIL test Repeats the sequence of commands until fest is true not 0 The example below prompts for a positive value for SIDES modifying an earlier program in this chapter EXPORT SIDES EXPORT GETSIDES BEGIN REPEAT INPUT SIDES Die Sides N Enter num sides 2 UNTIL SIDES gt Q0 END Syntax BREAK n Exits from loops by breaking out of n loop levels Execution picks up with the first statement after the loop With no argument exit from a single loop Syntax CONTINUE 469 Variable Function LOCAL EXPORT EXPORT VIEW KEY Transfer execution to the start of the next iteration of a loop These commands enable you to control the visibility of a user defined variable Local Syntax LOCAL var I var2 varn Makes the variables var1 var2 etc local to the program in which they are found Exports th
149. 61 ADO VIEWS cieee oniednacaaeiet wasee A 62 SVN ONG eects soars E dceactsita deantcanda nes 63 Symbolic Setup view scicedscssescts fasts coedes eens tease odes daaesa decid 64 PIOT WOW jashcracnie E E EE N sane sae 64 Plo SGI VIEW noniin na teeters 65 Numeric WICW i xaiiccacunmeantuartnticeadennticeiae secevadtaaseedeates 66 Numere SEIU OG VIEW nerean easeiaemateuscesok 68 Quek exam le aene E cae adon aces apnacaaesce aeaaieesaseae 69 Common operations in Symbolic View cccccsseecccseseeeeesenseees 7 Symbolic view Summary of menu butfons 6cccceeeeeeeees 76 Common operations in Symbolic Setup VieW cccseeeceeeeee ees 76 Common operations in Plot view cccscccccceseeecceeeseeeeeeeeueees 77 LOOM eonan sa akan aves byssus tava ect nce E 78 WC Certs pea Oa eects tac rata N E OT AE EERE EEEN 84 Plot view Summary of menu buHtons ccccccceeeeeeceeeeeeees 86 Common operations in Plot Setup VieW cccseccccceeeeeceseeseees 86 COnnGQUrePlOl VIEW izeheidinnt onoareidondennd canoe eahcsa desde 86 Common operations in Numeric View ccseceeeeeeeeeeeeneneeees 90 LOOM G y saws TE ae Saarinen sex A P EN EN tea orate 90 EV GIUGIIG nase yates nda nasacort EEN 92 Csom TapE S ote seetatieis ices ceendc ate tetas Gactaeateee 93 Numeric view Summary of menu buttons 0sceeceeee eens 94 Common operations in Numeric Setup VieW ccecceeeeeeeeeeees 95 Combining Plot and Numeric VieW
150. ADigits AComplex AFormat Linear Solver app variables Category Names Numeric LSystem LSolution Modes AAngle ADigits AComplex AFormat a Contains a vector with the last solution found by either the Linear Solver app or the LSolve app function 388 Variables Triangle Solver app variables Category Names Numeric SideA SideB SideC Rect Modes AAngle AComplex Linear Explorer app variables Category Names Modes AAngle AComplex Quadratic Explorer app variables Category Names Modes AAngle AComplex Trig Explorer app variables Category Names Modes AAngle AComplex Variables AngleA AngleB AngleC ADigits AFormat ADigits AFormat ADigits AFormat ADigits AFormat Sequence app variables 390 Category Symbolic Plot Numeric Modes Names Onn U2 U3 U4 U5 Axes Cursor GridDots GridLines Labels Nmin Nmax Recenter Automatic BuildYourOwn Numlndep NumStart AAngle AComplex U6 U7 U8 g9 UO Xmax Xmin Xtick XZoom Ymax ymin YCLOK Yzoom NumStep NumType NumZoom ADigits AFormat Variables 22 Units and constants Units Unit categories Units and constants A unit of measurement such as inch ohm or Becquerel enables you give a precise magnitude to a physical quantity You can attach a unit of measurement to any number or numerical result A numerical value with units attached is referred to as a measurement You can opera
151. Ay Wy lt b Aye py gt Hp Hz u p3 The inputs are Field Definition name Zi Sample 1 mean Ks Sample 2 mean S1 Sample 1 standard deviation S5 Sample 2 standard deviation ny Sample 1 size ns Sample 2 size a Significance level Inference app Field Definition name Pooled Check this option to pool samples based on their standard deviations Results The results are Result Description Test T T Test statistic Test A X Difference in the means associated with the test t value Probability associated with the T Test statistic DF Degrees of freedom Critical T Boundary values of T associated with the a level that you supplied Critical Difference in the means associated AX with the a level you supplied Confidence intervals The confidence interval calculations that the HP Prime can perform are based on the Normal Zdistribution or Student s t distribution One Sample Z Interval Menu name Zint 1u This option uses the Normal Zdistribution to calculate a confidence interval for u the true mean of a population when the true population standard deviation o is known Inputs The inputs are Field Definition name Sample mean XI Inference app 229 Results Field Definition name Sample size Population standard deviation Confidence level The results are et oenn C Confidence level Critical Z Critical values for Z Lower Lower bound for u Upper Upper bound
152. BAO second multiplies 5719 by 419 Obviously the results too are mathematically equivalent However each is presented in the base of the operand entered first 16 in the first case and 8 in the second The exception is if an operand is not marked as an integer by preceding it with In these cases the result is presented in base 10 Integer arithmetic in the CAS Function ete 710 4h 10 2280 You can perform integer arithmetic in the CAS However the result is always displayed in base 10 and the operands are 516 Integer arithmetic converted to base 10 This seems odd If everything is converted to base 10 why is there an integer base setting in the CAS settings And why is binary missing as an option in the CAS settings Integer manipulation The result of integer arithmetic can be further analysed and manipulated by viewing it in the Edit Integer dialog Integer arithmetic 1 In Home view use the cursor keys to select the result of interest Press Base The Edit Integer dialog Function saciar appears The Was field at Edit Integer the top shows the result you selected in Home view The hex and decimal equivalents are shown under the Out field followed by a bit by bit 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 00000000 11100100 4 e Shift T Bits Neg Cycle base 4h representation of the integer Symbols beneath the bit r
153. Bad Guess es Constant Meaning Continued The initial guess lies outside the domain of the equation Therefore the solution was not a real number or it caused an error The value of the equation is the same at every point sampled Solve app 13 Linear Solver app The Linear Solver app enables you to solve a set of linear equations The set can contain two or three linear equations In a two equation set each equation must be in the form ax by k In a three equation set each equation must be in the form ax by cez k You provide values for a b and k and c in three equation sets for each equation and the app will attempt to solve for x and y and z in three equation sets The HP Prime will alert you if no solution can be found or if there is an infinite number of solutions Getting started with the Linear Solver app The following example defines the following set of equations and then solves for the unknown variables 6x 9y 6z 5 7x 10y 8z 10 6x 4y 6 Open the Linear 1 Open the Linear PAAT EAT 12 14 Solver app Solver app ke 0Y 0z 0 Select OX 0 Y 0Z 0 OX 0 Y 0Z 0 Linear 0 Solver Infinite number of solutions The app opens in Numeric view rarere Linear Solver app 243 Note Define and solve the equations 244 If the last time you used the Linear Solver app you solved for two equations the two equation input form is displayed To solve a three equa
154. Button or Key Purpose 4 Page F Sam odo Copy Begin m E oo m Copy Enter Shift Clear 2 O gt i p Opens the text formatting menu See Formatting Options on page 434 Provides bold italic underline full caps superscript and subscript options See Formatting Options on page 434 A toggle button that offers three types of bullet See Formatting Options on page 434 Provides options for inserting formulas Enters a space during text entry Moves from page to page in a multi page note Shows options for copying text in a note See below Copy option Mark where to begin a text selection Copy option Mark where to end a text selection Copy option Select the entire note Copy option Cut the selected text Copy option Copy the selected text Deletes the character to the left of the cursor Starts a new line Erases the entire note Menu for entering variable names and the contents of variables Notes and Info Button or Key Menu for entering math commands vars Chars EDs Purpose Continued Displays a palette of special characters To type one highlight it and tap or press Lo To copy a character without closing the Chars menu select it and tap Entering uppercase and lowercase characters Notes and Info Make the next character upper case Lock mode make all c
155. Editor Buttons When you open a list the following buttons and keys are and keys available to you Button or Key Purpose Copies the highlighted list item into the entry line Inserts a new value with default zero before the highlighted item or Deletes the highlighted item Displays a menu for you to choose the small font medium font or large font Displays a menu for you to choose how many lists to display at one time one two three or four For example if you have only 14 displayed and you choose 3 from the Lists menu lists L5 and L6 will be displayed in addition to L4 Clear Clears all items from the list or Moves the cursor to the start or the end of the list Lists 401 To edit a list 1 Open the List Catalog lu a List 2 Tap on the name of oo oo ooo o W 0 the list L1 L1 etc The List Editor appears 3 Tap on the element you want to edit Alternatively press or until the element you want to edit is highlighted In this example edit the third element so 89 Fedit ins Deletel size ists that it has a value of 5 To insertan element Suppose you want to in a list insert a new value 9 in L1 2 in the list L1 shown to the right 402 L1 88 90 VBP UN wn 65 Fedit ins Deletel Size ists Lists Deleting lists To delete a list To delete all lists Select L1 2 that is i th
156. Fixed 2 Scientific 3 Engineering Sets the complex number mode for the Home view From Modes check or uncheck the Complex field Or in a program type 0 gt HComplex for OFF 1 gt HComplex for ON Returns the system date The format is YYYY MMDD This format is used irrespective of the format set on the Home Settings screen Returns the system time or sets the system time HHMMSS gt Time Sets the language From Modes choose a language for the Language field In a program store one of the following constant numbers into the variable Language 1 gt Language English 2 gt Language Chinese 3 gt Language 5 Language 4 gt Language German 6 gt Language 7 gt Language Sets the entry mode In a program enter 0 gt Entry for Textbook 509 Integer Base Bits Signed AAngle AComplex 510 1 gt Entry for Algebraic 2 gt Entry for RPN Returns or sets the integer base In a program enter 0 gt Base for Binary 1 gt Base for Octal 2 Base for Decimal 3 gt Base for Hexadecimal Returns or sets the number of bits for representing integers In a program enter nb Bits where n is the number of bits Returns or sets a flag indicating that the integer wordsize is signed or not In a program enter 0 gt Signed for unsigned 1 gt Signed for signed The following variables are found in the Symbolic setup of an
157. For example to store the list 25 147 8 in L7 1 Create the list on the entry line 152 3 49 8 gt L7 125 147 8 2 Press gt to move the SS es ee cursor outside the list 3 Tap ESS 4 Enter the name 7 5 Complete the operation E To display a list in Home view type its name and press If the list is empty a pair of empty braces is returned To display one element of a list in Home view enter listname element For example if L6 is 3 4 5 6 then L6 2 Enter returns 4 To store a value in one element of a list in Home view enter value listname element For example to store 148 as the second element in L2 type 148 EJB 22 ee You can send lists to another calculator or a PC just as you can apps programs matrices and notes See Sharing data on page 40 for instructions Lists List functions Menu format Lists List functions are found on the Math menu You can use them in Home and in programs You can type in the name of the function or you 1 Make List 1 Numbers gt 2Sort can copy the name ofthe oarithmetic _ 2Reverse s 3Trigonometry gt 4 Concatenate function from the List A lst category of the Math sProbability gt 6Size 6 List gt A List menu 7 Matrix 8 Special Press 6 toselectthe List category in the left column of the Math menu List is the sixth category on the Math menu which is why pressing
158. Getting started 33 in Textbook format or not This refers to the appearance of your calculations in the history section of both Home view and CAS view This is a different setting to the Entry setting discussed above Entering expressions Example 34 The examples that follow assume that the entry mode is Textbook e An expression can contain numbers functions and variables To enter a function press the appropriate key or open a Toolbox menu and select the function You can also enter a function by using the alpha keys to spell out its name e When you have finished entering the expression press to evaluate it If you make a mistake while entering an expression you can e delete the character to the left of the cursor by pressing e delete the character to the right of the cursor by pressing e clear the entire entry line by pressing or 3 2 Calculate 23 148 45 LoJ23L k 14E FANOIOISBILAE O AN 45 __ Ete This example illustrates a number of important 23 1488 1 n 45 points to be aware of 3 620 996104305 fstor TE a delimiters such as parentheses e the importance of how to enter negative numbers e the use of implied versus explicit multiplication Getting started Parentheses Algebraic precedence Getting started As the example above shows parentheses are automatically added to enclose the arguments of functions as in LN However you will nee
159. HP Prime Graphing Calculator User Guide Edition Part Number NW280 200X Legal Notices This manual and any examples contained herein are provided as is and are subject to change without notice Hewlett Packard Company makes no warranty of any kind with regard to this manual including but not limited to the implied warranties of merchantability non infringement and fitness for a particular purpose Hewlett Packard Company shall not be liable for any errors or for incidental or consequential damages in connection with the furnishing performance or use of this manual or the exam ples contained herein Product Regulatory amp Environment Information Product Regulatory and Environment Information is provided on the CD shipped with this prod uct Copyright 2013 Hewlett Packard Development Company L P Reproduction adaptation or translation of this manual is prohibited without prior written per mission of Hewlett Packard Company except as allowed under the copyright laws Printing History Edition 1 May 2013 Contents Preface Manuolconyeni ONS asorar orate tele iiuiaa Sica senders 9 NOTCE eniron a A A S 10 1 Getting started Beror Slamin meranen E eaasencoctneatans 9 On off cancel ODE IGhONS raat earagen onsceidhadk shereiiand wae estaendy 10 Thedis play eeaeee ation r a nse ace masa ES 11 Sechons othe display orr na a E E E 12 PIVO a E EA 14 TOUCH GeSIUNES ceense nean nn a A 14 The keyboard senson an e Grease
160. HP Prime is unable to calculate it automatically Typically if the nth term in the sequence depends on n 2 then you must enter the second term The app enables you to create two types of graphs e a Stairsteps graph which plots n on the horizontal axis and U on the vertical axis e a Cobweb graph which plots U _ on the horizontal axis and U on the vertical axis Getting started with the Sequence app Sequence app The following example explores the well known Fibonacci sequence where each term from the third term on is the sum of the preceding two terms In this example we specify three sequence fields the first term the second term and a rule for generating all subsequent terms 257 Open the Sequence app Define the expression Set up the plot 258 4 5 Open the Sequence Sequence Symbolic View app U1 1 E u12 A Select tee sequence U2 1 E u22 U2 N The app opens in U3 1 Symbolic view edt ov T show bval Define the Fibonacci sequence U 1 U 1 U U _ U _ forn gt 2 In the UI 1 field specify the first term of the sequence 1L fae In the U1 2 field specify the second term of the sequence i In the U N field Sequence Symbolic View specify the third term 05 E vU1 2 1 of the sequence ao o T using the buttons at wo U2 2 the bottom of the g U2 N screen to help with Ux some entries edit v __ Show Eva
161. IN bisector black blue bounded_function BREAK Functions and commands approx Expr Int Displays the algebraic area at point zO of a circle or a polygon A legend is provided areaat Polygon Pnt Cplx z0 Displays the algebraic area at point zO of a circle or a polygon areaatraw Polygone Pnt Cplx z0 Arc sine sine x ASIN value Used in programming to state an assumption about a variable assume Expr Arc tan tan x ATAN value Draws the barycenter of the system consisting of point 1 with weight coefficient 1 point 2 with weight coefficient 2 point 3 with weight coefficient 3 etc barycenter Pntl1 Coeffl1 Pnt2 Coeff2 Pnt3 Coef 3 Returns the basis of the linear subspace defined by the set of vectors consisting of vector 1 vector 2 and vector n basis Lst vectorl vectorn Used in programming to begin a set of statements that should be taken as a single statement Draws the bisector of the angle AB AC bisector Pnt A Cp1x Pnt C or Cplx Pnt B or or Cplx Used with display to specify the color of the geometrical object to be displayed Used with display to specify the color of the geometrical object to be displayed What does this one do Used in programming to interrupt a loop 341 breakpoint canonical_form cat center cFactor charpoly chrem circle circumcircle col colDim 342 Used
162. ISQUARE CDF n k Example CHISQUARE CDE 276 1 returns 0 952641075609 Cumulative Fisher distribution function Returns the lower tail probability of the Fisher probability density function for the value x given numerator n and denominator d degrees of freedom FISHER CDF n d x Example 295 Binomial Poisson Inverse Normal T 2 Xx 296 FISHER CDF 5 5 2 returns 0 76748868087 Cumulative binomial distribution function Returns the probability of k or fewer successes out of n trials with a probability of success p for each trial Note that n and k are integers withk lt n BINOMIAL CDF n p k Example Suppose you want to know the probability that during 20 tosses of a fair coin you will get either O 1 2 3 4 5 or 6 heads BINOMIAL CDF 20 0 5 6 returns 0 05765914517 Cumulative Poisson distribution function Returns the probability x or fewer occurrences of an event in a given time interval given pu expected occurrences POISSON CDF Ul x Example POISSON CDF 4 2 returns 0 238103305554 Inverse cumulative normal distribution function Returns the cumulative normal distribution value associated with the lower tail probability p given the mean u and standard deviation o of a normal distribution If only one argument is supplied it is taken as p and the assumption is that u 0 and o NORMAL ICDF p o p Example NORMAL ICDF 0 1 0 841344746069 returns 1 Inverse cumulative stude
163. L Library 480 line plot 149 Linear Explorer app variables summary 494 linear fit 159 Linear Solver app 211 Linear Solver app variables Numeric view 45 1 Results 457 summary 494 list deleting 336 displaying one element 337 editing 335 evaluating 337 functions 338 list variables 333 sending and receiving 338 381 storing one element 338 syntax 339 variables 333 logarithm 300 logarithmic fit 159 functions 300 loop commands 426 429 Index loop functions 317 lowercase characters 366 M mantissa 322 Math functions calculus 306 complex number 307 distribution 308 312 hyperbolic trig 312 list 317 logical operators 324 loop 317 Math menu summary 497 on keyboard 299 polynomial 318 probability 319 real number 320 test 324 trigonometry 324 math functions menu 25 math operations 3 1 enclosing arguments 33 in scientific notation 22 negative numbers in 33 math templates 2 1 matrices adding rows 347 addition and subtraction 350 arithmetic operations in 350 column norm 355 commands 429 43 1 condition number 355 create identity 359 deleting 346 deleting columns 347 deleting rows 347 determinant 355 displaying 349 displaying matrix elements 349 dividing by a square matrix Index 352 dot product 355 functions 354 359 inverting 352 matrix calculations 345 multiplying and dividing by scalar 351 multiplying by vector 351 negating elements 353 raised to a power 352 sending or re
164. NK matrix Performs one step of the Gauss Jordan reduction method on an nx m matrix A using the element A nl nc O lt nl lt n and O lt nc lt m as pivot and returns an equivalent matrix with zeros in all elements in column nc except that in row nl Divot MECCA ntgin Intg e Finds the trace of a square matrix The trace is equal to the sum of the diagonal elements It is also equal to the sum of the eigenvalues TRACE matrix Displays the eigenvalues in vector form for matrix E IGENVAL matrix Eigenvectors and eigenvalues for a square matrix Displays a list of two arrays The first contains the eigenvectors and the second contains the eigenvalues EIGENVV matrix Returns the list made by the matrix of passage and the Jordan form of a matrix jordan Mtrx Returns either the diagonal matrix with diagonal or the diagonal of A diag Lst 1 Mtrx A Matrices Cholesky Hermite Hessenberg Smith Factorize LQ LSQ LU QR Matrices For a numerical symmetric matrix A returns L matrix such that A L tran L cholesky Mtrx Hermite normal form of a matrix with coefficients in Z returns U B such that U is invertible in Z B is upper triangular and B U A ithermite Mtrx A Matrix reduction to Hessenberg form Returns P B such that B inv P A P hessenberg Mtrx A Smith normal form of a matrix with coefficients in Z returns U B V such that U and V invertible i
165. Odel ccccc ce eeeeccceeeseeeceeeseeeeeseesenes 206 COM PUIG SIGN Sics aarne a Wi coetadanten niin duct etecs 208 Plotting statistical Aata 5 2iics hod dlnnkivmnatendod maacdiedicdnthaateralaasons 210 Plot view MENU ItEMS ccccccceeeccccesseeeceeeeseeeeeseesaeeeees 211 Contents 3 PIO COD 211 Predicting VOLES isser AE T 212 Troubleshooting a plot cccccccccseccccccsseeeccceeaeeeeeeeeseaeeeees 213 11 Inference app Getting started with the Inference App cccccsseeeeceesseeeeeeees 215 Importing statistics ccc rasia sar cwtiowa dha dscns ueenigudt oak niasahceataewnbaciaees 219 Hypothesis tesi rset T dads 221 One Sample Z Tesherrnro reanna n E E a 222 Two Sample Z Test oiec a O 223 One Proportion Z 165i soaeiucisdaduagutes gududateeeaseaniaaaetenels 224 TI WO PPODOMION 241 GSi ac rciaccsiastacrecinnacanss ON 225 One Sample T Test icv saiaguetienadaevadsens ddcechevscaade cave aaceaseasaows 227 TWO Sample 1 Stic catia Sancho Gade da aeatedinaadaaadaedades 228 C ntidenc intervals enia asus aE A a 229 One Sample Z Interval cccccccseecccceseeececeesseeseceesaeesees 229 Two Sample Z IntSrvallisc ar ces screech se cectnsenedscarnnaseacnoanes punecess 230 One Proportion Z Interval cccccccceeseeecceesseeeeccessaeeeees 231 Two Proportion Z Interval cccccccceseseccceesseeeeeeeseeeeeeeeas 232 One Sample T Interval cccccccecsecccceeeseeeceeseeeeeeeeaeeees 232 Two Sample Int
166. S cccccsseeecceeseeeeeeeeueees 96 Adding a note to an Gppsi c siaaenanedaa aie eeetecs 96 CTS OTIAG CN OP Dren N teats 97 App functions and vatiables 2 cacac dteccviejorehiceatadedds cxcdena teen 99 Function app Getting started with the Function App cccccseeecceeeeeeeeeeeees 103 Analyzing UN CHONS 2 xy tac a T 109 The Function VOniGbleSicvic2c cncsccacacceeoursmmanestaccansiidesanes 114 Summary of FCN operations cccccccceeseeceeeceeeeeceesseeeeeeeas 116 Advanced Graphing app Getting started with the Advanced Graphing app 118 Geometry Getting started with the Geometry Opp cccsseeecceeeseeeeeeees 123 Contents Plot view in CET c 2ce 5 5 cecedioweiarcd atsouie enitieigaeeaniesibecabeenlad Gikelsalreiectcterse cei 129 Plor SEIU VIEW iain N 134 Symbolic view in ASIC scx ssi secodhansasascuesacesb mumetseneswalcasuce 136 Symbolic Setup VIEW sc ioscd5 cuties ietieda ala ee aaa 138 Numeric view in detail ccccccccsccccccesseeeeceesseeseeseeseeeeeeeeas 138 SEO MEIC OBc wii estonia tea teases eee ese hoes 14 Geometric transformations 5 555 ccaciaserin o civ suauisinnaderaasinnso deans eevee 148 Geometry functions and commands ccssscccceeseeseeseeeeeees 151 Symbolic view Cmds menu cccseeccccceeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeeens 152 Numeric view Cmds Menu ccccccccessescceesseseeseeaeeeeees 160 Other Geometry functions cccccseeccceeeeseccceesaeeeeeeeane
167. SPECAL ASES aira n a a a ut eesaaeienesaietaies 273 19 The Explorer apps linear Explorer Gpp rersenioensn n 275 Quadratic Explorer app xe cesivias cttataureutastdnsdsateentainteen 277 TigiExplorer appear SN 280 20 Functions and commands Keyboard TUNCIONS aiocsmaienarg o e a 285 Mathers x uence nanliediccd aI ETE E a 288 Nom DEn scat cinch erentetesiueuenesteantae accu aE e 288 E AEE E E O EE E E T E 289 TAG ON OME Veen A A 291 Hyper DOl asan Er S 292 Probabil asisten A eat dei dte i obs 292 WISI EE EEE I Aran N I E cama tp ant AEN E 297 MAGI iaae tien bemensenetenee 297 SPECA BRP EE nn ante eRe a eer Pe ney 297 CAS MENi A E OAE 298 AO O ea eh tent ne ere een ere reer cere eens 299 CONC ENEE E E E EA 299 SONE anr E T A 302 RS WIE aapna a E AE as ona eaten ea erneeenaae etait 304 MEGET weniten cuticular unc E ia tana ee eee 306 Polynom akerren a n a 307 PION PEA E I EVIE E E EA E 311 APP MENU eien E EO 312 FUNCHOM Gpp 1UNGH ONS mansi e iecceleang ealeneeianedaeaces 312 SONE GPP MUNG ONS eisratiaatianitnindsiebaisabattodlieueaameienareaica 313 Spreadsheet functions cccceeeccccceseeeeceesseeeeceeeaeeeeeeeeas 314 Statistics 1 Var app functions ccceccccceeeeeecceeeseeeeeeeeaes 330 Statistics 2Var app functions cc cceecccceeeeeeeceeeseeeeeeeeees 331 Inference app functions ceeccccceseeeceeeeseeeeeeeeseeeeeeeeas 332 Finance app functions sical odidia dicated anlad ol luadialan dieses 333 Contents 5
168. Sets the graphing method to adaptive Not in either _fixed step segments or fixed step dots statistics app Explained below Graphing methods The HP Prime gives you the option of choosing one of three graphing methods The methods are described below with each applied to the function f x 9 sin e e adaptive this gives very accurate results and is used by default With this method active some complex functions may take a while to plot In these cases appears on the menu bar enabling you to stop the plotting process if you wish e fixed step segments this method samples x values computes their corresponding y values and then plots and connects the points e fixed step dots this works like fixed step segments method but does not connect the points Restore default settings i l i Malt aaa E100 757323886327 MENU F1Q0 7 573238686324 MENU Scope Advanced Graphing Function Parametric Polar Sequence Solve Statistics 1 Var Statistics 2Var Geometry To restore one field to its detault setting 1 Select the field An introduction to HP apps 89 2 Press 8 To restore all default settings press BS Common operations in Numeric view Zoom 90 Scope Advanced Graphing Function Parametric Polar Numeric view functionality that is common to many apps is described in detail in this section Functionality that is available
169. Setup view choose Cursor In a program type 0 gt CrossType for solid crosshairs default 1 gt CrossType to invert the crosshairs 2 gt CrossType for blinking crosshairs Turns the background dot grid in Plot view on or off In Plot Setup view check or uncheck GRID DOTS In a program type 0 gt GridDots to turn the grid dots on default 1 gt GridDots to turn the grid dots off Turns the background line grid in Plot View on or off In Plot Setup View check or uncheck GRID LINES In a program type 0 gt GridLines to turn the grid lines on default 1 gt GridLines to turn the grid lines off Defines the minimum and maximum values for histogram bars In Plot Setup View for one variable statistics set values for HRNG In a program type 493 Hwidth Statistics 1 Var Labels Method Nmin Nmax Sequence Recenter 494 n gt Hmin n gt Hmax wheren lt n Sets the width of histogram bars In Plot Setup View for one variable statistics set a value for Hwidth In a program type n gt Hwidth Draws labels in Plot View showing X and Y ranges In Plot Setup View check or uncheck Labels In a program type 1 gt Labels to turn labels on default 0 gt Labels to turn labels off Defines the graphing method adaptive fixed step segments or fixed step dots See Graphing methods on page 89 for an explanation of the difference between these
170. SideC AngleA AngleB Programming The following variables are used by the Triangle Solver app They correspond to the fields in the app s Numeric view The length of Side A Sets the length of the side opposite the angle A From the Triangle Solver Numeric view enter a positive value for A In a program type n SideA where n gt 0 The length of Side B Sets the length of the side opposite the angle B From the Triangle Solver Numeric view enter a positive value for B In a program type n SideB where n gt 0 The length of Side C Sets the length of the side opposite the angle C From the Triangle Solver Numeric view enter a positive value for C In a program type n amp Sidec where n gt 0 The measure of angle a Sets the measure of angle a The value of this variable will be interpreted according to the angle mode setting Degrees or Radians From the Triangle Solver Numeric view enter a positive value for angle a In a program type nbAngleA where n gt 0 The measure of angle B Sets the measure of angle The value of this variable will be interpreted according to the angle mode setting Degrees or Radians From the Triangle Solver Numeric view enter a positive value for angle 507 AngleC RECT Modes variables Ans HAngle HDigits 508 In a program type nbAngleB where n gt 0 The measure of angle 6 Sets the measure of angle 6 The value of this variabl
171. Spreadsheet Statistics 1 Var Statistics 2Var Triangle Solver Trig Explorer Plot Setup view Use the Polar view to Cont View a plot of the test results Explore linear equations and test your knowledge of them Not used Plot and explore the functions selected in Symbolic view Plot and explore the functions selected in Symbolic view Explore quadratic equations and test your knowledge of them Plot and explore the sequences selected in Symbolic view Plot and explore a single function selected in Symbolic view Not used Plot and explore the analyses selected in Symbolic view Plot and explore the analyses selected in Symbolic view Not used Explore sinusoidal equations and test your knowledge of them The table below outlines what is done in the Plot Setup view of each app App Advanced Graphing Finance An introduction to HP apps Use the Polar view to Modify the appearance of plots and the plot environment Not used 65 App Function Geometry Inference Linear Explorer Linear Solver Parametric Polar Quadratics Explorer Sequence Solve Spreadsheet Statistics 1 Var Statistics 2Var Triangle Solver Trig Explorer Use the Polar view to Cont Modify the appearance of plots and the plot environment Modify the appearance of the drawing environment Not used Not used Not used Modify the appearance of plots and the plot environm
172. The Exam Mode Configuration screen appears Select those functions you want disabled and make sure that those functions you don t want disabled are not selected When you have finished selecting the functions to be disabled tap 7 If you want to activate exam mode now continue with Activating Exam Mode below Activating Exam Mode 522 When you activate exam mode you prevent users of the calculator from accessing those features you have disabled The features become accessible again at the end of the specified time out period or on entry of the exam mode password whichever occurs sooner To activate exam mode Limiting functionality 1 tlf the Exam Mode a OER Contigration Defaut Bam Timeout 15 Minutes showing press Password E tap Erase memory top O Choose exam mode configuration a Warconieuration other than Default Exam is required choose it from the Configuration list 3 Select a time out period from the Timeout list Note that 8 hours is the maximum period If you are preparing to supervise a student examination make sure that the time out period chosen is greater than the duration of the examination 4 Enter a password of between 1 and 10 characters The password must be entered if you or another user wants to cancel exam mode before the time out period has elapsed 5 If you want to erase the memory of the calculator select Erase memory This will erase al
173. There are two user modes e Temporary user mode the next key press and only the next enters the object you have assigned to that key After entering that object the keyboard automatically returns to its detault operation To activate temporary user mode press User Notice that 1U appears in the title bar The 1 will remind you that the user keyboard will be active for just one key press e Persistent user mode each key press from now until you turn off user mode will enter whatever object you have assigned to a key 455 Re assigning keys Key names 456 To activate persistent user mode press GED Notice that tU appears in the title bar The user keyboard will now remain active until you press again If you are in user mode and press a key that hasn t been re assigned the key s standard operation is performed Suppose you want to Reassign SIN 12 21 d KEY K_Sin assign a commonly used seen RETURN ALOG function such as END ALOG to its own key on the keyboard Simply create a new program that mimics the syntax in the image at the righ GGT Cres The first line of the program specities the key to be reassigned using its internal name The names of all the keys are given in Key names on page 456 They are case sensitive On line 3 enter the text you want produced when the key being re assigned is pressed This text must be enclosed in quote marks The next time you w
174. Var Returns the inverse Laplace transform of an expression invlaplace Expr Var IlapVar With one argument returns the discrete Fourier transform in R FEE CVECL With three arguments returns the discrete Fourier transform in the field Z pZ with a as primitive nth root of 1 n size L fft Vect L Intg a Intg p Returns the inverse discrete Fourier transform ifft Vect Returns the solutions to a polynomial equation or a set of polynomial equations solve Expr Var Functions and commands Zeros Complex Solve Complex Zeros Numerical Solve Differential Equation ODE Solve Linear System With an expression as argument returns the zeros real or complex according to the mode of the expression With a list of expressions as argument returns the matrix where the lines are the solutions of the system i e expression 1 0 expression 2 0 zeros Expr Var or zeros LstExpr LStVar Returns a list where the elements are complex solutions of the system of polynomial equations csolve LstEg LstVar With an expression as argument returns the complex zeros of the expression With a list of expressions as argument returns the matrix where the lines are the solutions of the system i e expression 0 expression2 0 Czeros Expr Var or Czeros LstExpr LStVar Returns the numerical solution of an equation or a system of equations With the optional
175. We will now find the slope of the quadratic function at the intersection point Tap to re display the menu tap and select Slope The slope that is the gradient of the function at the intersection point is displayed at the bottom of the screen Slope undefined You can press 4 or to trace along the curve and see the slope at other points You can also press or to jump to another function and see the slope at points on it to re display the Plot menu We ll now find the area between the two functions in the range 1 3 lt x lt 2 3 Tap and select Signed area value for x Tap and press 1 _2 J3 Ee From 1 3 Function app To find the extremum of the quadratic Function app 4 Select the other function as the boundary for the integral It F1 X is Below F1 X above F20 X 1 3 the currently selected function you would choose F2 X here and vice versa 5 Specify the end value for x Tap and press 2 _2 J3 e The cursor jumps to x 2 3 and the area between the two functions is shaded EZI 0 23 6 To display the numerical value of the integral tap OK fo return to the Plot menu Shortcut When the eee Goto option is available you can display the Go To screen simply by typing a number The number you type appears on the entry line Just tap to accept if 1 To calculate the coordinates of the extremum of the q
176. Xm std e Input list is the list of input see Input Parameters below This can be a range reference a list of cell references or a simple list of values e Input Parameters SuccCount I SuccCount2 SampSize l SampSize2 ContLevel Example XXXXX The ConfT 1 mean calculates the confidence interval for a one sample T test Syntax ConfTlimean ouput configuration input list ConfTlmean ouput configuration SampMean SampStdDev SampSize ConfLevel Functions and commands ConfT2mean Functions and commands e Output is a reference to where you would like the output to be placed Note if a range is specified it will limit the size of the output but can also change the orientation from vertical to horizontal if the range is wider than it is tall e Configuration is a string that controls what results are shown and what order they appear in An empty string will default to show all in default order including headers h if present the header cells will be created DF T ZX zXh std e Input list is the list of input see Input Parameters below This can be a range reference a list of cell references or a simple list of values e Input Parameters SampMean SampStdDevy SampSize ConfLevel Example XXXXX The Conff2mean calculates the confidence interval for a two sample T test Syntax ConfT2mean ouput configuration input list ConfT2mean ouput configuration Sam
177. You are prompted to make a choice Moves the cursor to the first row last row first column or last column respectively 413 To create a matrix in the Matrix Editor Matrices in Home view 414 Open the Matrix Catalog Matrix If you want to create a vector press or until the matrix you want to use is highlighted tap EES and then press __ te _ Continue from step 4 below If you want to create a matrix either tap on the name of the matrix MO M9 or press or until the matrix you want to use is highlighted and then press Note that an empty matrix will be shown with a size of 1 1 beside its name For each element in the matrix type a number or an expression and then tap or press Fer You can enter complex numbers in complex form that is a b where a is the real part and b is the imaginary part You can also enter them in the form atbi By default on entering an element the cursor moves to the next column in the same row You can use the cursor keys to move to a different row or column You can also change the direction the cursor automatically moves by tapping QB The button toggles between the following options EJB the cursor moves to the cell below the current cell when you press __fter_ EBB the cursor moves to the cell to the right of the current cell when you press _ Fer E the cursor stays in the current cell when you press
178. You can also choose whether the table of data in Numeric view is automatically populated or whether it is populated by you typing in the particular x values you are interested in These options Automatic or BuildYourOwn are available from the Num Type list They are explained in detail in Custom tables on page 93 Press E3 Clear to reset all the settings to their defaults Make the Numeric view settings match the axes range in Plot view Tap For example if you have zoomed in on the plot in Plot view Function Num Setup Num Step 0 1 Num Zoom 4 Num Type Automatic Enter table start value so that the visible x range is now 4 to 4 this option will set NUMSTART to 4 Re display Numeric view Num amp 4Setup Using the cursor keys scroll through the values in the independent column column x Note that the values in the F1 and F2 columns match what you would get if you Big Defn Width 2 1749061E1 2 1499387E1 2 1250979E1 2 1003837E1 2 0757961E1 2 0513350E1 i 2 0270005E1 EAEI 4 79874214 2 0027926E1 3 773585 4 77358491 1 9787113 1 3 748428 4 74842767 1 9547565E 1 3 798742138366 _ Zoom Big Defn Width substituted the values in the X column for x in the Function app expressions selected in Symbolic view 1 x and x 1 3 You can also scroll through the columns of the dependant variables labeled F1 and F2 in the
179. _rectangle middle_point simpson rombergt rombergm Geometry coordinates distance distance2 distanceat distanceatraw equation extract_measure ordinate Geometry area Polygon or area Expr x a b n Method Returns the list resp matrix of the abscissa and of the ordinate of a point or a vector resp of points or vectors coordinates Pnt or Cplx or Vect Calculates the distance between 2 points or a point and a curve distance Pie or Cols Pnt or Colx or Curve Calculates the square of the distance between 2 points or a point and a curve distance Pit or Cplx Pnt or Cplix or Curve distanceat A B zO displays at point zO with a legend the distance between 2 geometrical objects distanceat GeoOb A GeoOb B Pnt or Cplx distanceatraw A B zO displays at the point zO the distance between 2 geometrical objects distanceatraw GeoObj A GeoOb j B Pnt or Cplx zQ0 equation returns the cartesian equation of a curve equation GeoObj VectParam extract_measure gives as answer the value calculated by the argument extract measure Var Returns the ordinate of a point or a vector 161 parameq perimeter radius Test is_collinear is_concyclic is_conjugate is_coplanar is_element 162 ordinate Pnt or Vect parameq C returns the complex number parametric equation of the curve C parameg GeoObj Perimeter of a polygon e
180. a potential topic for a customized app To see how to create the Fibonacci series once inside the Sequence app or an app based on the Sequence app see chapter 16 Sequence app beginning on page 257 As well as cloning a built in app as described above you can modify the internal workings of a customized app using the HP Prime programming language See Customizing an app on page 460 App functions and variables Functions App functions are used in HP apps to perform common calculations For example in the Function app the Plot view Fen menu has a function called SLOPE that calculates the slope of a given function at a given point The SLOPE function can also be used from the Home view or a program For example suppose you want to find the derivative of x 5 at x 2 One way using an app function is as follows 1 Press 2 Tap and select Function gt SLOPE SLOPE appears on the entry line ready for you to specify the function and the x value 3 Enter the function Pa ae aes 4 Enter the parameter Function ere separator x Eval O 5 Enter the x value and press The slope that is the a derivative at x 2 is re a E a a calculated 4 All the app functions are described in App menu beginning on page 312 An introduction to HP apps 99 Variables Qualifying variables 100 All apps have variables that is placeholders for various values that are un
181. a unit object into a unit object written with the compatible MKSA base unit mksa Unit Uses the modular algorithm to return the greatest common divisor of two polynomials modgcd Poly Poly Multiplies the row n1 of the matrix A by an expression mRow Expr Mtrx A Intg n1 If the given complex expression has a complex denominator returns the expression after both the numerator and the denominator have been multiplied by the complex conjugate of the denominator If the given complex expression does not have a complex denominator returns the expression after both the numerator and the denominator have been multiplied by the complex conjugate of the numerator mult c conjugate Expr Takes an expression in which the numerator or the denominator contains a square root If the denominator contains a square root returns the expression after both the numerator and the denominator have been multiplied by the complex conjugate of the denominator If the denominator does not contain a square root returns the expression after both the numerator and the denominator have been multiplied by the complex conjugate of the numerator mult conjugate Expr Returns an approximate value of the derivative of an expression at a given point using f x f x h t x h 2 h Functions and commands NEG normal normalize NOT NTHROOT octahedron odd open_polygon OR order_size orthocenter orthogonal Function
182. accept complex numbers as arguments Enter the keys and inputs shown below and press to evaluate the expression E In the examples below shifted functions are represented by the actual keys to be pressed with the function name shown in parentheses For example USIN ASIN means that to make an arc sine calculation ASIN you press ea 3 The examples below show the results you would get in Home view If you are in the CAS the results are given in simplified symbolic format For example 320 returns 17 88854382 in Home view and 8 V5 in the CAS Add subtract multiply divide Also accepts complex numbers lists and matrices valuel value2 etc Natural logarithm Also accepts complex numbers value Example AN 1 returns 0 Natural exponential Also accepts complex numbers value Example ema LN 5 returns 148 413159103 285 LOG 1o K 10 SN cos TAN ASIN G ACOS Hj ATAN LANJ ASIN ACOS ATAN 286 Common logarithm Also accepts complex numbers 49S value Example 100 returns 2 Common exponential antilogarithm Also accepts complex numbers value Example 3 returns 1000 Sine cosine tangent Inputs and outputs depend on the current angle format degrees or radians SIN value COS value TAN value Example TAN 45 returns 1 degrees mode Arc sine sin x Output range is from 90 to 90 or 7 2 to x 2 Inputs and o
183. add a note to an app Unlike general notes those created via the Note Catalog see chapter 25 an app note is not listed in the Note Catalog It can only be accessed when the app is open An app note remains with the app if the app is sent to another calculator To add a note to an app 1 Open the app 96 An introduction to HP apps 2 Press Info If a note has already been created for this app its contents are displayed 3 Tap and start writing or editing your note The format and bullet options available are the same as those in the Note Editor described in The Note Editor on page 430 4 To exit the note screen press any key Your note is automatically saved Creating an app The apps that come with the HP Prime are built in and cannot be deleted They are always available simply by pressing Gag However you can create any number of customized instances of most apps You can also create an instance of an app that is based on a previously customized app Customized apps are opened from the application library in the same way that you open a built in app The advantage of creating a customized instance of an app is that you can continue to use the built in app for some other problem and return to the customized app at any time with all its data still in place For example you could create a customized version of the Sequence app that enables you to generate and explore the Fibonacci series You could c
184. adsheet app pinching will change the width of a column or the height of a row The numbers in the legend below refer to the parts of the keyboard described in the illustration below the legend Number Feature 1 LCD and touch screen 320 x 240 pixels 2 Context sensitive touch button menu 3 HP Apps keys 4 Home view and preference settings 5 Common math and science functions 6 Alpha and Shift keys 7 On Cancel and Off key 8 List matrix program and note catalogs 9 Last Answer key Ans 10 Enter key _ _ Backspace and Delete key Number Feature 12 13 14 15 16 17 Menu and Paste key CAS and CAS preferences key View and Copy key Escape and Clear key Help key Rocker wheel for cursor movement Help Ca View BV SAT EAL SUL re i i Iaer ETA TA TS mia Program Y 1i i Getting started Context sensitive menu A context sensitive menu occupies the bottom line of the screen The options available depend on the context that is the view you are in Note that the menu items are activated by touch There are two types of buttons on the context sensitive menu e menu button tap to display a pop up menu These buttons have square corners along their top such as in the illustration above e command button tap to initiate a command These buttons have rounded corners such as in the illustration above Entry and edit keys The prim
185. am Catalog 2 Tap the program to open it 3 Press Clear 4 At the prompt tap to delete the contents or to cancel The text of the program is deleted but the program name remains You can send programs between calculators just as you can send apps notes matrices and lists See Sharing data on page 40 The HP Prime programming language Variables and visibility 450 Variables in an HP Prime program can be used to store numbers lists matrices graphics objects and strings The name of a variable must be a sequence of alphanumeric characters letters and numbers starting with a letter Names are case sensitive so the variables named MaxTemp and maxTemp are different The HP Prime has built in variables of various types visible globally that is visible wherever you are in the calculator For example the built in variables A to Z can be used to store real numbers ZO to Z9 can be used to store complex numbers MO to M9 can be used to store Matrices and vectors and so on These names are Programming Programming reserved You cannot use them for other data For example you cannot name a program M1 or store a real number in a variable named Z8 In addition to these reserved variables each HP app has its own reserved variables Some examples are Root Xmin and Numstart Again these names cannot be used to name a program A full list of system and app variables is given in chapter 21 Variables
186. and x2 y2 G can be any of the graphics variables and is optional The default is GO c can be 0 to 3 0 black 1 dark gray 2 light gray 3 white c is optional The default is black Syntax PIXOFF G xposition yposition PIXOFF_ P G xposition yposition Sets the color of the pixel G with coordinates x y to white G can be any of the graphics variables and is optional The default is GO the current graphic Programming Programming PIXON P PIXON RECT_P RECT Syntax PIXON G xposition yposition color PIXON P G xposition yposition color Sets the color of the pixel G with coordinates x y to color G can be any of the graphics variables and is optional The default is GO the current graphic Color can be 0 to 3 0 black 1 dark gray 2 light gray 3 white and is optional The default is 0 Syntax RECT G x yl x2 y2 edgecolor fillcolor RECT P G xl yl x2 y2 edgecolor fillcolor Draws a rectangle on G between points x 1 y and x2 y2 using edgecolor for the perimeter and fillcolor for the inside G can be any of the graphics variables and is optional The default is GO the current graphic xl yl are optional The default values represent the top left of the graphic x2 y2 are optional The default values represent the bottom right of the graphic edgecolor and fillcolor can be 1 to 3 1 transparent 0 black 1 dark gray 2 light gray 3 white
187. and make sure that and not is showing in the menu If not tap the button This option means that your cursor automatically selects the cell immediately below the one you have just entered content into 10 Add some values in the PRICE column and note the result in the COMMIS column If the results do not look right you can tap the COMMIS heading tap Edit i GTB and fix the Format GoTo select Gol formula 172 Spreadsheet Spreadsheet T 12 13 14 15 16 17 18 19 To delete the dummy values select cell a1 tap EES press until all the dummy values are selected and then press Select cell C1 Enter a label for your takings nm A 9 JTAKINGSL_ fe Notice that text strings but not names need to be enclosed within quotation marks Select cell D1 Enter a formula to add up your takings t SUM PRICE You could have specified a range such as A1 A100 but by specifying the name of the column you can be sure that the sum will include all the entries in the column Select cell c3 Enter a label for your total commission ema ELL TOTAL COMMIS e Note that the column is not wide enough for you to see the entire label in c3 We need to widen column C Select the heading cell for column C tap and select Column lt An input form appears for you to specify the required width of the column Enter 100 and tap Qa You may have to experi
188. ant to insert ALOG at the position of your cursor you just press Ey You can enter any string you like in the RETURN line of your program For example if you enter M4 matrix M4 will be returned when you press the re assigned key You can even get the program to return user defined functions as well as system functions and user defined variables as well as system variables You can also re assign a shifted key combination So for example AS ET could be re assigned to produce SLOPE F1 X 3 rather than the lowercase t Then if AGS i is entered in Home view and pressed the gradient at X 3 of whatever function is currently defined as F1 X in the Function app would be returned The first line of a program that re assigns a key must specify the key to be reassigned using its internal name Programming The table below gives the internal name for each key Note that key names are case sensitive Internal name of keys and key states Key Name key key key gee KO KS_O KA_O KSA_O poled K_1 KS_1 KA_1 KSA_1 K 2 KS_2 KA_2 KSA_2 ar K_3 KS_3 KA_2 KSA_2 E K4 KS_4 KA_4 KSA_4 K 5 KS_5 KA 5 KSA_5 ea K KS_6 KA_6 KSA_6 a K7 KS_7 KA_7 KSA_7 K 8 KS_8 KA_8 KSA_8 K9 KS_9 KA 9 KSA_9 K_ Abc KS Abc KA_Abc KSA_Abc PA K_Al ha KS_Alpha KA_Alpha KSA_Alpha K_Apps KS_Apps KA_Apps KSA_Apps Py K_Bksp KS_Bksp KA _Bksp KSA_Bksp ee K Comma KS Comma KA Comma KSA_Comma 98 K_Cos KS_Cos KA_Cos KSA_Cos eax
189. apping GREE Category Real Complex List Matrix Graphics Settings Variables Available names A to Z and 0 For example 7 45 A ZO to Z9 For example 2 3xi Z1 or 2 3 Z1 depending on your Complex number settings LO to L For example 1 2 3 L1 MO to M9 Store matrices and vectors in these variables For example 1 2 3 4 M1 GO to G9 HAngle HFormat HDigits HComplex Date Time Language Entry Integer Base Bits Signed 377 App variables The app variables are accessed by pressin and Pp yp g tapping E They are grouped below by app You can find then grouped by view Symbolic Numeric Plot in Variables and Programs on page 492 Note that if you have customized a built in app your app will appear on the App variables menu under the name you gave it You access the variables in a customized app in the same way that you access the variables in built in apps Function app variables 378 Category Results Symbolic Plot Numeric Modes Names Area Extremum Isect Axes Cursor GridDots GridLines Labels Method Recenter Xmax NumStart NumStep Automatic NumIndep AAngle AComplex Xmin Xtick XZoom Ymax Yuan YtiCk Yzoom NumType NumZoom BuildYourOwn ADigits AFormat Variables a The Results variables contain the last value found by the Signed Area Extremum Intersection Root and Slope functions respecti
190. ar numbers for the independent variable that your specify build your own table the NUMTYPE field e set the zoom factor for zooming in or out on the table displayed in Numeric view the NUMZOOM field Modifying Numeric Setup Select the field you want to change and either specify a new value or if you are choosing a type of table for Numeric view automatic or build yourrown choose the appropriate option from the NUMTYPE menu An introduction to HP apps 95 To help you set a starting Function Num Setup number and increment that NUMSTART O O ooo matches the current Plot view N MAr A i PLOT NUMSTART 21 3947236223 tap NUMSTEP 0 11285155558 NUMSTEP 0 1 Enter table start value Restore default settings To restore one field to its default setting 1 Select the field 2 Press 8 To restore all default settings press E3 Combining Plot and Numeric Views You can display Plot view and Numeric view side by side Moving the tracing cursor causes the table of values in Numeric view to scroll You can also enter a value in the x column The table scrolls to that value and the tracing cursor jumps to the corresponding point on the selected plot Zoom To combine Plot and Numeric view in a split screen press and select Split Screen Plot Table To return to Plot view press aay To return to Numeric view by pressing Ei Adding a note to an app You can
191. ar Solver Statistics 1 Var Statistics 2Var and Inference apps offer functions that generate results that can be re used outside those apps such as in a program For example the Function app can find a root of a function and that root is written to a variable called Root That variable can then be used elsewhere 511 512 The results variables are listed with the apps that generate them See App variables on page 378 Programming 27 Integer arithmetic The common number base used in contemporary mathematics is base 10 By default all calculations performed by the HP Prime are carried out in base 10 and all results are displayed in base 10 However the HP Prime enables Function 11 42 you to carry out integer arithmetic in four bases decimal base 10 binary base 2 octal base 8 and hexadecimal base 16 For example you could multiply 4 in base 16 by 71 in base 8 and the answer is E4 in base 16 This is equivalent in base 10 to multiplying 4 by 57 to get 228 You indicate that you are about to engage in integer arithmetic by preceding the number with the pound symbol got by pressing J You indicate what base to use for the number by appending to the appropriate base marker 4h 710 E4h Base marker Base blank Adopt the detualt base see The default base on page 514 d decimal b binary O octal h hexadecimal Thus 11b represents 319 The base marker b indica
192. are Field name Definition Xj Sample 1 mean x Sample 2 mean ny Sample 1 size ns Sample 2 size 223 Field name Definition Continued Population 1 standard deviation Population 2 standard deviation Significance level Results The results are Result Description Test Z Z lest statistic Test A X Difference in the means associ ated with the test Z value P Probability associated with the Z lest statistic Critical Z Boundary value s of Z associ ated with the a level that you supplied Critical A x Difference in the means associ ated with the a level you sup plied One Proportion Z Test Menu name ZTest 1 x On the basis of statistics from a single sample this test measures the strength of the evidence for a selected hypothesis against the null hypothesis The null hypothesis is that the proportion of successes is an assumed value Ho tt To You select one of the following alternative hypotheses against which to test the null hypothesis Hz T lt TO Hz T gt Ty Hz RA Ty 224 Inference app Inputs The inputs are Field name X n To Ol Definition Number of successes in the sample Sample size Population proportion of successes Significance level Results The results are Result Description Test Z Test p P Critical Z Critical p Two Proportion Z Test Menu name ZTest n1 T2 Zlest statistic Proportion of successes in the sampl
193. are negative if you are making the payment and positive if you are receiving the payment 505 PPYR PV GSize Linear Solver app variables LSystem Size 506 Payments per year Sets the number of payments made per year for a cash flow calculation From the Numeric view of the Finance app enter a value for P YR In a program type nh PPYR where n gt 0 Present value Sets the present value of an investment From the Numeric view of the Finance app enter a value for PV In a program type n PV Note negative values represent an investment or loan Group size Sets the size of each group for the amortization table From the Numeric view of the Finance app enter a value for Group Size In a program type nyeGSize The following variables are used by the Linear Solver app They correspond to the fields in the app s Numeric view Contains a 2x3 or 3x4 matrix which represents a 2x2 or 3x3 linear system From the Numeric view of the Linear Solver app enter the coefficients and constants of the linear system In a program type matrix LSystem where matrix is either a matrix or the name of one of the matrix variables MO M9 Contains the size of the linear system From the Numeric view of the Linear Solver app press eE or EE In a program type 2 gt Size tor a 2x2 linear system 3 gt Size tor a 3x3 linear system Programming Triangle Solver app variables SideA SideB
194. ars for you to enter the number of decimal places For example 123 456789 becomes 123 46 in Fixed 2 format Scientific Displays results with an exponent one digit to the left of the decimal point and the specitied number of decimal places For example 123 456789 becomes 1 28E2 IN SELENEIL LG 2 format Engineering Displays results with an exponent that is a multiple of 3 and the specitied number of signiticant digits beyond the first one Example 123 456E7 becomes 1 23E9 in Engineer ing 2 format Getting started Setting Entry Integers Complex Language Decimal Mark Getting started Options Continued Textbook An expression is entered in much the same way as if you were writing it on paper with some arguments above or below or others In other words your entry could be two dimensional Algebraic An expression is entered on a single line Your entry is always one dimensional RPN Reverse Polish Notation The arguments of the expression are entered first followed by the operator The entry of an operator automatically evaluates what has already been entered Sets the default base for integer arithmetic binary octal decimal or hex You can also set the number of bits per integer and whether inte gers are to be signed Choose one of two formats for displaying complex numbers a b or atb i Choose the language you want for menus input forms and the online help Dot or Co
195. arts the Matrix Editor and displays the specified matrix If used in programming returns to the program when user presses a Even though this command returns the matrix that was edited EDITMAT cannot be used as an argument in other matrix commands Syntax REDIM name size Redimensions the specified matrix name or vector to size For a matrix size is a list of two integers n1 n2 For a vector size is a list containing one integer n Existing values in the matrix are preserved Fill values will be O Syntax REPLACE name start object Replaces portion of a matrix or vector stored in name with an object starting at position start Start for a matrix is a list containing two numbers for a vector it is a single number REPLACE also works with lists graphics and strings For example REPLACE 123456 2 GRM gt 1GRM56 Syntax SCALE name value rownumber Multiplies the specified row_number of the specified matrix by value Syntax SCALEADD name value row I row2 Multiplies the specified row of the matrix name by value then adds this result to the second specified row2 of the matrix name Syntax SUB name start end Extracts a sub object a portion of a list matrix or graphic and stores it in name Start and end are each specified using a list with two numbers for a matrix a number for vector or lists or an ordered pair X Y for graphics SUB M1 1 2 2 2 Syntax SWAPCOL name
196. ary entry and edit keys are Keys Purpose a a hee Enter numbers or Gs Cancels the current operation or clears the entry line Enters an input or executes an operation In calculations is present as a menu key acts the same as pressing Getting started 17 Keys t _ XI M v5 ll Units C xton Define D bX Clear Purpose Continued For entering a negative number For example to enter 25 press 25 Note this is not the same operation that is performed by the subtraction key lb Math template Displays a palette of pre formatted templates repre senting common arithmetic expres sions Enters the independent variable that is either X T 8 or N depend ing on the app that is current Relations palette Displays a palette of comparison operators and Bool ean operators Special symbols palette Displays a palette of common math and Greek characters Automatically inserts the degree minute or second symbol accord ing to the context Backspace Deletes the character to the left of the cursor It will also return the highlighted field to its default value if it has one Delete Deletes the character to the right of the cursor Clears all data on the screen including the history On a set tings screen for example Plot Setup returns all settings to their default values Getting started Shift keys Getting started Keys QOWO
197. ase 16 Octal base 8 If checked any real number equiv alent to an integer in a non CAS environment will be converted to an integer in the CAS Real num bers not equivalent to integers are treated as real numbers in CAS whether or not this option is selected If checked the calculator is in exact mode and solutions will be symbolic If not checked the calcu lator is in approximate mode and solutions will be approximate For example 26 7 5 yields 2 in exact mode and 5 2 in approxi mate mode Select this to allow complex results in variables It checked second order polyno mials are factorized in complex mode or in real mode if the dis criminant is positive Computer algebra system CAS Setting Use i Principal Increasing Page 2 Purpose Cont If checked the calculator is in complex mode and complex solu tions will be displayed when they exist If not checked the calculator is in real mode and only real solu tions will be displayed For exam ple factors x 1 yields 1 x 1 x i x i x in com plex mode and 1 x 1 x 1 x in real mode If checked the principal solutions to trigonometric functions will be displayed If not checked the gen eral solutions to trigonometric func tions will be displayed If checked polynomials will be displayed with increasing powers for example 4 x 3x x If not checked polynomials will be dis played with decreasing
198. ates Pnt or Colx or LstRectCoord Returns the point with polar coordinates r and t polar point Real r Real t Returns the point for which the line is polar with respect to the circle pole Crcle Line Returns the coefficients of a polynomial with roots given in the vector argument polyCoef Vect Evaluates a polynomial given by its coefficients at xO polyEval Vect Real x0 Draws the polygon whose vertices are elements in a list polygon LsStPnt bstCplx Draws the polygons made by joining the points xk yk where xk element row k column O and yk element row k column j for fixed and for k 0 nrows polygonplot Mtrx Draws the points xk yk and the polygons made by joining the points xk yk where xk element row k column O and yk element row k column j for fixed and for k 0 nrows polygonscatterplot Mtrx Draws a convex polyhedron whose vertices are the points in the sequence polyhedron SegPnt A B C Functions and commands polynomial_regre ssion POLYROOT potential power_reg ression powerpc prepend primpart prism product Functions and commands Returns the coefficients an a1 aQ of y an x n a1x a0 where y is the nth order polynomial which best approximates the points whose coordinates are the elements in two lists or the rows of a matrix polynomial regression lst Mtrx A Lst Intg n Returns the zeros of the polynomial given a
199. ations and expressions in Symbolic view and select those you want to solve together as a system For example suppose you want to solve the system of equations consisting of X24 Y2 16 and a a Open the 1 Open the Solve app Solve app Select Solve 2 If you have no need for any equations or expressions already defined press Clear Tap intention to clear the app to confirm your Define the 3 Define the equations Solve Symbolic View I equations EAER VEEL X Y 16 q ai X p5 L na Eny go L vi E2 X Y 1 HE3 h l e HE4 MES A x yen E Cmts mis BES Enter function Make sure that both EDIL CHK sss SHOW EVAL equations are selected as we are looking for values of X and Y that satisty both equations Enter a seed 4 Display Numeric view value Klum ii L Setup Solve Namere view sere Unlike the example above in this example we have no values for any variable You can either enter a seed value for one of the Enter value or press SOLVE DEFN SOLVE variables or let the calculator provide a solution Typically a seed value is a value that directs the calculator to provide if possible a solution that is closest to it rather than some other value In this example let s look for a solution in the vicinity of X 2 Solve app 239 Solve the unknown variables Limitations 5 Enter the seed value in the X field The ca
200. ault menu presentation mode is to provide the descriptive names for the CAS functions If you prefer the functions to be presented by their command name deselect the Menu Display option on the second page of the Home Settings screen see Home settings on page 27 When your are working in CAS you can retrieve an expres sion or result from Home view by tapping and selecting Get from Home Home view opens Press or until the item you want to retrieve is highlighted and press __Fte _ Computer algebra system CAS To use a Home variable in CAS The highlighted item is copied to the cursor point in CAS You can access Home variables from within the CAS Home variables are assigned uppercase letters CAS variables are assigned lowercase letters Thus SIN x and SIN X will yield different results To use a Home variable in the CAS simply include its name in a calculation For example suppose in Home view you have assigned variable Q to 100 Suppose too that you have assigned variable g to 1000 in the CAS If you are in the CAS and enter 5 q the result is 5000 If had entered 5 Q instead the result would be 500 In a similar way CAS variables can be used in calculations in Home view Thus you can enter 5 q in Home view and get 500 even though q is a CAS variable Computer algebra system CAS 57 58 Computer algebra system CAS An introduction to HP apps Much of the functionality of the HP Prime is
201. ave more than one function plotted you may need to choose the function of interest beforehand The Function menu is a sub menu of the Plot view menu First display the Plot view menu Plot Menu Suppose you want to find the root of the quadratic equation defined earlier Since a quadratic equation can have more than one root you will need to move the cursor closer to the root you are interested in than to any other root In this example you will find the root of the quadratic close to where x 3 1 If it is not already selected select the quadratic equation Wry 2 Press or 4 to move the cursor near to where x 3 3 Tap and select Root _Zoom Traces The root is displayed at the bottom of the screen If you now move the trace cursor close to x the other place where the quadratic crosses the xaxis and selected Root gain the other toot is displayed Root 2 73205080757 Function app Note the button If you tap this one or two dotted lines pick out the point of interest in this case a root If while this button is active you tap Zoom Lace henu elsewhere on the screen a set of dotted lines appears on the screen The dotted lines intersect the currently selected plot closest to the point you tapped Their point of intersection is a tracing cursor If you make another calculation where there is more than one answer the answer that applies to the point closest to this t
202. ay Home view press Ea CAS view is the where you use the computer algebra system CAS view enables you to perform symbolic calculations It is largely identical to Home view it even has its own history of past calculations but the CAS view offers some additional functions To display CAS view press K The calculator is provided with a slide cover to protect the display and keyboard Remove the cover by grasping both sides of it and pulling down You can reverse the slide cover and slide it onto the back of the calculator This will ensure that you do not misplace the cover while you are using the calculator To prolong the life of the calculator always place the cover over the display and keyboard when you are not using the calculator To adjust the contrast of the display press and hold 2 J then press the or key to increase or decrease the contrast The contrast will change with each press of the lt J or bu key e Press or to clear the entry line e Press Clear to clear the entry line and the history Sections of the display Title bar Function History Set 3 96332729761 Tl TA lt n N 3 1 73205080758 Entry line Menu buttons f Home view has four sections shown above The title bar shows either the screen name or the name of the app you are currently using Function in the example above It also shows the time a battery power indicator and a number of symbols that indicate
203. bar 1 cx2 Critical xbar 2 std Standard deviation e Input list is the list of input see Input Parameters below This can be a range reference a list of cell references or a simple list of values e Input Parameters SampMean SampSize NullPopMean PopStdDev SigLevel Mode Specifies how to calculate the statistic 1 Less than 2 Greater than 3 Not Equal Example XXXXX The hypothesis test HypZ2mean is a two sample Ztest for comparing means Syntax HypZ2mean ouput configuration input Last HypZ2mean ouput configuration SampMean SampMean2 SampSize SampSize2 PopStdDev PopStdDev2 SighLevel Mode e Output is a reference to where you would like the output to be placed Note if a range is specified it will limit the size of the output but can also change the orientation from vertical to horizontal if the range is wider than it is tall e Configuration is a string that controls what results are shown and what order they appear in An empty string 319 HypZ1 prop 320 will default to show all in default order including headers h if present the header cells will be created acc Accept Reject tZ Test Z tM Test Mean prob Probability cZ Critical Z cxl Critical xbar 1 cx2 Critical xbar 2 std Standard deviation e Input list is the list of input see Input Parameters below This can be a range reference a list of cell references or a simple list of values
204. bles can hold different values 375 376 Tip If you attempt to retrieve Statistics 1Var aii a variable that is used in more than one app by entering just its name in Home view you will get the value that was last Statistics 2Var 5X 232 calculated for that a ae variable This might not be the value that you want To ensure you get the right value you need to qualify the variable with the name of the app that generated it In the example at the right the variable X was entered but it returned the value of that variable as it was calculated in the Statistics 1 Var app the first entry However it was the value of the variable as it was calculated in the Statistics 2Var app that was sought To retrieve that value the variable name had to be qualitied by prefixing it with the name of the app that generated it Statistics 2Var followed by a period the second entry Note the syntax required app name variable name Spaces are not allowed in an app name and must be represented by the underscore character The app can be a built in app or one you have crated based on a built in app The name of a built in variable must match a name listed in the Home variables or App variables tables below Non standard characters in variables name such as and o can be entered z selecting them from the special symbols palette a Variables Home variables The Home variables are accessed by pressing and t
205. by a variable named DO to D9 There are three ways to get data into a column e Go to Numeric view and enter the data directly See Getting started with the Statistics 1Var app on page 187 for an example e Go to Home view and copy the data from a list For example if you enter L1 D1 in Home view the items in list L1 are copied into column D1 in the Statistics 1Var app Statistics 1Var app 191 Go to Home view and copy the data from a the Spreadsheet app For example suppose the data of interest is in Al A10 in the Spreadsheet app and you want to copy it into column D7 With the Statistics 1Var app open return to Home view and enter Spreadsheet Al A10 ULA D7 fee Whichever method you use the data you enter is automatically saved You can leave this app and come back to it later You will find that the data you last entered is still available After entering the data you must define data sets and the way they are to be plotted in Symbolic view Numeric view menu items The menu items you can tap on in Numeric view are 192 ltem Purpose Copies the highlighted item into the entry line Inserts a zero value above the highlighted cell Sorts the data in various ways See Sort data values on page 194 Displays a menu from which you can choose small font medium font or large font Displays an input form for you to enter a formula that will generate a list of values for a specified c
206. by commas and enclosed in braces Lists are commonly used to enter statistical data and to evaluate a function with multiple values Created and manipulated by the List Editor and A two dimensional array of values separated by commas and enclosed in nested square brackets Created and manipulated by the Matrix Editor Vectors are also handled by the Matrix Editor menu A choice of options given in the display It can appear as a list or as a set of touch buttons across the bottom of the display note Text that you write in the Note Editor It can be a general standalone note or a note specific to an app program A reusable set of instructions that you record using the Program Editor variable A name given to an object such as a number list matrix graphic and so on to assist in later retrieving it The command assigns a variable and the object can be retrieved by selecting the associated variable from the variables menu X3 3 vector A one dimensional array of values separated by commas and enclosed in single square brackets Created and manipulated by the Matrix Editor views The six primary environments for creating and manipulating apps Plot Plot Setup Numeric Numeric Setup Symbolic and Symbolic Setup 529 530 Appendix B Troubleshooting Calculator not responding If the calculator does not respond you should first try to reset it This is much like restarting a PC It cancels certain
207. ce level DF Degrees of freedom Critical T Critical values for T Lower Lower bound for Au Upper Upper bound for A u 234 Inference app 12 Solve app The Solve app enables you to define up to ten equations or expressions each with as many variables as you like You can solve a single equation or expression for one of its variables based on a seed value You can also solve a system of equations linear or non linear again using seed values Note the differences between an equation and an expression e An equation contains an equals sign lts solution is a value for the unknown variable that makes both sides of the equation have the same value e An expression does not contain an equals sign Its solution is a root a value for the unknown variable that makes the expression have a value of zero For brevity the term equation in this chapter will cover both equations and expressions Solve works only with real numbers Getting started with the Solve app The Solve app uses the customary app views Symbolic Plot and Numeric described in chapter 4 For a description of the menu buttons available in this app see Symbolic view Summary of menu buttons on page 76 Plot view Summary of menu buttons on page 86 and Numeric view Summary of menu buttons on page 94 One equation Solve app Suppose you want to find the acceleration needed to increase the speed of a car from 16 67 m s 60
208. ceiving 350 singular value decomposition 359 size 358 storing matrix elements 350 swap row 431 transposing 360 variables 345 maximum real number 34 308 memory clearing all 482 memory management 293 out of 511 saving 36 viewing available memory 372 menu context sensitive 17 menu button 17 menu lists searching 24 menu shortcuts 24 minimum real number 308 minutes symbol 18 mixed numbers 37 modes angle measure 28 decimal mark 29 number format 28 Modes app variables 455 modes See settings 27 multiplication 299 implied 33 545 N name conflict 510 natural exponential 56 300 313 natural log plus 1 313 natural logarithm 300 navigation 14 negation 303 negative numbers 33 no equations checked 511 normal probability plot 149 Normal Z distribution confidence intervals 180 note copying 368 creating 364 creating in an app 116 365 editing 365 369 importing trom note catalog 368 nth root 302 number format engineering 28 fixed 28 scientitic 28 Standard 28 Numeric view app variables 436 O off automatic 11 power 10 on cancel 10 One Proportion Z Interval 182 One Proportion Z Test 175 One Sample T Interval 184 One Sample T Test 178 One Sample Z Interval 180 One Sample Z Test 173 order of precedence 33 P n 308 Parametric app 187 define the expression 188 546 exploring the graph 190 parametric app variables 490 parentheses to close arguments 33 to specify order of operation 33 pareto plot 149 permuta
209. column column2 Swaps column and column2 of the specified matrix name Syntax SWAPROW name row I row2 481 App Functions 482 STARTAPP STARTVIEW Swaps row and row2 in the specified matrix name These commands allow you to launch any HP app bring up any view of the current app and change the options in the Views menu Syntax STARTAPP name Starts the app with name This will cause the app program s START function to be run if it is present The app s default view will be started Note that the START function is always executed when the user taps in the Application Library This also works for user defined apps Example STARTAPP Function launches the Function app Syntax STARTVIEW n draw Starts the nth view of the current app If draw is true that is not O it will force an immediate redrawing of the screen for that view The view numbers n are as follows symbolic 0 Plot 1 Numeric 2 Symbolic Setup 3 Plot Setup 4 Numeric Setup 5 App Info 6 Views Menu 7 First special view Split Screen Plot Detail 8 Second special view Split Screen Plot Table 9 Third special view Autoscale 10 Fourth special view Decimal 11 Fifth special view Integer 12 Sixth special view Trig 13 The special views in parentheses refer to the Function app and may differ in other apps The number of a special view corresponds to its position in the Views menu for that ap
210. commands Functions Menu format Commands Argument conventions Matrices Functions can be used in any app or in Home view They are listed on the Math menu under the Matrix category They can be used in mathematical expressions primarily in Home view as well as in programs Functions always produce and display a result They do not change any stored variables such as a matrix variable Functions have arguments that are enclosed in parentheses and separated by commas for example CROSS vector I vector2 The matrix input can be either a matrix variable name such as M1 or the actual matrix data inside brackets For example CROSS ML 1 2 By detault a Matrix function is presented on the Math menu using its descriptive name not its common command name Thus the shorthand name TRN is presented as Transpose and DET is presented as Determinant If you preter the Math menu to show command names instead deselect the Menu Display option on page 2 of the Home Settings screen see page 26 Functions differ from commands in that a function can be used in an expression Commands cannot be used in an expression Matrix commands are listed among the functions and commands in the commands catalog one of the Toolbox menus Press and tap to display the commands catalog For row or column supply the number of the row counting from the top starting with 1 or the number of the column counting from
211. cosh x ACOSH value Hyperbolic tangent TANH value Inverse hyperbolic tangent tanh7 x ATANH value Factorial of a positive integer For non integers T 1 This calculates the gamma function value Example Functions and commands Combination Permutation Random Number Integer Normal Seed Functions and commands 5 returns 120 The number of combinations without regard to order of n things taken r at a time COMB n Tr Example Suppose you want to know how many ways five things can be combined two at a time COMB 5 2 returns 10 Number of permutations with regard to order of n things taken rat a time PERM n Q Example Suppose you want to know how many permutations there are for five things taken two at a time PERM 5 2 returns 20 Random number With no argument this function returns a random number between zero and one With one integer argument a it returns a random number between O and a With three integer arguments n a and b returns n random number between a and b RANDOM RANDOM a RANDOM n a b Random integer With one integer argument a it returns a random integer between O and a With three integer arguments n a and b returns n random integers between a and b RANDINT a RANDINT n a b Random real number with normal distribution N u 0 RANDNORM u Sets the seed value on which RAND operates By specifying
212. creen Plot Table Decimal Integer Trig An introduction to HP apps These options which can be applied whatever view you are currently working in are explained in the table immediately above Testing a A useful way of testing a zoom is zoom with to divide the screen into two split screen halves with each half showing viewing the plot and then to apply a zoom only to one side of the screen The illustration at the right is a plot of y 3sin x To split the screen into two halves 1 Open the Views menu Press 2 Select Split Screen Plot Detail The result is shown at the right Any zoom operation you undertake will be applied only to the copy of the plot in the right hand half of the screen This will help you test and then choose an appropriate zoom Note that you can replace the original plot on the left with the zoomed plot on the right by tapping Patil To un split the screen press Plot Zoom The following examples show the effects of the zooming options examples on a plot of 3sinx using the default zoom factors 2 x 2 Split screen mode described above has been used to help you see the effect of zooming Note that there is an Unzoom option on the Zoom menu Use this to return a plot to its pre zoom state If the Zoom menu is not shown tap EEN Zoom In tn Shortcut press Zoom Traces An introduction to HP apps 81 Zoom Out fave Out Shortcut press X In Em xX In X Out X O
213. ct inequality test Returns 1 if the inequality is true and O if the inequality is false Note that more than two objects can be compared Thus 6 lt 8 lt 11 returns 1 because it is true whereas 6 lt 8 lt 3 returns O as it is false Inequality test Returns 1 if the inequality is true and O if the inequality is false Note that more than two objects can be compared See comment above regarding lt Inequality test Returns 1 if the inequality is true and O if the inequality is false Equality symbol Connects two members of an equation Equality test Returns 1 if the equality is true and O if the equality is false Strict inequality test Returns 1 if the inequality is true and O if the inequality is false Note that more than two objects can be compared See comment above regarding lt Inequality test Returns 1 if the inequality is true and O if the inequality is false Note that more than two objects can be compared See comment above regarding lt Inserts the power symbol Returns the symbolic expression in quadratic form in the given in VectVar of the symmetric matrix A a2q MtrxA VectVar Returns the polynomials U and V such that for polynomials A B and C PU QV R With only polynomials as arguments the variable used is x With a variable as the final argument the polynomials are expressions of it abcuv Poly A Poly B Poly C Var Arc cosine cos x ACOS value 339 additi
214. ct the cells enter the content for example Row 3 and press _ fue J What you enter on the entry line is evaluated as soon as you press _ e _ with the result placed in the cell or cells However if you want to retain the underlying formula precede it with For example suppose that want to add cell A1 which contains 7 to cell B2 which contains 12 Entering Al B2 in say A4 yields19 as does entering Oma JA B2 in A5 However if the value in Al or B2 changes the value in A5 changes but not the value in A4 This is because the expression or formula was retained in A5 To see if a cell contains just the value shown in it or also an 177 Import data 178 underlying formula that generates the value move your cursor to the cell The entry line shows a formula if there is one A single formula can add content to every cell in a column or row For example move to C the heading cell for column C enter Bali SIN Row and press L _ Each cell in the column is populated with the sine of the cell s row number A similar process enables you to populate every cell in a row with the same formula You can also add a formula once and have it apply to every cell in the spreadsheet You do this by placing the formula in the cell at the top left the cell with the HP logo in it To see how this works suppose you want to generate a table of powers squares cubes and so on starting with the s
215. ction Geometry 151 altitude GA GB GC is the form you need to use in calculations Further in many cases the specified parameters in the syntax below A B C etc can be the name of a point such as GA or a complex number representing a point Thus angle A B C could be e angle GP GR GB lt ng Letorea ba21 5 1 Or e a combination of named points and points defined by a complex number as in angle GP i1 2i i Symbolic view Cmds menu Point barycenter center division_point element inter 152 barycenter point1 coeff1 draws the barycenter of point with weight coeff barycenter Pnt Real Pnt Real Pnt Real Gives the coordinates of the center of circle A center A Returns the point M such that z a k z b and z affix of M MA k MB division point Pnt or Cplx a Pnt or Cplx b Cplx k Shows a point chosen on a curve or a real chosen in an interval element Curve or Real interval Val With 2 arguments gives the intersection of 2 curves or surfaces as a vector If a third argument is given the intersection returned is the one closest to that argument Geometry isobarycenter midpoint orthocenter point point2d trace Line DrawSlp LineTan Geometry inter Curve Curve Pnt isobarycenter A B C draws the isobarycenter of the n points A B C midpoint A B draws the midpoint of the segment AB midpoint Pnt or
216. ction or procedure Subroutines start with a heading consisting of the name followed by parentheses that contain a list of parameters or arguments separated by commas The body of a subroutine is a sequence of statements enclosed within a BEGIN END pair For example the body of a simple program called MY PROGRAM could look like this EXPORT MYPROGAM BEGIN PTXON GD 220 5 END When a line of a program begins with two forward slashes the rest of the line will be ignored This enables you to insert comments in the program EXPORT MYPROGAM BEGIN PIXON 1 1 3 This line is just a comment END The Program Catalog 438 The Program Catalog is where you run and debug programs and send programs to another HP Prime You can also rename and remove programs and it is where you start the Program Editor The Program Editor is where you create and edit programs Programs can also be run from Home view or from other programs Programming Open the Press Program Catalog Tl Function OKB Program Program to open the IV ROGA saa Catalog Program Catalog The Program Catalog displays a list of program names The first item in the Program Catalog is a built in entry that has the same name as the active app This entry is the app program for the active app if such a program exists See the App programs on page 459 for more information Program Catalog buttons and keys Button or Key Purpose
217. ctions of x and y in terms of t Polar Specify up to 10 polar functions of r in terms of an angle 9 An introduction to HP apps 63 App Quadratics Explorer Sequence Solve Spreadsheet Statistics 1 Var Statistics 2Var Triangle Solver Trig Explorer Symbolic Setup view Plot view 64 The Symbolic Setup view is the same for each app It enables you to override the system wide settings for angle measure number format and complex number entry The override applies only to the current app To change the settings for all Use the Symbolic view to Cont Not used Specify up to 10 sequence functions Specify up to 10 equations Not used Specify up to 5 univariate analyses Specify up to 5 multivariate analyses Not used Not used Polar Symbolic Setup mam Angle Measure System Number Format Radians Degrees Complex sy Choose Angle Measure apps see System wide settings on page 27 The table below outlines what is done in the Plot view of each app App Use the Polar view to Advanced Plot and explore the open sentences Graphing selected in Symbolic view Finance Display an amortization graph Function Plot and explore the functions selected in Symbolic view Geometry Create and manipulate geometric constructions An introduction to HP apps App Inference Linear Explorer Linear Solver Parametric Polar Quadratics Explorer Sequence Solve
218. current app In the Function app enters an X In the Parametric app it enters a T In the Polar app discussed in chapter 15 it enters 0 Decide if you want to give one or more function a custom color when it is plotted evaluate a dependent function deselect a definition that you don t want to explore incorporate variables math commands and CAS commands in a definition For the sake of simplicity we can ignore these operations in this example However they can be useful and are described in detail in Common operations in Symbolic view on page 71 Parametric app Set the angle Set the angle measure to degrees i Symb MESSUT 5 Settings Parametric Symbolic Setup kaf Angle Measure f v System Tap the Angl i eee g e Number Format Measure field Complex eens and select Degrees You could also have set the angle Choose angle measure measure on the Home Settings screen However Home settings are system wide By setting the angle measure in an app rather than Home view you are limiting the setting just to that app Set Up the 7 Open the Plot Setup view plot Setup 8 Set Up the plot by Parametric Plot Setup specifying TRngp 0 appropriate iad PP ti ti X Rng 15 9 15 9 grap i ai Y Rng 10 9 10 9 In this example set x tick 1 the T Rng and T Y Tick 1 Step fields so that Enter minimum time value T steps from O to 360 in 5 steps Select the 2nd T Rng field
219. d 5 6 7 8 in M2 1 Select the first matrix Matrix Tap M1 or highlight it and press _er_ Matrices To multiply and divide by a scalar To multiply two matrices Matrices 2 Enter the matrix elements CE 2 a ae 4 Ee 3 Select the second matrix Matrix EDESEBEICHCII Tap M2 or highlight it and press _ t 4 Enter the matrix elements A ala a 5 In Home view add the two matrices you have just created AS e at Settings alpha xl M Ans IR 52 Caph m m z C fins size Go gt Column Function al For division by a scalar enter the matrix first then the operator then the scalar For multiplication the order of the operands does not matter The matrix and the scalar can be real or complex For example to divide the result of the previous example by 2 press the following keys Capim M1 M2 i 4 10 12 Ans 34 56 OS ED ES ED AED a To multiply the two matrices that you created for the previous example press the following keys 417 To raise a matrix to a power To divide by a square matrix 418 TEIN _ x AGEN n alpha ix m 4 x alpha J Function ae Enter ol ee To multiply a matrix by a M1 M2 i 4 vector enter the matrix 1012 Ans 34 first then the vector The 7 56 number of elements in M pol the vector must equal the number of columns in the matrix You can
220. d on the Catlg menu The Man LCAS Anp RANE functions and commands that are also on the Math menu are described in Keyboard functions on page 285 Those that are also on the CAS menu are described in CAS menu on page 298 The functions and commands specific to the Geometry app are described in Geometry functions and commands on page 151 and those specific to programming are described in Program commands on page 464 Some of the options on the Catlg menu can also be chosen from relations palette 2 9 Inserts opening parenthesis Multiplication symbol Returns the product of numbers or the scalar product of two vectors Addition symbol Returns the term by term sum of two lists or two matrices or adds two strings together Subtraction symbol Returns the term by term subtraction of two lists or two matrices List or matrix multiplication symbol Returns the term by term multiplication of two lists or two matrices List or matrix division symbol Returns the term by term division of two lists or two matrices Returns the list or matrix where each term is the corresponding term of the list or matrix given as argument raised to the power n Functions and commands lt gt abcuv ACOS Functions and commands Lst or Mtrx Intg n Stores the evaluated expression in the variable Note that cannot be used with the graphics GO G9 See the command BLIT var expression Stri
221. d to manually add parentheses by pressing to enclose a group of objects you want operated on as a single unit Parentheses provide a way of avoiding arithmetic ambiguity In the example above we wanted the entire numerator divided by 3 thus the entire numerator was enclosed in parentheses Without the parentheses only 148 would have been divided by 3 The following examples show the use of parentheses and the use of the cursor keys to move outside a group of objects enclosed within parentheses Entering Calculates LSN AS et E 3 sin 45 m LEN O45 LF a gt sin 45 n LO Baia 785 J 9 JB5 x9 85 J9 JEKI lt The HP Prime calculates according to the following order of precedence Functions at the same level of precedence are evaluated in order from left to right 1 Expressions within parentheses Nested parentheses are evaluated from inner to outer Prefix functions such as SIN and LOG Postfix functions such as Power function NTHROOT Negation multiplication and division Addition and subtraction AND and NOT OR and XOR 0 ONO HR WD Left argument of where 35 Negative numbers Explicit and implied multiplication Large results 10 Equals It is best to press to start a negative number or to insert a negative sign Pressing instead will in some situations be interpreted as an operation to subtract the next number you enter
222. data appears on the screen If you are using the simplified input form for a right angled triangle you must specify at least two values 274 Triangle Solver app 19 The Explorer apps There are three explorer apps These are designed for you to explore the relationships between the parameters of a function and the shape of the graph of that function The explorer apps are Linear Explorer For exploring linear functions e Quadratic Explorer For exploring quadratic functions Trig Explorer For exploring sinusoidal functions There are two modes of exploration graph mode and equation mode In graph mode you manipulate a graph and note the corresponding changes in its equation In equation mode you manipulate an equation and note the corresponding changes in its graphical representation Each explorer app has a number of equations and graphs for to explore and app has a test mode In test mode you test you skills at matching equations to graphs Linear Explorer app Open the app The Explorer apps The Linear Explorer app can be used to explore the behavior of the graphs of y ax and y ax b as the values of a and b change Press and select Linear Explorer The left half of the display shows the graph of a linear function The right half shows the general 275 Graph mode 276 form of the equation being explored at the top and below it the current equation of that form
223. diagrams TVM transactions can be represented in cash flow diagrams A cash flow diagram is a time line divided into equal segments representing the compounding periods Arrows represent the cash flows These could be positive upward arrows or negative downward arrows depending on the point of view of the lender or borrower The following cash flow diagram shows a loan from a borrower s point of view Present value PV Loan Money Equal periods received is a positive es a number PMT Money Payment Payment Payment Payment paid out is PMT PMT PMT PMT Future value a negative FY number Equal payments Finance app 265 The following cash flow diagram shows a loan from the lender s point of view Equal payments rma tv PMT PMT PMT PMT PMT _ Se ee Equal periods PV Cash flow diagrams m also specify when es payments occur rela apitalize value of tive to the compound ae ing periods The diagram to the right 2 3 4 5 shows lease pay PMT PMT PMT PMT PMT ments at the begin FV ning of the period This diagram shows deposits PMT into an account at the end of each period Time value of money TVM 266 Time value of money TVM calculations make use of the notion that a dollar today will be worth more than a dollar sometime in the future A dollar today can be invested at a certain interest rate and generate a return that the same dollar in the future ca
224. ds under the Tmplt menu Block BEGIN END RETURN KILL Branch IF THEN IF THEN ELSE CASE Programming The block commands determine the beginning and end of a sub routine or function There is also a Return command to recall results from sub routines or functions Syntax BEGIN stmtl stm2 stmtN END Defines a command or set of commands to be executed together In the simple program EXPORT SQM1 X BEGIN RETURN X 2 END the block is the single RETURN command If you entered SQM1 8 in Home view the result returned would be 63 Syntax RETURN expression Returns the current value of expression Syntax KILL Stops the step by step execution of the current program with debug In what follows the plural word commands refers to both a single command or a set of commands Syntax IF fest THEN commands END Evaluate test If test is true not O execute commands Otherwise nothing happens Syntax IF test THEN commands ELSE commands 2 END Evaluate test If test is true non 0 execute commands 1 otherwise execute commands 2 Syntax CASE 465 Loop 466 IFERR IFERR ELSE FOR LF fest THEN commands END LF test THEN commands END DEFAULT commands END Evaluates test If true execute commands and end the CASE Otherwise evaluate test2 If true execute commands2 Continue evaluating tests until a true is found If no true test is found execute default commands
225. e C projection Curve Pnt reflection D C or reflection A C symmetrical of C in the symmetry line D or sym point A reflection OCenw A or Line D Pnt C or Curve C rotation B a1 A resp rotation d a1 A is the transformation of A by rotation of center B resp of axis d and of angle al rotation Pnt B or Cplx or Dr3 Angle al Pnt A or Curve 159 similarity translation similarity B k a1 A transformation of A in the similarity center B or axis d coeff k angle a1 or also homothety B k exp i a1 A Similarity Pnt or Dr3 Real Angle Pnt translation B A C resp translation a b c C is the translation of C in the translation of vector AB resp a b c translation Vect Pnt C Numeric view Cmds menu Measure abscissa affix angle arcLen area 160 The x coordinate of a point or the x length of a vector abscissa A or abscissa vector Gives the affix of a point that is its coordinates expressed as a complex number or the affix of a vector affix A or affix vector Calculates the angle made by AB and AC angle A B C Returns the length of the arc of the curve defined by y Xpr or by x Xpr1 y Xpr2 when the parameter values are between a and b arcLen Expr Xpr or Lst Xprl Xpr2 Var Real a Real b Algebraic area of a circle or polygon or of the area below a curve optionally with a quadrature method trapezoid left_rectangle right
226. e Probability associated with the ZTest statistic Boundary value s of Z associated with the a level that you supplied Proportion of successes associated with the level you supplied On the basis of statistics from two samples each from a different population this test measures the strength of the evidence for a selected hypothesis against the null hypothesis The null hypothesis is that the proportions of successes in the two populations are equal Ho m 7 You select one of the following alternative hypotheses against which to test the null hypothesis Inference app Hz TILTI H TI gt 19 Hz NTI T2 225 Inputs The inputs are Field name Definition xi Sample 1 success count Xo Sample 2 success count ny Sample 1 size ny Sample 2 size a Significance level Results The results are Result Description Test Z Z Test statistic Test A p Difference between the proportions of successes in the two samples that is associated with the test Zvalue P Probability associated with the Z Test statistic Critical Z Boundary value s of Z associated with the a level that you supplied Critical A p Difference in the proportion of successes in the two samples associated with the level you supplied 226 Inference app One Sample T Test Menu name Inputs Results Inference app T Test 1 u This test is used when the population standard deviation is not known On th
227. e Pnt Cplx Eg Pnt slope Var median_line A B C draws the median line through A of the triangle ABC median line ent or Cplx Pnt or Cpls Pnt or Cplx parallel A D resp parallel A P or parallel A D DD draws the line resp plane through A parallel to the line D resp parallel to the plane P or to the lines D DD and parallel d D draws the plane through d parallel to the line D Geometry parallel Pnt or Line Line or Plan Line perpen_bisector perpen_bisector A B draws the bisection line or plane of the segment AB perpen bisector Pnt or Cplx Pnt or Cplx perpendicular perpendicular A line B C or perpendicular A B C draws the orthogonal line of line BC through A and perpendicular d plane B C D draws the orthogonal plane of plane B C D through the line d perpendicular Pnt or Line Line or Plan segment segment A B draws the segment AB segment Pnt or Cplx Pnt or Cplx Var Var tangent tangent C A draws the tangents line or plane to C through A tangent Curve C Pnt A Polygon equilateral_triangle equilateral_triangle A B resp equilateral_triangle A B P draws the direct equilateral triangle ABC of side AB resp in the half plane ABP equilateral triangle Pnt A or Cplix Pnt B or Cpilx Pnt P Var CE hexagon Returns and draws the hexagon of side AB ABCDEF is direct in the plane ABP hexagon Pnt A Cplx Pnt B
228. e 76 Choose Angle Measure Set up the 7 Open the Plot Setup view plot Setup 254 Polar app Plot the expression Explore the graph Polar app 8 Set Up the plot by Polar Plot Setup ar specifying Rng 0 8 Step 0 1308996939 appropriate i X Rng 15 9 15 9 graphing options In Y Rng 10 9 10 9 this example set the xtick 1 upper limit of the re range of the Enter maximum angle value independent variable to 4r Select the 2nd Rng field and enter 4 EMA x OK There are numerous ways of configuring the appearance of Plot view For more information see Common operations in Plot Setup view on page 86 Plot the expression Plot 4Setup R1 8 15 707963268 Display the Plot view menu A number of options appear to help you can explore the graph such as zoom and trace options using ERGs the trace and zoom options You can also jump directly to a particular 6 value by entering that value The Go To screen appears with the number you typed on the entry line Just tap to accept it You could also tap the button and spwecity the target value 255 Display the Numeric view 256 If only one polar equation is plotted you can see the equation that generated the plot by tapping ERIR If there are several equations plotted move the tracing cursor to the plot you are interested by pressing or and then tap EHIB For more information on exp
229. e Interval Can contain any expression Independent variable is 0 Example 2 SIN 2 0 gt R1 Contains the data values for a 2 variable statistical analysis For example S1 n returns the nth data pair in the data set for the S1 analysis With no argument returns a list containing the independent column name the dependent column name and the number of the fit type Programming SlType S5Type Statistics 2Var Type Inference Programming Sets the type of fit to be used by the FIT operation in drawing the regression line From Symbolic Setup view specify the fit in the field for Type1 Type2 etc In a program store one of the following constant integers or names into a variable S1Type S2Type etc O Linear 1 Logarithmic 2 Exponential 3 Power 4 Exponent 5 Inverse 6 Logistic 7 Quadratic 8 Cubic 9 Quartic 10 User Defined Example Cubic gt S2type or 8 gt S2type Determines the type of hypothesis test or confidence interval Depends upon the value of the variable Method Make a selection from the Symbolic view Or in a program store the constant number from the list below into the variable Type With Method 0 the constant values and their meanings are as follows O Z Test 1 u 1 ZTest u u 2 Z Test z 3 Z Test n 15 4 T Test 1 u 5 T Test u u With Method 1 the constants and their meanings are 499 XO YO X9 Y9 Parametric UO U9 Sequence Numeric
230. e Symbolic view S1 S5 Do 2 variable statistics Performs the same calculations as tapping in the Numeric view of the Statistics 2Var app 331 SetDepend Setindep and stores the results in the appropriate Statistics 2Var app results Sn must be one of the Statistics 2Var app Symbolic view S1 S5 Do2VStats Sn Set dependent column Sets the dependent column for one of the statistical analyses S1 S5 to one of the column C0 C9 SetDepend Sn Cn Set independent column Sets the independent column for one of the statistical analyses S1 S5 to one of the column CO C9 SetiIndep Sn Cn Inference app functions Dolnference 332 The Inference app has a single function that returns the same results as tapping in the Numeric view of the Inference app The results depend on the contents of the Inference app Method Type and AltHyp Calculate contidence interval or test hypothesis Performs the same calculations as tapping in the Numeric view of the Inference app and stores the results in the appropriate Inference app results DoInference Functions and commands HypZ1mean HypZ2mean HypZ1 prop HypZ2prop HypT1mean HypT2mean ConfZ1mean ConfZ2mean ConfZ1Prop ConfZ2Prop ConfT1mean ConfT2mean Finance app functions The Finance App uses a set of functions that all reference the same set of Finance app There are 5 main TYM 4 of which are mandatory for each of these functions except DoFinance There
231. e basis of statistics from a single sample this test measures the strength of the evidence for a selected hypothesis against the null hypothesis The null hypothesis is that the sample mean has some assumed value Ho uo You select one of the following alternative hypotheses against which to test the null hypothesis Hi u lt uo H u gt uo H u po The inputs are Field name Definition 3 Sample mean s Sample standard deviation n Sample size Uo Hypothetical population mean a Significance level The results are Result Description Test T T Test statistic Test x Value of x associated with the test t value P Probability associated with the T Test statistic DF Degrees of freedom 227 Result Description Continued Critical T Boundary value s of T associated with the a level that you supplied Critical x Boundary value s of x required by the a value that you supplied Two Sample T Test Menu name Inputs 228 T Test uy u9 This test is used when the population standard deviation is not known On the basis of statistics from two samples each sample from a different population this test measures the strength of the evidence for a selected hypothesis against the null hypothesis The null hypothesis is that the two populations means are equal Hy uj uv You select one of the following alternative hypotheses against which to test the null hypothesis
232. e done in the computer algebra system CAS settings are discussed in chapter 3 Although Home settings control the apps you can override certain Home settings once inside an app For example you can set the angle measure to radians in the Home settings but choose degrees as the angle measure once inside the Polar app Degrees then remains the angle measure until you open another app that has a different angle measure Home settings You use the Home MNT Tees Settings input form to Angle Measure Radians Number Format Standard specify the settings for Entry Textbook Home view and the Integers Hex J32 Complex at b i default settings for the g anguage Englis hif apps Press Decimal Mark Dot Choose angle measure Settings fo open the Ga Gin GET SD Home Settings input form There are four pages of settings Getting started 27 Page 1 28 Setting Angle Measure Number Format Options Degrees 360 degrees in a circle Radians 2r radians in a circle The angle mode you set is the angle setting used in both Home view and the current app This is to ensure that trigonometric calculations done in the current app and Home view give the same result The number format you set is the for mat used in all Home view calcula tions Standard Full precision display Fixed Displays results rounded to a number of decimal places If you choose this option a new field appe
233. e functions from the CAS menu one of the Toolbox Getting started menus in an expression you are entering in Home view and use functions from the Math menu another of the Toolbox menus in an expression you are entering in CAS view Choosing an entry type The first choice you need to make is the style of entry The three types are Textbook An expression is entered in much the same way as if you were writing it on paper with some arguments above or below or others In other words your entry could be two dimensional as in the example above LN 5 T Algebraic An expression is entered on a single line Your entry is always one dimensional Advanced RPN where RPN stands for Reverse Polish Notation Not available in CAS view The arguments of the depression are entered first followed by the operator The entry of an operator automatically evaluates what has already been entered Thus you will need to enter a two operator expression as in the example above in two steps one for each operator Step 1 5 the natural logarithm of 5 is calculated and displayed in history Step 2 SA 3 2 is entered as a divisor and applied to the previous result More information about RPN mode can be found in chapter 2 Reverse Polish Notation RPN starting on page 43 Note that on page 2 of the Home Settings screen you can specity whether you want to display your calculations
234. e in a formula any function available on the Math CAS App User or Catlg z menus see chapter 20 5 Functions and commands on 7 9 page 283 For example to 0 9 ROOT 3 X2 2 SRE REONE AEREN x 2 you could enter in a cell a ROOD o G2 2 _Fater_ The answer displayed is 1 732 You could also have selected a function from a menu For example 1 Press SM 2 Press and tap WS 3 Select Polynomial gt Find Roots Your entry line will now look like this CAS proot 4 Enter the coefficients of the polynomial in descending order separating each with a comma 5 Press to see the result 1 732 Note that the CAS prefix added to your function is to remind you that the calculation will be carried out by the CAS and thus a symbolic result will be returned if possible You can also force a calculation to be handled by the CAS by tapping in the spreadsheet There are additional spreadsheet functions that you can use mostly related to finance and statistics calculations See Spreadsheet functions on page 314 179 Copy and paste To copy one or more cells select them and press Copy Move to the desired location and press SA g9 Paste EE eens ements You can choose to paste either the value formula _____ Show Clear_ Delete ____ _OK_ format both value and format or both formula and format REGRS E1 A295 Formula Format _
235. e nV Gli sncteenstersddon saceaislcecasecaass eaesesmenecses 233 12 Solve app Getting started with the Solve app cccecccccesseeecceeuseeeeeeens 235 ONE cdudli oi aana reas 235 Several equations wince casmsrneces Sameer euncenneae tet eeawaws 239 PUTO OINS EEE E S E anes eta EATE cies ss 240 Solution information ceccecceeccecceccuscesceuccscenccuccuseascescencs 240 13 Linear Solver app Getting started with the Linear Solver app cccceeeeeeeeeeees 243 Menu SIG INS iosep e e N ebuecoeleeues 245 14 Parametric app Getting started with the Parametric App cccccceeseeeeeeeees 247 15 Polar app Getting started with the Polar app ccccccceseeecceeseeeeeeeens 253 16 Sequence app Getting started with the Sequence App ccsseeccceeeeeeeeeeees 257 Another example A table of cubes ccccceceeeccceeeseeseeeenaees 261 17 Finance app 4 Contents Getting Started with the Finance App ccccccceeseeeeeeeeeeeees 263 Cash How diagrams crees 8 cust atae EST 265 Time value of money TVM cccccsseecccceesseeecceesseescceeseeeees 266 TVM calculations Another example cccccccesseeeceeesseeeees 267 Calculating amortiZations ccccccccseeecceeeseeeeeseeseeeeeeeeaneees 268 18 Triangle Solver app Getting started with the Triangle Solver app 0cccceee sees 271 Choosing triangle types aks snsenctsnneniacsasuaucauncessleeuneaseuuanneaads 273
236. e of interest The variable s name is copied to the insertion point and its value is used in evaluating the expression that contains it Function app For example in Function Home view or the CAS you could select SignedArea from the Vars menus press 3 Ete and SignedArea 3 get the current value amait of SignedArea multiplied by three Function variables can also be made part of a function s definition in Symbolic view For example you could define a function as x2 x Root The full range of variables and their use in calculations is covered in detail in chapter 21 Variables beginning on page 373 Function app 115 Summary of FCN operations 116 Operation Root Extremum Slope Signed area Intersec tion Description Select Root to find the root of the current function nearest to the tracing cursor If no root is found but only an extremum then the result is labeled Extremum instead of Root The cursor is moved to the root value on the xaxis and the resulting xvalue is saved in a variable named Root Select Extremum to find the maximum or minimum of the current function nearest to the tracing cursor The cursor moves to the extremum and the coordinate values are displayed The resulting value is saved in a variable named Extremum Select Slope to find the numeric derivative of the current function at the current position of the tracing cursor The result is saved in a var
237. e reference a simple list or anything that results in a list of values e Input Parameters mode optional specifies the mode to be used for the regression 1 linear 2 logarithmic 317 PredY PredX HypZ1mean exponential power inverse logistic quadratic cubic O ON OO KR W quartic 10 trigonometric Important If px or py are specified their opposite value must be one of the input values For example if px is specitied in the configuration string then the y value must be an input parameter and vice versa for py Example REGRS J1 A25 B37 2 The hypothesis test HypZ1mean is a one sample Z test for comparing means Syntax HypZlmean ouput configuration input list HypZlmean ouput configuration SampMean SampSize NullPopMean PopStdDev SigLevel Mode e Output is a reference to where you would like the output to be placed Note if a range is specified it will limit the size of the output but can also change the orientation from vertical to horizontal if the range is wider than it is tall e Configuration is a string that controls what results are shown and what order they appear in An empty string will default to show all in default order including headers h if present the header cells will be created acc Accept Reject Functions and commands HYPZ2mean Functions and commands tZ Test Z tM Test Mean prob Probability cZ Critical Z cxl Critical x
238. e second element in the list ETE gt OuwmbBWN 90 F edit ins Deletel size ists In the List Catalog use the cursor keys to highlight the list and press You are prompted to confirm your decision Tap or press Enter Only the contents of the list is deleted The list is simply stripped of its contents In the List Catalog press EMA Clear Only the contents of each list is deleted The lists are simply stripped of their contents Lists in Home view To enter a list Lists You can enter and operate on lists directly in Home view The lists can be named or unnamed Press A pair of braces appears on the entry line All lists must be enclosed in braces 2 Enter the first element in the list followed by a comma element 3 Continue adding elements separating each with a comma 4 When you have finished entering the elements press fner_ The list is added to History with any expressions among the elements evaluated 403 To store a list To display a list To display one element To store one element To send a list 404 You can store a list in a variable You can do this before the list is added to History or you can copy it from History When you ve entered a list in the entry line or copied it from History to the entry line tap EB enter a name for the list and press L The list variable names available to you are LO through L9
239. e variable so that it is globally available These commands enable you to control the visibility of a user defined function Export Syntax EXPORT FunctionName Exports the function FunctionName so that it is globally available and appears on the User menu EA REI Sets text that the user can see by pressing EA A prefix to a key name when creating a user keyboard See The User Keyboard Customizing key presses on page 455 Commands under the Cmds menu Strings 470 A string is a sequence of characters enclosed in double quotes To put a double quote in a string use two consecutive double quotes The character starts an escape sequence and the character s immediately following are interpreted specially n inserts a new line and two backslashes insert a single backslash To put a new line into the string press to wrap the text at that point Programming Programming ASC CHAR DIM STRING INSTRING Syntax asc str Returns a vector containing the ASCII codes of string str Example asc AB returns 65 66 Syntax char vector or inf Returns the string corresponding to the character codes in vector or the single code int Examples char 65 returns A char 82 77 72 returns RMH Syntax dim str Returns the number of characters in string str Example dim 12345 returns 5 dim and dim n return 1 Notice the use of the two double quotes and the escape
240. e variable var if the user taps and returns 1 If the user taps f update the variable and returns O Example EXPORT SIDES EXPORT GETSIDES BEGIN INPUT SIDES D ie Sides N Enter num sides 2 END it does not Enter num sides 2 ISKEYDOWN Syntax ISKEYDOWN key_id Programming FT cancel 0k Die Sides 487 488 MOUSE MSGBOX PRINT Returns true non zero if the key whose key_id is provided is currently pressed and false O if it is not Syntax MOUSE index Returns two lists describing the current location of each potential pointer or empty lists if the pointers are not used The output is x y original z original y type where type is O for new 1 for completed 2 for drag 3 for stretch 4 for rotate and 5 for long click The optional parameter index is the nth element that would have been returned x y original x etc had the parameter bee omitted or 1 if no pointer activity had occurred Syntax MSGBOX expression or string ok_cancel Displays a message box with the value of the given expression or string and faye button Default If ok_cancel is true displays the buttons otherwise only displays the value for ok_cancel is false false O if Returns true non zero if the user taps the user presses EEEE EXPORT AREACALC BEGIN LOCAL radius INPUT radius Radius of Circle
241. e will be interpreted according to the angle mode setting Degrees or Radians From the Triangle Solver Numeric view enter a positive value for angle In a program type n PAnglecC where n gt 0 Corresponds to the status of in the Numeric view of the Triangle Solver app Determines whether a general triangle solver or a right triangle solver is used From the Triangle Solver view tap EEB In a program type 0 gt RECT for the general Triangle Solver 1 gt RECT for the right Triangle Solver The following variables are found in the Home Modes input form They can all be over written in an app s Symbolic setup Contains the last result calculated in the Home view Sets the angle format for the Home view From Modes view choose Degrees or Radians for angle measure In a program type 0 gt HAngle for Degrees 1 gt HAngle for Radians Sets the number of digits for a number format other than Standard in the Home view From the Modes view enter a value in the second field of Number Format In a program type n gt HDigits where 0 lt n lt ll Programming HFormat HComplex Date Time Language Entry Programming Sets the number display format used in the Home view From the Modes view choose Standard Fixed Scientific or Engineering in the Number Format field In a program store one of the following the constant numbers or its name into the variable HFormat O Standard 1
242. ebra Simplify Collect Expand Factor Substitute Partial Fraction Extract Numerator Denominator Left Side Right Side Calculus Differentiate Functions and commands Returns an expression simplified simplify Expr Returns a polynomial or list of polynomials factorized over the field of the coefficients collect Poly or LstPoly Returns an expression expanded expand Expr Returns a polynomial factorized factor Poly Returns the solution when a value is substituted for a variable in an expression subst Expr Var v value a Returns the partial fraction expansion of a rational fraction partfrac RatFrac Returns the numerator of a fraction after simplifying the fraction if necessary numer Frac a b or RatFrac Returns the denominator of a fraction after simplifying the fraction if necessary denom Frac a b or RatFrac Returns the left side of an equation or the left bound of an interval lhs Equal a b or Interval a b Returns the right side of an equation or the left bound of an interval rhs Equal a b or Interval a b With one expression as argument returns derivative of the expression with respect to x With one expression and one 299 300 Integrate Limit Series Summation variable as arguments returns the derivative or partial derivative of the expression with respect to the variable With one expression and more than
243. eby decreasing or increasing the increment between consecutive values This and other options are explained in Common operations in Numeric view on page 90 Display the Numeric Advanced Graphing Num Setup 1 amp 0 Setup view wumxsar p oooO Num Y Start 0 Shift ACE Setup Num X Step 0 1 Num Y Step 0 1 You can set the starting e value and step value Num Type Automatic Num X Zoom 4 that is the increment jumyzoom 4 Enter table horizontal start value for both the Xcolumn gene aa CS CEES SS and the Y column as well as the zoom factor for zooming in or out on a row of the table Note that in Numeric view zooming does not affect the size of what is displayed Instead it changes the Num Step setting that is the increment between consecutive x values Zooming in decreases the increment zooming out increases the increment This is further explained in Zoom on page 90 You can also choose whether the table of data in Numeric view is automatically populated or whether it is populated by you typing in the particular x values and x values you are interested in These options Automatic or BuildYourOwn are available from the Num Type list They are explained in detail in Custom tables on page 93 To make the Numeric view settings match the axes range in Plot view tap Advanced Graphing app Geometry The Geometry app enables you to draw and explore geomet
244. ed in Numeric view top i Selecting a calculation in Numeric view means that it will also be displayed in Plot view 127 Trace the derivative 128 27 Press to return to Plot view slope GC 0 452 Notice the calculation that you have just created in Numeric view is displayed at the top 7 left of the screen ee Let s now add two more calculations to Numeric view and have them displayed in Plot view 28 Press to return to Numeric view 29 Tap GEM enter cB and tap Entering just the name of a point will show its coordinates 30 Tap GEM enter cc and tap Entering just the name of a line will show its equation 31 Make sure both of these new equations are selected by choosing each one and pressing HRB 32 Press to return to Plot view Notice that your new calculations are displayed 33 Press and p Pointer 4 03 choose point GB 34 Use the cursor keys to move point B along the graph Note that with each move the results of the calculations shown at the top left of the screen change Point D is the point whose ordinate value matches the derivative of the curve at point B It is easier to see how the derivative changes by looking at a plot of it rather than comparing subsequent calculations We can do that by tracing point D as it moves in response to movements of point B First we ll hide the calculations so that we can better see
245. edgecolor is optional The default is white fillcolor is optional The default is edgecolor To erase a GROB execute RECT G To clear the screen execute RECT When optional arguments are provided in a command with multiple optional parameters like RECT the arguments provided correspond to the leftmost parameters first For example in the program below the arguments 40 and 90 in the RECT _P command correspond to x1 and y1 The argument 0 corresponds to edgecolor since there is only the one additional argument If there had been two additional arguments they would have referred to x2 and y2 rather than edgecolor and fillcolor The program produces the figure below 477 478 SUBGROB P SUBGROB NOTE TEXTOUT_P TEXTOUT EXPORT BOX BEGIN RECT RECT P 40 90 0 7 FREEZE END The program below also uses the RECT_P command In this case the pair of arguments 0 and 3 correspond to x2 and y2 The program produces the figure below to the right EXPORT BOX BEGIN RECT INVERT G 0 RECT P 40 90 0 3 4 FREEZE END Syntax SUBGROB srcGRB xI yl x2 y2 trgtGRB SUBGROB P srcGRB xl yl x2 y2 trgtGRB Sets trgtGRB to be a copy of the area of srcGRB between points x y1 and x2 y2 srcGRB can be any of the graphics variables and is optional The default is GO trgtGRB can be any of the graphics variables except GO x2 y2 are optional and if not s
246. een consecutive values of the independent variable to 1 24 approximately 0 1309 e If the angle measure setting is degrees sets the increment between consecutive values of the independent variable to 7 5 Returns the display to the previous zoom or if there has been only one zoom displays the graph with the original plot settings You can step through the table of evaluations in Numeric view by pressing 4 or You can also quickly jump to an evaluation by entering the independent variable of interest in the independent variable column and tapping EEB For example suppose in the Symbolic view of the Function app you have defined F1 X as X 1 3 Suppose further that you want to know what the value of that function is when X is 625 1 Open Numeric view 2 Anywhere in the independent column the left most column enter 625 An introduction to HP apps Custom tables Deleting data An introduction to HP apps 3 Top EEB Numeric view is refreshed with the value you entered in the first row and the result of the evaluation in a cell to the right In this example the result is 389373 Big Defn Width If you choose Automatic for the NUMTYPE setting the table of evaluations in Numeric view will follow the settings in the Numeric Setup view That is the independent variable will start with the NUMSTART setting and increment by the NUMSTEP setting These settings a
247. ees 164 8 Spreadsheet Getting started with the Spreadsheet app ccccsseeeceeeeeee es 171 Basic ODElONONS x csvascrscwate dr e ee a 175 Navigation selection and gestures cccccesseeeeceeseeeeeees 175 Celi MCI ONe NCOs ts akeus sein sree E N sens oases 176 Cell NAMNE errean a ced ease eae N 176 Entering content sseseseesesesseseseesesesseseseeseseserseserseseese gt 177 Copy and Pasie ssar aa tsi 180 External references ccccccccceseeeccceeeueeeeeeesseeseceeueeeeeseeaenes 180 Referencing variables ccccccssecccccesseeecceesseeeeeeeseneeees 181 BUM OMS GNC KEYS enpera aad aida iatbenaaediatine ais 183 FOF MOMING Cpl ONS useka sect E a iacects moescureusteceadas 184 Spreadsheet MUNCHONSs carciinseinhaceasiudanimsns cues nen eaaciaenvaeadaaads 186 9 Statistics 1Var app Getting started with the Statistics 1 Var app cseeeceeee aeons 187 Entering and editing statistical data ccecccceseeeeeeeeeeeee ees 191 Compuled SIGNSHES orau n n E AE 194 POMNO sie A AE deere een 195 PION TY DO Sen EAA 196 Setting up the plot Plot Setup view ccccccceeesseeeeeeees 197 Exploring NG graph eree e Eaa R 197 10 Statistics 2Var app Getting started with the Statistics 2Var app c cseeeceeeeeeees 199 Entering and editing statistical data cccceccceseeeeeeeeeeeeeees 204 Numeric view menu iteMS cccceecseceeeeceeeeeeeeeeaeeeeeenees 205 Defining a regression M
248. ence to where you would like the output to be placed Note if a range is specified it will limit the size of the output but can also change the orientation from vertical to horizontal if the range is wider than it is tall e Configuration is a string that controls what results are shown and what order they appear in An empty string will default to show all in default order including headers h if present the header cells will be created Z zX zXh zXm std e Input list is the list of input see Input Parameters below This can be a range reference a list of cell references or a simple list of values e Input Parameters SuccCount SampSize ConfLevel Example XXXXX The ConfZ1mean calculates the confidence interval for a two proportion Ztest Syntax Contz2orop oupuL Configuration input list 327 ConfT 1mean 328 Conrzazprop ouput configuration SuccCountl SuccCountZ Sampsizel SampSize2 ConfLevel e Output is a reference to where you would like the output to be placed Note if a range is specified it will limit the size of the output but can also change the orientation from vertical to horizontal if the range is wider than it is tall e Configuration is a string that controls what results are shown and what order they appear in An empty string will default to show all in default order including headers h if present the header cells will be created Z zX zXh z
249. endent column that is to be Edit v_ Dd Show Eval analyzed the set of definitions is second field is where you specify the column that has the frequencies of each data point and the third field Plotn is where you choose the type of plot that will Statistics 1Var app represent the data in Plot view Histogram Box and Whisker Normal Probability Line Bar or Pareto Symbolic view menu items The menu items you can tap on in Symbolic view are Menu item Purpose Copies the column variable or vari able expression to the entry line for editing Tap sill when done analysis H1 H5 for exploration Selects or deselects a statistical Enters D directly to save you having to press two keys Displays the current expression in textbook format in full screen view Tap when done Evaluates the highlighted expres sion resolving any references to other definitions To continue our example suppose that the heights of the rest of the students in the class are measured and that each one is rounded to the nearest of the five values first recorded Instead of entering all the new data in D1 we simply add another column D2 that holds the frequencies of our five data points in D1 Statistics 1 Var app 189 ie eer 6 Tap on Freq to the right of H1 or press to highlight the second H1 field 7 Enter the name of the column that you will 2 E Ploti Histogram
250. ent Modify the appearance of plots and the plot environment Not used Modify the appearance of plots and the plot environment Modify the appearance of plots and the plot environment Not used Modify the appearance of plots and the plot environment Modify the appearance of plots and the plot environment Not used Not used Numeric view The table below outlines what is done in the Numeric view of each app App Use the Numeric view to Advanced View a table of numbers generated by the Graphing open sentences selected in Symbolic view 66 An introduction to HP apps App Finance Function Geometry Inference Linear Explorer Linear Solver Parametric Polar Quadratics Explorer Sequence Solve Spreadsheet Statistics 1 Var Statistics 2Var Triangle Solver Trig Explorer An introduction to HP apps Use the Numeric view to Cont Enter values for time value of money calculations View a table of numbers generated by the functions selected in Symbolic view Perform calculations on the geometric objects drawn in Plot view Specify the statistics needed to perform the test selected in Symbolic view Not used Specify the coefficients of the linear equations to be solved View a table of numbers generated by the functions selected in Symbolic view View a table of numbers generated by the functions selected in Symbolic view Not used View a table of numbers generated
251. epresentation show the keys you can press to edit the integer Note that this doesn t change the result of the calculation in Home view The keys are or Shift these keys shift the bits one space to the left or right With each press the new integer represented appears in the Out field and in the hex and decimal fields below it lt or Bits these keys increase or decrease the wordsize The new wordsize is appended to the value shown in the Out field Neg returns the two s complement that is each bit in the specified wordsize is inverted and one is added The new integer represented appears in the Out field and in the hex and decimal fields below it lt J or bas Cycle base displays the integer in the Out field in another base Menu buttons provide some additional options GEE returns all changes to their original state 517 ES cycles through the bases same as pressing ERE toggles the wordsize between signed and unsigned Mews returns the one s complement that is each bit in the specified wordsize is inverted a O is replaced by 1 anda 1 by O The new integer represented appears in the Out field and in the hex and decimal fields below it GTB activates edit mode A cursor appear sand you can move abut the dialog using the cursor keys The hex and decimal fields can be modified as can the bit representation A change in one such field automatically modifies the other
252. er Zoom options are available from three sources e the keyboard e the menu in Plot view the Views menu EB There are two zoom keys pressing zooms in and pressing zooms out The extent of the scaling is determined by the ZOOM FACTOR settings explained above An introduction to HP apps Zoom menu In Plot view tap and tap an option If is not displayed tap GUE E The zoom options are explained in the following table Examples are provided on Zoom examples on page 81 Option Center on Cursor Box In Out X In X Out Y In Y Out Square An introduction to HP apps Result Redraws the plot so that the cursor is in the center of the screen No scaling occurs Explained in Box zoom on page 80 Divides the horizontal and vertical scales by X Zoom and Y Zoom values set with the Set Factors option explained on page 78 For instance if both zoom factors are 4 then zooming in results in 1 4 as many units depicted per pixel Shortcut press Multiplies the horizontal and vertical scales by the X Zoom and Y Zoom settings Shortcut press kz Divides the horizontal scale only using the X Zoom setting Multiplies the horizontal scale only using the X Zoom setting Divides the vertical scale only using the Zoom setting Multiplies the vertical scale only using the Y Zoom setting Changes the vertical scale to match the horizontal scale Th
253. er 3 The two histories in Home view are e non RPN visible if you have chosen algebraic or textbook as your preferred entry technique e RPN visible only if you have chosen RPN as your preferred entry technique The RPN history is also called the stack As shown in the illustration below each entry in the stack is given a number This is the stack level number Geometry seared COS 25 547 5 1 23 2 SIN 45 TAN 52 6 90417590732 20 3715487875 As more calculations are added an entry s stack level number increases If you switch from RPN to algebraic or textbook entry your history is not lost It is just not visible If you switch back to RPN your RPN history is redisplayed Likewise if you switch to RPN your non RPN history is not lost When you are not in RPN mode your history is ordered chronologically oldest calculations at the top most recent at the Reverse Polish Notation RPN Re using results Re using calculations bottom In RPN mode your history is ordered chronologically by default but you can change the order of the items in history This is explained in Manipulating the stack on page 47 There ate two ways to re use a result in history Method 1 deselects the copied result after copying method 2 keeps the copied item selected Method 1 1 Select the result to be copied You can do this by pressing or until the result is highlighted or by tapping on it 2 Pr
254. er algebra system CAS CAS view A computer algebra system CAS enables you to perform symbolic calculations By default CAS works in exact mode giving you infinite precision On the other hand non CAS calculations such as those performed in HOME view or by an aplet are numerical calculations and are often approximations limited by the precision of the calculator to 10 in the case of the HP Prime For example TE yields the approximate answer 619047619047 in Home view with Standard numerical format but yields the exact answer in the CAS The CAS offers many hundreds of functions covering algebra calculus equation solving polynomials and more You select a function from the CAS menu one of the Toolbox menus discussed in chapter 20 Functions and commands beginning on page 283 Consult that chapter for a description of all the CAS functions and commands CAS calculations are done Function in CAS view CAS view is almost identical to Home view A history of calculations is built and you can select and copy previous calculations just as you can in Home view as well as store objects in variables To open CAS view press GJ CAS appears in red at the left of the title bar to indicate that you are in CAS view rather than Home view _ Sto gt simplif The menu buttons in CAS view are SEB assigns an object to a variable Computer algebra system CAS 51 Ei applies common simplificatio
255. er arithmetic is 16 hexadecimal To change the default base 1 Display the Home Settings screen 2 Choose the base you want A from the Integers menu Angle Measure Radians Number Format Standard Binary Octal Decimal Entry Textbook or Hex Integers v Binary 3 Complex Octal 3 The field to the right of MPSS Decimal Language Hey Integers is the wordsize Decimal Mark Dot field This is the maximum Choose the default base for integers es Paen t number of bits that can represent an integer The default value is 32 but you can change it any value between 1 and 64 4 Ifyou want to allow for signed integers select the option to the right of the wordsize field Choosing this option reduces the maximum size of an integer to one bit less than the wordsize Integer arithmetic 515 Examples of integer arithmetic The operands in integer arithmetic can be of the same base or of mixed bases Integer calculation 10000b 10100b 1100b 71 o 10100b 450 4Dh 11101b 8B9h 32Ah 50 A2h Mixed base arithmetic With one exception where you have operands of different bases the result of the calculation is presented in the base of the first operand The example at the right shows two equivalent calculations the first multiplies 4 9 by 5719 and the Decimal equivalent 8 20 28 57 20 37 TT R27 22233 810 5 162 Function coal 4h 710 E4h 710 4h
256. ere is no ROLLDIE function exported from another program Instead ROLLDIE is visible only to ROLLMANY The ROLLDIE function must be declared before it is called The first line of the program above contains the declaration of the ROLLDIE function The definition of the ROLLDIE function is located at the end of the program Finally the list of results could be returned as the result of calling ROLLMANY instead of being stored directly in the global list variable L2 This way if the user wanted to store the results elsewhere it could be done easily Programming EXPORT ROLLMANY n sides BEGIN LOCAL k roll results MAKELIST 0 X 1 2 sides 1 Presults BOR k FROM 1 TO n DO ROLLDIE sides ROLLDIE sides Proll results roll lhresults roll END RETURN results END In Home view you would enter ROLLMANY 100 6 gt L5 and the results of the simulation of 100 rolls of two six sided dice would be stored in list L5 The User Keyboard Customizing key presses User mode Programming You can assign alternative functionality to any key on the keyboard including to the functionality provided by the shift and alpha keys This enables you to customize the keyboard to your particular needs For example you could assign to a function that is multi nested on a menu and thus difficult to get to on a menu such as ALOG A customized keyboard is called the user keyboard and you activate it when you go into user mode
257. ess _ t _ The result is copied to the entry line and is deselected Method 2 1 Select the result to be copied You can do this by pressing or until the result is highlighted or by tapping on it 2 Tap and select ECHO The result is copied to the entry line and remains selected Although it might appear that only the result of the previous calculation is copied to the entry line the calculation that produced that result is copied as well and becomes part of the new calculation This is so regardless of the method chosen to copy the item Note that while you can copy an item from the CAS history to use in a Home calculation and copy an item from the Home history to use in a CAS calculation you cannot copy items from or to the RPN history You can however use CAS commands and functions when working in RPN mode As well as re using results discussed in the previous section you can copy an entire calculation The copy is placed on stack level 1 and thus can easily be incorporated in your next calculation You can also move an item to stack level 1 These changes to the stack are explained in Manipulating the stack on page 47 Sample calculations The general philosophy behind RPN is that arguments are placed before operators The arguments can be on the entry line Reverse Polish Notation RPN 45 each separated by a space or they can be in history For example to multiply n by 3 you could enter Pe E
258. ession is false and the second expression is true Returns O otherwise xor Expr1 Expr2 Used with display to specify the color of the geometrical object to be displayed Applies a bivariate function to the elements of two lists Without the default value its length is the minimum of the lengths of the two lists and the shorter list is padded with the default value Functions and commands 10 IA IV zip Fnc2d f Lst 11 Lst 12 Val default Substitutes a value for a variable in an expression Expr Var v1 value al v2 a2 Returns the square of an expression Expr Inserts pi What does this one do Inserts a template for a partial derivative expression Inserts a template for a summation expression Inserts a minus sign Inserts a square root sign Inserts a template for an antiderivative expression Inserts a not equal to sign Inserts a less than or equal to sign Inserts a greater than or equal to sign Evaluates the expression then stores the result in variable var Note that cannot be used with the graphics GO G9 See the command BLIT expression P var Inserts the imaginary number i Returns the inverse of an expression Expr 7 Creating your own functions Functions and commands You can create your own function by writing a program see chapter 26 or by using the simpler DEFINE functionality Functions you create yourself appear on the User menu one of the Toolbox menus
259. et c 57 153844 PR 743 46115 PX 17 439639 sx 804 14103 sx 16 755463 280 74554 4 836885 t X STAT1 B1 A25 A37 Functions and commands SUM AVERAGE AMORT Functions and commands For example STAT1 B1 HUX A25 A37 produces the following output A B C STATI 76267 z 5866 69 a STATI B1 H2x 25 A37 EDIT FRMAT GOTO __ _cory SHOW J Calculates the sum of a range of numbers SUM input For example AVERAGE B7 B23 returns the arithmetic mean of the numbers in the range B7 to B23 You can also specity a block of cells as in AVERAGE B7 C23 An error is returned if a cell in the specified range contains a non numeric object Calculates the arithmetic mean of a range of numbers AVERAGE input For example AVERAGE B7 B23 returns the arithmetic mean of the numbers in the range B7 to B23 You can also specity a block of cells as in AVERAGE B7 C23 An error is returned if a cell in the specified range contains a non numeric object Calculates the principal interest and balance of a loan over a specified period AMORT Range pmt ppyr 12 beg false ooniig ration ny 1 cpyr ppyrf fix current PV Grouping ppyr Range is the cell range where the results will be placed If only one cell is specified the range of cells is automatically calculated e Configuration is a string that determines what information wi
260. et the exact coordinates of a point by entering the point and pressing __ _ Another example if you can get the formula for a line just by entering its name or the center point and radious of a circle just by entering the name of the circle To have a calculation made in Numeric view appear in Plot view just highlight it in Numeric view and tap GM A checkmark appears beside the calculation Repeat the procedure to prevent the calculation being displayed in Plot view The checkmark is cleared Highlight the calculation you want to delete Top GE Make your change and tap Highlight the calculation you want to delete 2 Tap GEES Geometry To delete all calculations press E3 Note that deleting a calculation does not delete any objects from Plot or Symbolic view Geometric objects Points Point Geometry The geometric objects discussed in this section are those that can be created in Plot view Objects can also be created in Symbolic view more in fact than in Plot view but these are discussed in Geometry functions and commands on page 151 In Plot view you choose a drawing tool to draw an object The tools are listed in this section Note that once you select a drawing tool it remains selected until you deselect it This enables you to quickly draw a number of objects of the same type such as a number of circles To deselect the current drawing tool press EM You can tell if a drawing
261. ether or not a given integer is a prime number isprime Intg a Functions and commands Nth Prime Next Prime Previous Prime Euler Division Quotient Remainder a MOD p Chinese Remainder Polynomial Find Roots Coefficients Divisors Functions and commands Returns the nth prime number less than 10000 ithprime Intg n Returns the next prime or pseudo prime after an integer nextprime Intg a Returns the prime or pseudo prime number closest to but smaller than an integer prevprime Intg a Compute s Euler s totient for an integer euler Intg n Returns the integer quotient of the Euclidean division of two integers iquo Intg a Intg b Returns the integer remainder from the Euclidean division of two integers irem Intg a Intg b Returns a modulo p in 0 p 1 powmod Intg a Intg n Intg p Expr P x Var Returns the Chinese remainder of two lists of integers Lchanrem Lstintg ayo Lstintg b q Returns all computed roots of a polynomial given by its coefficients It may not work if roots are not simple proot Vect Poly With an integer as third argument returns the coefficient of a polynomial of degree given in the third argument With no third argument returns the list of coefficients of the polynomial coeff Expr Var degree Returns the list of divisors of a polynomial or a list of polynomials 307
262. eturning to 18 detine your own fit 160 defining functions 325 definite integral definition of 306 degree symbol 18 delete 18 delete an app 82 deleting lists 336 matrices 346 notes 364 programs 386 statistical data 146 158 derivatives definition of 306 determinant 355 display annunciator line 12 clearing 11 engineering 28 fixed 28 traction 28 history 35 line 35 matrices 349 one element in a list 338 one element in a matrix 349 parts of 12 scientific 28 soft key labels 12 standard 28 divide 299 Index DMS format 18 drawing commands 414 421 E editing lists 333 matrices 346 notes 363 programs 385 editors 39 Eigen values 356 Eigen vectors 356 element storing 350 engineering number format 28 entry methods 31 equations definition of 133 Explorer apps 217 exponent tit 159 minus 1 313 raising to 302 exponential 300 expression definition of 480 extremum 130 F tactorial 319 Finance app 203 Finance app variables Numeric view 449 451 summary 494 tinding statistical values 343 tixed number format 28 flick 14 format hexagesimal 22 fractions 37 tull precision display 28 function definition of 480 entering 32 Index syntax 306 Function app 119 Function app functions 460 Function app variables results 456 summary 485 functions app 502 area 128 creating your own 325 definition of 119 intersection point 127 Math menu 497 slope 128 tracing 122 G Geome
263. ew aN Statistics IVar app J 1Var app Select Statistics 1Var 0 Enter value or expression Fegit ins size Make stats_ Clear 2 If there is unwanted data in the app clear it unwanted All columns data Enter data 3 In column D1 enter Statistics 1Var Numeric View the boiling points found during the experiments 82 J5 83E CF 82 J Enter value or expression 83L 7 82 J4 83 Calculate 4 Calculate statistics statistics Inference app 219 Open the Inference app Select inference method and Type Import the data 220 The statistics calculated will now be imported into the Inference app 5 Tap to close the statistics window 6 Open the Inference app and clear the current settings Select Inference 7 Tap on the Method field and select Confidence Interval 8 Tap on Type and select T Int lu 9 Open Numeric view Num amp 4Setup SX 4 875107E 1 ox 4 450343E 1 6 __ size column ok Inference Symbolic View seen Method Hypothesis test v Type Z Test 1 p v Alt Hypoth u lt uo v Choose an inferential method Inference Symbolic View acan Method Confidence interval K Type Z Int 1 p v Choose an inferential method Inference Symbolic View uen Method Confidence interval v Type Choose a distribution statistic merre 10 Specif
264. exclude any values you suspect are outliers Exploring the graph Statistics 1Var app The Plot view B has zooming and tracing options as well as coordinate display The Autoscale option is available from the View menu E as well as the menu he View menu also enables you to view graphs in split screen mode as explained on page 81 197 Plot view buttons menu items The menu items you can tap on in Plot view are Button Purpose Displays the Zoom menu Turns trace mode on or off See Zoom on page 90 Displays the definition of the current statistical plot Shows or hides the menu 198 Statistics 1 Var app 10 Statistics 2Var app The Statistics 2Var app can store up to ten data sets at one time It can perform two variable statistical analysis of one or more sets of data The Statistics 2Var app starts with the Numeric view which is used to enter data The Symbolic view is used to specify which columns contain data and which column contains frequencies You can also compute statistics in Home and in the Spreadsheet app The values computed in the Statistics 2Var app are saved in variables These can be referenced in Home view and in other apps Getting started with the Statistics 2Var app The following example uses the advertising and sales data in the table below In the example you will enter the data compute summary statistics fit a curve to the data and predict the effect of more adver
265. exp 350 halftan hyp2exp ExprTrig Used in programming to go into step by step debugging mode Returns the Hamming distance between two integers hamdist Intg Intg Returns the harmonic conjugate of three points or of three parallel or concurrent lines or returns the line of conjugates of a point with respect to two lines harmonic conjugate Line or Pnt Line or Pnt Line or Pnt With three points and a variable as arguments returns four points that are in a harmonic division With three lines and a variable as arguments returns four lines that are in a harmonic division harmonic division Pnt or Line Pnt or line Pat or Line Var Returns 1 if a variable is in an expression and returns O otherwise has Expr Var Returns the first element of a given vector sequence or string head Vect or Seg or Str Returns the value of the Heaviside function for a given real i e 1 if x gt 0 and O if x lt 0 Heaviside Real Draws a hexagon of side AB in the plane ABP The other four corners of the hexagon are named according to the given in the third fourth fifth and sixth arguments hexagon Pnt or Cplx A Pnt or Cp1x B Cente dig Var C Var D Var Cho s Var F Returns a point Al such that vect C A 1 k vect C A homothety Pnt C Real k Pnt A Returns an expression with hyperbolic terms rewritten as exponentials hyp2exp ExprHyperb Functions and commands hyperbola iabc
266. expr var ivalue times For times repeatedly evaluate expr in terms of var beginning with var ivalue Example ITERATE X 2 X 2 3 returns 256 Syntax TICKS Returns the internal clock value in milliseconds Syntax TIME program_name Returns the time in milliseconds required to execute the program program_name The results are stored in the variable TIME The variable TICKS is similar It contains the number of milliseconds since boot up 491 Variables and Programs App variables 492 The HP Prime has four types of variables Home variables App variables CAS variables and User variables You can retrieve these variables from the Variable menu s55 Home variables are used for real numbers complex numbers graphics lists and matrices among other things Home variables keep the same value in Home and in apps App variables are those whose values depend on the current app The app variables are used in programming to represent the definitions and settings you make when working with apps interactively CAS variables are exactly the same as Home variables except that they are used only when doing CAS operations They can however be called by commands in Home view The names for CAS variables mirror those for Home variables except that they must be lowercase User variables are variables created by the user or exported from a user program They provide one of several mechanisms to allow programs to
267. f cells by moving to a corner cell tapping and using the cursor keys to move to the diagonally opposite cell Tapping on or another cell deselects the selection 175 Cell references Cell naming Method 1 Method 2 Using names in calculations 176 You can refer to the value of a cell in formulas as if it were a variable A cell is referenced by its column and row coordinates and references can be absolute or relative An absolute reference is written as C R where C is the column number and R the row number Thus B 7 is an absolute reference In a formula it will always refer to the data in cell BZ wherever that formula or a copy of it is placed On the other hand B7 is a relative reference It is based on the relative position of cells Thus a formula in say B8 that references B7 will reference C7 instead of B7 if it is copied to C8 Ranges of cells can also be specified as in C6 E12 as can entire columns E E or entire rows 3 5 Note that the alphabetic component of column names can be uppercase or lowercase except for columns g m and z These must be in lowercase if not preceded by Thus cell B1 can be referred to as B1 b1 B 1 or b 1 whereas M1 can only be referred to as m1 m 1 or M 1 G L M and Z are names reserved for graphic objects lists matrices and complex numbers Cells blocks of cells rows and columns can be named The name can then be used in a formula A named cell or block of
268. f decimal places to 3 Press and select Geometry If there are objects showing that you don t need press and confirm your intention by tapping Eeli Select the type of graph you want to plot In this example we are plotting a simple sinusoidal function so choose gt Plot gt Function With plotfunc on the entry line enter 3 sin x 3 e Note that x must be entered in lowercase in the Geometry app If your graph doesn t resemble the illustration at the right adjust the X Rng and Y Rng values in Plot Setup view E E We ll now add a point Ponar es 2 42 to the curve a point that will be constrained always to follow the contour of the curve Tap and select Point On Choosing Point On rather than Point means that the point will be constrained to whatever it is placed on Tap anywhere on the graph press and then press B3 Notice that a point is added to the graph and given a name B in this example Tap a blank Pointer GAGE area of the screen to deselect everything Objects colored cyan are selected Geometry Add a tangent Create a derivative point Geometry 8 10 1 12 13 14 15 We will now add a tangent to the curve making point B the point of tangency gt More gt Tangent Tap on point B press and then press B3 A tangent is drawn through point B Depending on where you placed point B your i
269. f sin and cos exp2trig Expr Returns an expression with exponentials in expanded form expexpand Expr Returns an expression with arcsin x rewritten as pi 2 arccos x asin2acos Expr Returns an expression with arcsin x rewritten as arctan x sqri I x 2 asin2atan Expr Returns an expression with sin x rewritten as cos x tan x Ssin2costan Expr Functions and commands Cosine acosx asinx acosx gt atanx cosx gt sinx tanx Tangent atanx asinx atanx acosx tanx gt sinx cosx halftan Irig trigx gt sinx trigx gt cosx trigx gt tanx Functions and commands Returns an expression with arccos x rewritten as pi 2 arcsin x acos2asin Expr Returns an expression with arccos x rewritten as pi 2 arctan x sart 1 x 2 acos2atan Expr Returns an expression with cos x rewritten as sin x tan x cos2sintan Expr Returns an expression with arctan x rewritten as arcsin x sqrt 1 x 2 atan2asin Expr Returns an expression with arctan x rewritten as pi 2 arccos x sqrt 1 x 2 atan2acos Expr Returns an expression with tan x rewritten as sin x cos x tan2sincos Expr Returns an expression with sin x cos x or tan x rewritten as tan x 2 halftan Expr Returns an expression simplified using the formulas sin x 2 cos x 2 1 and tan x sin x cos x privileging sine Erao6 11 Excpr Returns an expression
270. f students in a classroom to find the mean height The first five students have the following measurements 160 cm 165 cm 170 cm 175 cm and180 cm l Open the Statistics Statistics 1Var Numeric View 1 D1 D2 D3 D4 1Var app Select Statistics 1Var 2 Enter the measurement data in Enter value or expression colma DE Edit Ins Size Make Stats 187 188 160 ee Statistics 1Var Numeric View ll 170 Enter 175 Enter 180 Find the mean of the m Enter value or expression sample Tap fo see x r n the statistics Min Q1 calculated from the ne Max sample data in D ne The mean x is 170 amp SX There are more a statistics than can be EDR GDE Ca displayed on one screen Thus you may need to scroll to see the statistic you are after Note that the title of the column of statistics is H1 There are 5 data set definitions available for one variable statistics H1 H5 If data is entered in D1 H1 is automatically set to use D1 for data and the frequency of each data point is set to 1 You can select other columns of data from the Symbolic view of the app Tap to close the statistics window Symb Press to see the Statistics 1Var Symbolic View data set definitions Y ei___ Frea E Ploti Histogram The first field in each 2 E Plot2 Histogram H3 where you specify E Plot3 Histogram the column of data bat Enter indep
271. f the functions on the Math menu can be incorporated into a definition The Math menu is one of the Toolbox menus 3 The following definition combines a math function Size with a Home variable 11 F4 X X SIZE L1 It is equivalent to x n where n is the number of elements in the list named L1 Size is an option on the List menu which is a sub menu of the Math menu From CAS functions Some of the functions on the CAS menu can be incorporated into a definition The CAS menu is one of the Toolbox menus The following definition incorporates the CAS function irem F5 X X2 CAS irem 45 7 irem is entered by choosing Remainder an option on the Division menu which is a sub menu of the Integer menu Note that any CAS command or function selected to operate outside the CAS is given the CAS prefix From app functions Some of the functions on the App menu can be incorporated into a definition The App menu is one of the Toolbox menus A The following definition incorporates the app function Predy F9 X X Statistics 2Var PredY 6 From the Catlg menu Some of the functions on the Catlg menu can be incorporated into a definition The Catlg menu is one of the Toolbox menus The following definition incorporates 73 a command from that menu and an app variable F6 X X INT Root The integer value of the last root calculated in the Function app is substituted for INT Root when this definition is eva
272. f values e Input Parameters SampMean SampSize PopStdDevm ConfLevel Example XXXXX 325 ConfZ2mean The ConfZ2mean calculates the confidence interval for a two sample Ztest Syntax ConfZ2mean ouput configuration input list ConfZ2mean ouput configuration SampMeanl SampMean2 SampSizel SampSize2 PopStdDevl PopStdDev2 ConfLevel e Output is a reference to where you would like the output to be placed Note if a range is specified it will limit the size of the output but can also change the orientation from vertical to horizontal if the range is wider than it is tall e Configuration is a string that controls what results are shown and what order they appear in An empty string will default to show all in default order including headers h if present the header cells will be created Z zX zXh zXm std e Input list is the list of input see Input Parameters below This can be a range reference a list of cell references or a simple list of values nput Parameters SampMean 1 SampMean2 SampSize l SampSize2 PopStdDev PopStdDev 2 ConfLevel Example XXXXX 326 Functions and commands ContfZ1prop ConfZ2prop Functions and commands The ContZ1 prop calculates the confidence interval for a one proportion Ztest Syntax ConrtZzlprop cuput Conriguration input list Contzlprop ouput configuration SuccCount SampSize ConfLevel e Output is a refer
273. finition as you entered it in Symbolic view appears at the bottom of the screen E s1 aT X2 7 X Y 3 2 X Y 8 Tap Edit p Sag ta ate ee The definition isnow Ql GGG eEESETTS editable 9 Change the lt to and tap Notice that the graph changes to match the new definition The ES X2 7 X Y 3 Y X Y definition in Symbolic t5100 COrIERDEREBII view also changes 10 Tap to drop the definition to the bottom of the screen so that you can see the full graph The definition is converted from textbook mode to algebraic mode to save screen space Trace a This functionality is not available as of build 3015 graph Display the 11 Press to display the X Numeric Numeric view view Unlike in many other apps the Numeric view in the Advanced Graphing app does not give a table of values py pp generated by the definitions selected in Symbolic view Instead for various combinations of x and y Numeric view shows whether the open sentence is satisfied ssssssssses ONDRAR UN Explore 12 With the cursor in the X column type a new value and Numeric T The table scrolls to the value you entered view You can also enter a value in the Y column and tap Press and O to move between the columns in Numeric view Advanced Graphing app 121 Set up Numeric view 122 13 You can also zoom in or out on the X variable or Y variable ther
274. following steps illustrate part of a the process program 1 Open the Program Catalog 2 Tap the program that has the code you want to copy 3 Press Copy The menu buttons change to give you options for copying ERT Marks where the copying or cutting is to begin GET Marks where the copying or cutting is to end GE Select the entire program ATE Cut the selection ENB Copy the selection Select what you want to copy or cut using the options listed immediately above 5 Top EIB or ETB 6 Return to the Program Catalog and open the target program Move the cursor to where you want to insert the copied or cut code Press Paste The clipboard opens What you most recently copied or cut will be first in the list and highlighted already so just tap QM The code will be pasted into the program beginning at the cursor location Delete a To delete a program program 1 Open the Program Catalog 2 Highlight a program to delete and press 8 J 3 At the prompt tap Programming to delete the program or ee to cancel 449 Delete all programs Delete the contents of a program To share a program To delete all programs at once 1 Open the Program Catalog 2 Press Clear 3 At the prompt tap to delete all programs or to cancel You can clear the contents of a program without deleting the program The program then just has a name and nothing else 1 Open the Progr
275. for u Two Sample Z Interval Menu name Inputs 230 Z lnt u u2 This option uses the Normal Zdistribution to calculate a confidence interval for the difference between the means of two populations u u when the population standard deviations 6 and ov are known The inputs are Field Definition name Xi Sample 1 mean X gt Sample 2 mean ny Sample 1 size ns Sample 2 size on Population 1 standard deviation O gt Population 2 standard deviation Inference app Field Definition name Confidence level Results The results are set posero Confidence level Critical Z Critical values for Z Lower Lower bound for A u Upper Upper bound for Au One Proportion Z Interval Menu name ZInt 17 This option uses the Normal Zdistribution to calculate a confidence interval for the proportion of successes in a population for the case in which a sample of size n has a number of successes x Inputs The inputs are Field Definition name Sample success count Sample size Confidence level Results The results are C Confidence level Critical Z Critical values for Z Lower Lower bound for x Inference app 231 test onp Upper bound for x Two Proportion Z Interval Menu name Z nt 11 19 This option uses the Normal Zdistribution to calculate a confidence interval for the difference between the proportions of successes in two populations Inputs The inputs are Sa
276. four data points to provide valid two variable statistics Whichever method you use the data you enter is automatically saved You can leave this app and come back to it later You will find that the data you last entered is still available After entering the data you must define data sets and the way they are to be plotted in Symbolic view Statistics 2Var app Numeric view menu items The buttons you can tap on in Numeric view are aa ae Copies the highlighted item to the entry line Edit a data set Delete data Insert data Statistics 2Var app Inserts a new cell above the highlighted cell and gives it a value of 0 Opens an input form for you to choose to sort the data in various ways Displays a menu for you to choose the small font medium font or large font Opens an input form for you to create a sequence based on an expression and to store the result in a specified data column See Generating data on page 193 Calculates statistics for each data set selected in Symbolic view See Computed statistics on page 208 In Numeric view highlight the data to change type a new value and press __e _ You can also highlight the data tap QB make your change and tap GE To delete a data item highlight it and press 8 The values below the deleted cell will scroll up one row e To delete a column of data highlight an entry in that column and press E3 Clear Select the c
277. from the last result This is explained in To reuse the last result on page 37 To raise a negative number to a power enclose it in parentheses For example 5 25 whereas 5 25 Implied multiplication takes place when two operands appear with no operator between them If you enter AB for example the result is A B Notice in the example on page 34 that we entered 148 8 without the multiplication operator atter 14 For the sake of clarity the calculator adds the operator to the expression in history but it is not strictly necessary when you are entering the expression You can though enter the operator if you wish as was done in the examples on page 35 The result will be the same If the result of a calculation is too long to fit on the display line in history you can press to scroll the display to the right Pressing scrolls the display to the left If the result is too tall to be seen in its entirety for example a many rowed matrix highlight it and then press IMB The result is displayed in full screen view You can now press and as well as and to bring hidden parts of the result into view Tap to return to the previous view Reusing previous expressions and results 36 Being able to retrieve and reuse an expression provides a quick way of repeating a calculation that requires only a few minor changes to its parameters You can retrieve and reuse any expression that i
278. g from radians to Variables Retrieving variables Qualifying variables Variables degrees by entering 1 HAngle in Home view Entering O HAngle forces the setting to return to radians What are the allowable attributes for the other settings You can see what value has been assigned to a variable built in or user detined by entering its name in Home view and pressing __ You can enter the name letter by letter or choose the variable from the Variables menu The Variables menu is Advanced Graphing 19 84 opened by tapping 5J There are four sub Home Vars menus covering Home CAS app and user variables Home variables are the built in variables set by what you do in Home view or by the settings you choose on the Home Settings screen Some examples are HAngle and Base App variables are also built in but they are set by what you do in an app Some examples are XMax and Slope The CAS variables and user variables are those you create yourself If you want to retrieve just the value of a variable and not its name tap RESES before you select the variable from a Variables menu Some variables are common to more than one app For example the Function app has a variable named Xmin but so too does the Polar app the Parametric app the Sequence app and the Solve app Likewise the X variable is common to both the Statistics 1 Var and Statistics 2Var apps Although named identically these varia
279. g str If O lt n lt dim str shifts n places to left If dim str lt n lt 1 shifts n spaces to right If n gt dim str or n lt dim str returns str Examples rotate 12345 2 returns 34512 rotate 12345 1 returns 51234 rotate 12345 6 returns 12345 Syntax STRINGFROMID integer Returns in the current language the built in string associated in the internal string table with the specified integer Examples STRINGFROMID 56 returns Complex STRINGFROMID 202 returns Home Vars Syntax REPLACE object start object Programming Replaces part of object with object beginning at start The objects can be matrices vectors or stings Example REPLACE 12345 3 99 returns 12995 Drawing There are 10 built in graphics variables in the HP Prime called GO G9 GO is always the current screen graphic G1 to G9 can be used to store temporary graphic objects called GROBs for short when programming applications that use graphics They are temporary and thus cleared when the calculator turns off Twenty six functions can be used to modify graphics variables Thirteen of them work with Cartesian coordinates using the Cartesian plane defined in the current app by the variables Xmin Xmax Ymin and Ymax The remaining thirteen work with pixel coordinates where the pixel 0 0 is the top left pixel of the GROB and 255 126 is the bottom right Functions in this second set ha
280. ght the app Then either tap the app s icon or press to open if Sometimes a touch or key touch combination is available For example you can deselect a toggle option either by tapping twice on it or by using the arrow keys to move to the field and then tapping a touch button along the bottom of the screen in this case QM Note that you must use your finger to select an item by touch Using a stylus or something similar will not select whatever is touched In addition to selection by tapping there are other touch related operations available to you To quickly move from page to page flick Place a finger on the screen and quickly swipe it in the desired direction up or down Getting started The keyboard Getting started To pan drag your finger horizontally or vertically across the screen To quickly zoom in make an open pinch Place the thumb and a finger close together on the screen and move them apart Only lift them from the screen when you reach the desired magnification To quickly zoom out make an closed pinch Place the thumb and a finger some distance apart on the screen and move them toward each other Only lift them from the screen when you reach the desired magnification Note that pinching to zoom only works in applications that feature zooming such as where graphs are plotted In other applications pinching will do nothing or do something other than zooming For example in the Spre
281. ginning on page 399 These functions work on matrix data stored in matrix They are explained in detail in chapter 24 Matrices beginning on page 411 Returns the value of the beta function B for two reals a and b Beta a b 297 Gamma Psi Zeta ert erfc Ei Si Ci CAS menu 298 Returns the value of the gamma function I for a number a Gamma a Returns the value of the nth derivative of the digamma function at x a where the digamma function is the first derivative of In T x Psi a n Returns the value of the zeta function Z for a real x Zeta x Returns the floating point value of the error function at x a erf a Returns the value of the complementary error function at x a erfc a Returns the exponential integral of an expression Bi Expr Returns the sine integral of an expression Si Expr Returns the cosine integral of an expression Ci Expr Press to open the Statistics 1Var Toolbox menus one of which is the CAS menu The ae functions on the CAS menu 2Calculus 3Solve are those most commonly sRewrite SInteger used Many more functions are available See Ctlg macau beqtnning aE Lave T cue f ok 338 Note that the Geometry functions appear on the CAS menu when the Geometry app is currently active or was the last used app They are described in Geometry functions and commands beginning on page 151 Functions and commands Alg
282. glish 4 Tap on Scientific eee Dot Choose format for numbers The option is chosen GEDER and the menu closes You can also choose an item by pressing the cursor keys and pressing when the option you want is highlighted oe Notice that a number Home Settings acis appears to the right Angle Measure Radians 0 Number Format Scientific 1 of the Number i Entry Textbook Format field This iS Integers Hex 32 Ji the number of Complex atb 5 d Language English 6 sama P aces Decimal Mark Dot i CU rrentl set To Choose decimal places to display J a T change the number to 2 tap on it twice and then tap on 2 in the menu that appears 6 Press to return to Home view Mathematical calculations Where to start 32 The most commonly used math operations are available from the keyboard see Math keys on page 20 Access to the rest of the math functions is via various menus see Menus on page 25 0749 Note that the HP Prime represents 1 x 1 as well as all numbers smaller than this as zero The largest number displayed is 9 99999999999 x 10477 A greater result is displayed as this number The home base for the calculator is the Home view EA You can do all your non symbolic calculations here You can also do calculations in CAS view which uses the computer algebra system see chapter 3 Computer algebra system CAS starting on page 51 In fact you can us
283. gramming return a value of a function at a certain point return Expr Returns a list with the elements in reverse order revlist Lst With two points A and B and an angle a as arguments draws the rhombus ABCD such that the angle AB AD a With three points as arguments A B and P draws the rhombus ABCD in the plane ABP such that angle AB AD angle AB AP rhombus Pnt A Cp1x Pnt B Cplx Angle a P nt P Lst P a Var C Var D Functions and commands right_triangle romberg rotation row rowAdd rowDim rowSwap rsolve segment Functions and commands With two points A and B and a real k as arguments draws right angled triangle such ABC such that AC k AB With three points A B and P as arguments draws the right angled triangle ABC in the plane ABP and such that AC AP right triangle Pnt A or Cplx Pne 8 or Cp1x Real k or Pnt P or Lst P k Var C Uses Romberg s method to return the approximate value of the integral of the expression over the interval a to b romberg Expr f x Var x Real a Real b With a point B an angle al and another point A as arguments returns the result of rotating the second point by the angle about the center of rotation given by the first point With a line Dr3 an angle a1 and a curve as arguments returns the result of rotating the curve by the angle about the axis of rotation given by the line rotati
284. gression Lst L Real x0 Real y0 Returns a list of used in an expression lvar Expr Used with display to specify the color of the geometrical object to be displayed Applies a function to the elements of the list map Lst Fnc Returns the list of the terms of a matrix mat2list Mtrx Calculates the nth power of a matrix by jordanization matpow Mtrx Intg n Returns the maximum real number that the HP Prime is capable of representing 9 99999999999E499 Returns the arithmetic mean of a list with the second argument as pound or of the columns of a matrix What does the bit in parentheses mean mean Lst Mtrx Lst Returns the median of a list with the second argument as pound or of the columns of a matrix What does the bit in parentheses mean median Lst Mtrx Lst Draws the median line through A of the triangle ABC 355 member midpoint MINREAL MKSA modgcd mRow mult_c_conjugate mult_conjugate nDeriv 356 median line Pnt or Cplx A Pnt or Cplx B Pnt or Cplx C Tests if an element is in a list or set If the element is in the list or set returns the subsequent element If the element is not in the list or set returns O member Elem e Lst l or Set 1 Draws the midpoint of the line segment AB midpoint Pnt or Cplx A Pnt or Cplx A Returns the minimum real number that the HP Prime is capable of representing 1E4 99 Converts
285. haracters uppercase until the mode is reset With uppercase locked make next character lowercase With uppercase locked make all characters lowercase until the mode is reset Reset uppercase lock mode Make the next character lower case Lock mode make all characters lowercase until the mode is reset With lowercase locked make next character uppercase With lowercase locked make all characters uppercase until the mode is reset Reset lowercase lock mode The following table below describes how to quickly enter uppercase and lowercase characters ALPHA ALPHA ALPHA Shift C ALPHA Shift C alpha alpha Shift C alpha alpha alpha ALPHA 433 Text formatting Formatting Options 434 The left side of the notification area of the title bar will indicate what case will be applied to the character you next enter You can enter text in different formats in the Note Editor Choose a formatting option before you start entering text The formatting options are described in Formatting Options below Formatting options are available from three touch buttons in the Note Editor and in the Info view of an app m El E The formatting options are listed in the table below Category Options e 10 22 pt Font Size Select from twenty colors Foreground Color Select from twenty colors Background Color e Left Align e Center text alignment e Right e Bold Font Style e italic
286. hat the solution will occur With the optional fourth argument you can name the iterative algorithm to be used by the solver fsolve Expr Var Guess or Interval Method Returns the derivative function of a function function diff Fnc Using the Gauss algorithm returns the quadratic form of an expression written as a sum or difference of squares of the given in VectVar gauss Expr VectVar Returns the color of the pixel G with coordinates x y GETPIX P G xposition yposition G can be any of the graphics and is optional The default is GO the current graphic Creates a Galois Field of characteristic p with p n elements GF Intg p Intg n For a basis B of a vector subspace and a function Sp that defines a scalar product on this vector subspace returns an orthonormal basis for Sp gramschmidt Basis B ScalarProd Sp Used with display to specify the color of the geometrical object to be displayed Draws a half cone with vertex A direction v half angle t and if applicable height h half cone Pnt A Vect v Real t Real h Draws the half line AB with A as the origin half line Pnt or Cpilx A Pnt or Cpilix B Returns an expression with sin x cos x tan x rewritten in terms of tan x 2 and sinh x cosh x tanh x rewritten in terms of exp x 349 halt hamdist harmonic_ conjugate harmonic_division has head Heaviside hexagon homothety hyp2
287. he Finance app with TVMVar highlighted DoFinance TVMVar Example DoFinance FV returns the future value of an investment in the same way as tapping in the Numeric view of the Finance app with Fv highlighted Linear Solver app functions Solve2x2 334 The Linear Solver app has 3 functions that offer the user flexibility in solving 2x2 or 3x3 linear systems of equations Solves a 2x2 linear system of equations Solve2x2 a b c de f Functions and commands Solve3x3 LinSolve Solves the linear system represented by ax by c dx ey t Solves a 3x3 linear system of equations Solve3x3 a b c de fg h i j k I Solves the linear system represented by ax by cz d ex fy gz h ix jy kz l Solve linear system Solves the 2x2 or 3x3 linear system represented by matrix LinSolve matrix Example LinSolve A B C D E F solves the linear system ax by c dx ey f Triangle Solver app functions ASA Functions and commands The Triangle Solver app has a group of functions which allow solving a complete triangle from the input of three consecutive parts of the triangle The names of these commands use A to signify an angle and S to signify a side length To use these commands enter three inputs in the specified order given by the command name These commands all return a list of six items consisting of the three arguments entered with the command and the three unknown values lengths of sides and measure
288. he Plot view of many apps in the calculator see Zoom on page 78 Plot view buttons and keys Geometry Button or Purpose key page 78 Tools for creating various types of points See Points on page 141 Tools for creating various types of lines See Line on page 143 Tools for creating various types of polygons See Polygon on page 145 133 Button or Purpose Continued key Tools for creating various types of curves and plots See Curve on page 146 Transfor Tools for geometric transformations of vari ous kinds See Geometric transformations on page 148 Deletes a selected object or the character to the lett of the cursor if the entry line is active De activate the current drawing tool Bulls ESS Clears the Plot view of all geometric objects g Shortcut keys To quickly add an object and undo what you ve done See page 135 Plot Setup view 134 The Plot Set view enables Geometry Plot Setup you to configure the xRNGF13 5 8 YRNG 7 1 13 1 appearance of Plot view and T to take advantage of ES keyboard shortcuts The fields FUNCTION LABELS and options are SHORTCUTS X Rng Two fields for Enter minimum horizontal value entering the minimum and maximum x values thereby giving the default horizontal range As well as changing this range on the Geometry Plot Setup screen you can change it by panning and zooming Y Rng Two fields for e
289. he cursor You can see other statistics by pressing Yor The normal probability plot is used to determine whether or not sample data is more or less normally distributed The more linear the data appear the more likely that the data is normally distributed The line plot connects points of the form x y where x is the row number of the data point and y is its value Y 1 6448536270 Bae s7 Hatt 2 Statistics 1Var app Bar graph Pareto chart The bar graph shows the value of a data point as a vertical bar placed along the xaxis at the row number of the data point Han 2 A pareto chart places the fyo data in descending order and displays each with its percentage of the whole H1 180 of Total 26 47 Setting up the plot Plot Setup view Histogram width Histogram range The Plot Setup view Em EB enables you to specify many of the same plotting parameters as other apps such as X Rng and Y Rng There are two settings unique to the Statistics 1 Var app H Width enables you to specify the width of a histogram bar This determines how many bars will fit in the display as well as how the data is distributed that is how many values each bar represents H Rng enables you to specify the range of values for a set of histogram bars The range runs from the left edge of the leftmost bar to the right edge of the rightmost bar You can limit the range to
290. he data set 3 Start the Statistics 1Var app whose statistics you want to find Symb B L gt Setup By default H1 will use the data in D1 so nothing further needs to be done in Symbolic view However if the data Statistics 1Var Symbolic View V Plot1 Histogram H2 f Plot2 Histogram v H3 I Plot3 Histogram v H4 Enter independent column Edit v D show eval of interest were in D2 or any column other than D1 you would have to specify the desired data column here Calculate the statistics Num 6 4Setup Tap you are done See the chapter 9 Statistics 1 Var app sX 1 1232394 1 oX 1 025372661 C T sze Column ok beginning on page 187 for the meaning of each statistic 409 410 Lists Matrices 24 Vectors Matrices Matrix Variables Matrices You can perform matrix calculations in Home view and in programs The matrix and each row of a matrix appear in square brackets and the elements and rows are separated by commas For example the following matrix V23 456 is displayed in History as 1 2 3 4 5 6 You can enter matrices directly on the entry line or create them in the Matrix Editor Vectors are one dimensional arrays They are composed of just one row A vector is represented by single brackets for example 1 2 3 A vector can be a real number vector or a complex
291. he line_segments 1 line segment of the polyhedron P line segments Polygon or Polyedr P Draws the vertical line x a LineVert Expr a Draws an octahedron with center A vertex B and such that the plane ABC contains 4 vertices octahedron Pnt A Pnt B Pnt C Returns and draws the polygonal line where its vertices are the element of I open polygon LstPnt LstCplx orthogonal A line B C draws the orthogonal plane of line BC through A and orthogonal A plane B C D draws the orthogonal line of plan B C D through A orthogonal Pnt Line or Plan Draws a parallelepiped with sides AB AC AD the faces are parallelograms parallelepiped Pnt A Pnt B Pnt C Pnt D Displays at point zO with a legend the perimeter of a circle or of a polygon e g triangle square perimeterat Polygon Pnt Cplx z0 Displays at point zO the perimeter of a circle or of a polygon e g triangle square 167 plane polar polar_coordinates pole polyhedron powerpc prism 168 perimeteratraw Polygon Pnt Cplx z0 plane A B C or plane A line B C resp plane a x b y c z d 0 draws the plane ABC resp of equation a x b y c z d 0 in the 3 D space plane Pnt or Eg Pnt or Line Pnt Returns the line of the conjugated points of A with respect to the circle polar Crcle Pnt or Cplxe A Returns the list of the norm and of the argument of the aftix of a point
292. hiding the coordinates tap to hide the buttons Trace mode and coordinate display are automatically turned on when a plot is drawn If there is more than one plot displayed press or until the trace cursor is on the plot you are interested in One of the primary uses of the trace functionality is to evaluate a plotted definition Suppose in Symbolic view you have defined F1 X as X 1 2 3 Suppose further that you want to know what the value of that function is when X is 25 1 Open Plot view EB 2 Ifthe menu at the bottom of the screen is not open tap menu 3 If more than one definition is plotted ensure that the trace cursor is on the plot of the definition you want to evaluate You can press to see the definition of a plot and press or to move the trace cursor from plot to plot 4 If you pressed to see the definition of a plot the menu at the bottom of the screen will be closed Tap to re open it 5 Tap Gente Enter 25 and tap QS 7 Top EEM An introduction to HP apps The value of F1 x when X is 25 us shown at the bottom of the screen This is one of many ways the HP Prime provides for you to evaluate a function for a specific independent variable You can also evaluate a function in Numeric view see page 92 Moreover any expression you define in Symbolic view can be evaluated in Home view For example suppose F1 X is defined as x 1 3 If you enter F1 4 in Home view and
293. hronologically with the most recently used app shown first You can change the sort order to Alphabetically An introduction to HP apps 61 To delete an app Other options The app icons are sorted alphabetically by name and in ascending order A to Z e Fixed Apps are displayed in their default order Function Advanced Graphing Geometry Polar and Sequence Customized apps are placed at the end after all the built in apps They appear in chronological order oldest to most recent To change the sort order 1 Open the Application Library 2 Tap EIS 3 From the Sort Apps list choose the option you want The apps that come with the HP Prime are built in and cannot be deleted but you can delete an app you have created To delete an app 1 Open the Application Library 2 Use the cursor keys to highlight the app 3 Tap GEER 4 Tap to confirm your intention The other options available in the Application Library are Enables you to save a copy of an app under a new name See Creating an app on page 97 Enables you to send an app to another HP Prime See Sharing data on page 40 App views 62 Most apps have three major views Symbolic Plot and Numeric These views are based on the symbolic graphic and numeric representations of mathematical objects They are accessed through the eo E and keys near the top left of the keyboard Typically these views enable yo
294. ht the scale factor is 2 and the center of dilation is indicated by a point near the top right of the screen named Each point on the new triangle is in line with its corresponding point on the original triangle and point I Further the distance from point I 149 Rotation More Projection Inversion 150 to each new point will be twice the distance to the original point since the scale factor is 2 1 Tap and select Dilation 2 Tap the point that is to be the center of dilation and press 3 Enter the homothetic ratio that is the scale factor and press _ fur 4 Tap the object that is to be dilated and press er_ Rotates a specified object about a specified point a specified number of degrees or radians Not in Plot view but available in Symbolic view Broken as at May _18 Creates an projection of the points on one object onto another object The projection is orthogonal that is each projected point meets the object onto which it is projected at right angles 1 Tap and select Projection Broken as at 18 May 2 Tap the object onto which points are to be projected and press _ fur 3 Tap the object that is to projected and press fe _ Note the new points added to the target object Creates an inversion circle based on a specified center point inversion ratio and an inversion point on a line 1 Tap and select Inversion 2 Tap the point that is to be the center C of
295. iable named Slope Select Signed area to find the numeric integral If there are two or more expressions checkmarked then you will be asked to choose the second expression from a list that includes the x axis Select a starting point and an ending point The result is saved in a variable named SignedArea Select Intersection to find the intersection of the graph you are currently tracing and another graph You need to have at least two selected expressions in Symbolic view Finds the intersection closest to the tracing cursor Displays the coordinate values and moves the cursor to the intersection The resulting x value is saved in a variable named Isect Function app Advanced Graphing app The Advanced Graphing app enables you to define and explore the graphs of symbolic open sentences in x y both or neither You can plot conic sections polynomials in standard or general form inequalities and functions The following are examples of the sorts of open sentences you can plot l x 3 y 5 1 2 2x 3y lt 6 3 yMOD x 3 4 sin vx y 5 gt sin 8 atan x 5 x 4x 4 6 1 lt 0 The illustrations below show what these open sentences look like when plotted Example 1 Example 2 X 15 9 Y 0 Menu Advanced Graphing app 117 Example 3 Example 4 See Menu Example 5 Example 6 X 15 9 Y 0 Getting started with the Ad
296. ibed in the chapter dedicated to that app Symbolic view is typically used to define a function or open sentence that you want to explore by plotting and or evaluating In this section the term definition will be used to cover both functions and open sentences Press to open Symbolic view Add a definition With the exception of the Parametric app there are 10 fields for entering definitions In the Parametric app there are 20 fields two for each paired definition 1 Highlight an empty field you want to use either by tapping on it or scrolling to it 2 Enter your definition If you need help see Definitional building blocks on page 72 or press when you have finished An introduction to HP apps 71 Modify a definition iF 72 Your new definition is added to the list of definitions Note that variables used in definitions must be in uppercase A variable entered in lowercase will cause an error message to appear Highlight the definition you want to modify either by tapping on it or scrolling to it 2 Tap MIS The definition is copied to the entry line 3 Modify the definition 4 Tap or press when you have finished Definitional building blocks The components that make up a symbolic definition can come from a number of sources From the keyboard You can enter components directly from the keyboard To enter 2X 3 just press 2 AX Jf J3 From user variables If for examp
297. ible NOTE By dragging a finger horizontally or vertically across the screen you can quickly see parts of the plot that are initially outside the set x and y ranges This is easier than resetting the range of an axis Zoom options with numerous examples are explained in more detail in Zoom on page 78 Display 12 Display the Numeric Cx Fi Fd i pe Q Numeric view view Manm The Numeric view displays data generated by the expressions you i Width defined in Symbolic view For each expression selected in Symbolic view Numeric view displays the value that results when the expression is evaluated for various x values Set U 13 Display the Numeric Function Num Setup ata pray i iew NUMSTART Numeric Setup view pT 3 NUMSTEP 0 1 view Setup NUMTYPE Automatic NUMZOOM 4 You can set the starting value and step value that is the increment for Enter table start value the xcolumn as well as the zoom factor for zooming in or out on a row of the table Note that in Numeric view zooming does not affect the size of what is displayed Instead it changes the Num Step setting that is the increment between consecutive x values Zooming in Function app 107 Explore Numeric view To navigate around a table 108 14 15 16 17 decreases the increment zooming out increases the increment This is further explained in Zoom on page 90
298. ides RollDice and PlotResults instead of the app s default view list When an app is active its associated program appears as the first item in the Program Catalog It is within this program that you put functions to create a custom app A useful procedure for customizing an app is illustrated below 1 Decide on the HP app that you want to customize The customized app inherits all the properties of the HP app 2 Go to the Applications Library B highlight the HP app tap and save the app with a unique name 3 Customize the new app if you need to for example by configuring the axes or angle measure settings 4 Develop the functions to work with your customized app When you develop the functions use the app naming conventions described above 5 Put the VIEWS command in your program to modify the app s Views menu 6 Decide if your app will create new global variables If so you should EXPORT them from a separate user program that is called from the Start function in the app program This way they will not have their values lost 7 Test the app and debug the associated programs Programming Example Programming It is possible to link more than one app via programs For example a program associated with the Function app could execute a command to start the Statistics 1 Var app and a program associated with the Statistics 1 Var app could return to the Function app or launch any other app The
299. iew The plotting range is suitable Try pressing and selecting Autoscale or adjust the plotting parameters in Plot Setup view Ensure that both paired columns contain data and are of the same length Ensure that a paired column of frequency values is the same length as the data column to which it is associated 213 214 Statistics 2Var app 11 Inference app Example data The Inference app enables you to calculate confidence intervals and undertake hypothesis tests based on the Normal Zdistribution or Student s t distribution Based on statistics from one or two samples you can test hypotheses and find confidence intervals for the following quantities e mean e proportion e difference between two means difference between two proportions The Inference app comes with sample data which you can always restore by resetting the app This sample data is useful in helping you gain an understanding app The calculator s on line help provides a description of what the sample data represents Getting started with the Inference app Open the Inference app Let s conduct a ZTest on one mean using the sample data 1 Open the Inference app Apps Select Inference Symbolic View eai Inference Method Hypothesis test Type Z Test 1 p The Inference app Alt Hypoth u lt po opens in Symbolic view Choose an inferential method mer a Symbolic view options Inference app 215
300. if you were writing the expression on paper If your preferred entry mode is Reverse Polish Notation the order of entry is different See chapter 2 Reverse Polish Notation RPN starting on page 43 The math template key ui helps you insert the framework for o 0 fo common calculations and for VO a fae oa 0 o bg D p24 lo Of a0 o O Oo vectors matrices and hexagesimal numbers It displays a palette of pre formatted outlines to which you add the constants variables and so on Just tap on the template you want or use the arrow keys to highlight it and press _ _ Then enter the components needed to complete the calculation Example Suppose you want to find the cube root of 945 1 In Home view press k 2 Select VO The skeleton or framework for your calculation now appears on the entry line la 3 Each box on the template needs to be completed 21 Math shortcuts Fractions 22 30945 4 Press to display the result 9 813 The template palette can save you a lot of time especially with calculus calculations You can display the palette at any stage in defining an expression In other words you don t need to start out with a template Rather you can embed one or more templates at any point in the definition of an expression As well as the math template there are other similar screens that offer a palette of math characters For example pressing disp
301. ility 320 Upper Tail Normal Probability 320 Upper Tail Snedecor s F probabil ity 320 Upper Tail Student s tprobability 320 user defined regression fit 160 variables 399 user keyboard 403 user variables 379 495 V value recall 374 variable definition of 481 variables App 436 CAS 54 374 495 categories 371 377 Home 377 list of 483 Modes 455 Numeric view 445 Plot view 437 previous result Ans 35 Results 456 460 Symbolic view 441 444 types of in programming 436 use in calculations 374 User 436 user 495 variables user 379 variables shared 374 Vars menu 374 vectors definition of 345 481 Index views definition of 481 W warning symbol 23 Where command 306 Z Z Intervals 180 183 zoom examples of 101 Index 549
302. illustration above To go directly to a 18 Place the cursor is in value the X column and type the desired value For example to jump straight to the row where x 10 10 Big Defn Width To access the zoom Numerous zoom options are available by tapping options EHN These are explained in Zoom on page 90 A quick way to zoom in or zoom out is to press or 2 This zooms in or out by the Num Zoom value set in the Numeric Setup view see page 107 The default value is 4 Thus if the current increment that is the Num Step value is 0 4 zooming in will further divide that interval by four smaller intervals So instead of x values of 10 10 4 10 8 11 2 etc the x values will be 10 10 1 10 2 10 3 10 4 etc Zooming out does the opposite 10 10 4 10 8 11 2 etc becomes10 11 6 13 2 14 8 16 4 etc Other options As explained on page page 94 you can also e change the size of the font from medium to large e display the definition responsible for generating a column of values e choose to show 1 2 3 or 4 columns of data You can also combine Plot and Numeric view See Custom tables on page 93 Analyzing functions The Function menu EE in Plot view enables you to find roots intersections slopes signed areas and extrema for any function defined in the Function app If Function app 109 Display the Plot view menu To find a root of the quadratic function 110 you h
303. in programming to insert an intentional stopping or pausing point Returns a second degree trinomial in canonical form canonical form Trinom a x 2 b x c Var Evaluates the objects in a sequence then returns them concatenated as a string cat SegObj Displays a circle with its center indicated center Crcle Returns an expression factorized over the complex field on Gaussian integers if there are more than two cfactor Expr Returns the coefficients of the characteristic polynomial of a matrix With only one argument the variable used in the polynomial is x With a variable as second argument the polynomial is an expression of it charpoly Mtrx Var Returns the Chinese remainders for two lists of integers chrem LstIntg a b C BOE LIC Oy er yc atn oe With two arguments draws a circle If the second argument is a point then the distance between it and the point given as the first argument is equal to the diameter the circle If the second argument is a complex then the center of the circle is at the point given in the first argument and the absolute value of the second argument is the radius of the circle circle Pine or Cplx A Pnt or Cplx B Real a Real b Var A Var B Returns the circumcircle of the triangle ABC circumcircle Pnt or Cplx A Pnt or Cplx B Pnt or Cplix C Returns the column of index n of a matrix col Mtrx n Returns the number
304. ine a point in Geometry Symbolic View ae ll i Wa GA plotfunc 3 sin x terms of the attributes of V GB element GA 7 70265434582 vV GC tangent GA GB display green other geometric objects you need to go to Symbolic view Note that each objet EDERBEDREPRCHES you have so far created is listed in Symbolic view Note too that the name for an object in Symbolic view is the name it was given in Plot view but prefixed with a G Thus the graph labeled A in Plot view is labeled GA in Symbolic view Highlight Gc and tap GEM When creating objects that are dependent on other objects the order in which they appear in Symbolic view is important Objects are drawn in Plot view in the order in which they appear in Symbolic view Since we are about to create a new point that is dependent on the attributes of GB and GC it is important that we place its definition after that of both GB and Gc That is why we made sure we were at the bottom the list of definitions before tapping MEM If our new definition appeared higher up in Symbolic view the point we are about to create wouldn t be drawn in Plot view 18 Tap and choose Point gt point You now need to specify the x and y coordinates of the new point The former is to be constrained to abscissa of point B referred to as GB in Symbolic view and the later is to constrained to the slope of C referred to as GC in Symbolic view 19 You should have point on the e
305. ing to the equation E mc 1 Enter the mass and Function the multiplication operator 5 2 Open the constants menu D Select Physics Function Select c 299792458 Units and constants 395 5 Square the speed of light and evaluate the expression Vv L Value or measurement Function 4 4937 7589368E17 You can enter just the value of a constant or the constant and its units if it has units If PAT screen the value is inserted at the cursor point If EB is showing on the is showing on the screen the value and its units are inserted at the cursor point In the example at the right the first entry shows the Universal Gas Constant after it was chosen with amp showing The second entry shows the same constant but chosen when RAIE showing Tapping List of constants alue Function Was and vice versa displays Category Name and symbol Math Chemistry 396 e MAXREAL MINREAL T i Avogadro NA Boltmann k molar volume Vm universal gas R standard temperature StdT standard pressure StdP Units and constants Units and constants Category Name and symbol Continued Phyics Quantum Stefan Boltzmann o speed of light c permittivity 9 permeability Lo acceleration of gravity g gravitation G Planck h Dirac fA electronic charge q electron mass me q me ratio qme proto
306. ion schedule presented graphically The balance owing at the Mi end of each payment Mn group is indicated by the wal height of a bar The ras orie lt amount by which the principal has been reduced and interest paid during a payment group is shown at the bottom of the bottom of the screen The example at the right shows the first payment group selected This represents the first group of 12 payments or the state of the loan at the end of the first year By the end of that year the principal had been reduced by 1 676 57 and 9 700 63 had been paid in interest Tap or to see the amount by which the principal has been reduced and interest paid during other payment groups Finance app 18 Triangle Solver app The Triangle Solver app enables you to calculate the length of a side of a triangle or the size of an angle in a triangle from information you supply about the other lengths angles or both You need to specify at least three of the six possible values the lengths of the three sides and the size of the three angles before the app can calculate the other values Moreover at least one value you specify must be a length For example you could specify the lengths of two sides and one of the angles or you could specify two angles and one length or all three lengths In each case the app will calculate the remaining values The HP Prime will alert you if no solution can be found or
307. ions with multiple measurements providing that the units of each measurement are from the same category For example you can add two measurements of length even lengths of different units as illustrated in the following example But you cannot add say a length measurement to a volume measurement Suppose you want to add 20 centimeters and 5 inches and have the result displayed in centimeters Units and constants Units and constants 1 If you want the result in cm enter the centimeter measurement first 20 ie Select Length Select cm Now add 5 inches 5 a Select Length Select in The result is shown as 32 7 cm If you had wanted the result in inches then you would have entered the 5 inches first To continue the example let s divide the result by 4 seconds 4 K Select Time Select s The result is shown as 8 175 cm s7 sAcceleration _ Tools sAcceleration _ Tools Function Function Function TEE Function 16 26 Function 393 Unit tools CONVERT MKSA UFACTOR 394 4 Now convert the Function result to kilometers per hour To Oo 5 Select CONVERT Select 8 175 cm s in History i i Function Select Speed 0 8 175_ cm s Select km h conver 75_fomes fe The result is shown as 0 2943 kilometers per hour There are a number of tools for managing and
308. ique to a particular app These include symbolic expressions and equations settings for the Plot and Numeric views and the results of some calculations such as roots and intersections Suppose you are in Home view and want to retrieve the mean of a data set recently calculated in the Statistics 1 Var app 1 Press e5 This opens the Variables menu From here you can access Home variables user defined variables and app variables 2 Tap App amp Statistics 1Var App Vars 1 Statistics 1Var This opens a menu of app variables 2Function Advanced Graphing 3 Select Statistics 1Var mseeporer Quadratic Explorer gt results gt Meanx Linear Explorer 7 Statistics 2Var sGeometry App variable you chose now appears on the entry line You can press to see its value Or you can include the variable in an expression that The current value of the you are building For example if you wanted to calculate the square root of the mean computed in the Statistics 1Var app you would first press J follow steps 1 to 3 above and then press _f _J See appendix A Glossary beginning on page 527 for a complete list of app variables You can qualify the name of any app variable so that it can be accessed from anywhere on the HP Prime For example both the Function app and the Parametric app have an variable named Xmin If the app you last had open was the Parametric app and enter Xmin in Home view
309. is is useful after you have done a box zoom X zoom or Y Zoom 79 Box zoom Views menu 80 Option Result Cont Autoscale Rescales the vertical axis so that the display shows a representative piece of the plot given the supplied x axis settings For Sequence and Statistics apps autoscaling rescales both axes The autoscale process uses the first selected function to determine the best scale to use Decimal Rescales both axes so each pixel is 0 1 units This is equivalent to resetting the default values for XRNG and YRNG Rescales the horizontal axis only making Integer l each pixel equal to 1 unit Trig Rescales the horizontal axis so that 1 pixel equals 1 24 radians or 7 5 degrees rescales the vertical axis so that 1 pixel equals 0 1 units Undo Zoom Returns the display to the previous zoom or if there has been only one zoom displays the graph with the original plot settings A box zoom enables you to zoom in on an area of the screen that you specify The most commonly used zoom options are also available on the With the Plot view menu open tap and select Box Tap one corner of the area you want to zoom in on and then tap Tap the diagonally opposite corner of the area you want to zoom in on and then tap Esik The screen fills with the area you specified To return to the default view tap and select Decimal Views menu These are split Screen Plot Detail Autoscale Split S
310. ision by decreasing power of two polynomials The polynomials Functions and commands QUOTE radical_axis randexp randperm ratnormal reciprocation rectangle rectangular_coord inat red reduced_conic Functions and commands can be expressed as vectors of their coefficients or in symbolic form gquorem Vect or Poly Vect or Poly Var Returns an expression unevaluated quote Expr Returns the line which is the locus of points at which tangents drawn to two circles have the same length radical axis Crele Crele Returns a random real according to the exponential distribution of parameter a gt 0 randexp Real a Returns a random permutation of 0 1 2 n 1 randperm Intg n Rewrites an expression as an irreducible rational fraction ratnormal Expr Returns the list where a point is replaced with its polar or a line is replaced with its pole with respect to the circle reciprocation Crcle Lst Pnt Line Draws the rectangle ABCD where if k is provided AD k AB it k gt O and where if k and P are provided the rectangle is in the plane ABP with AD AP and AD k AB rectangle Pnt A Cplx Pnt B Cplx Real k Pnt P Lst P k Var D Var C Returns the list of the abscissas and of the ordinates of points given by a list of their polar coordinates rectangular coordinates Lest PolCoord Used with display to specify the color of the geometrical object
311. it provided Example CASE IFx lt 0 THEN RETURN negative END IF x lt 1THEN RETURN small END DEFAULT RETURN large END IFERR commands THEN commands2 ELSE commands3 END Executes sequence of commands 1 If an error occurs during execution of commands l executes sequence of commanas2 IFERR commands THEN commands ELSE commands3 END Executes sequence of commands 1 If an error occurs during execution of commands l executes sequence of commands2 Otherwise execute sequence of commanas3 Syntax FOR var FROM start TO finish DO commands Sets variable var to start and for as long as this variable is less than or equal to finish executes the sequence of commands and then adds 1 incremenf to var If DOWNTO is used the start value of the variable is decreased until the finish value is reached Programming Programming FOR STEP In Home enter Function 14 07 MAXFACTORS 100 This syntax is not working as at build 3015 Example 1 This program determines which integer from 2 to N has the greatest number of factors EXPORT MAXFACTORS N BEGIN LOCAL cur max k result 1 gt max 1i gt result FOR k FROM 2 TO N DO SIZE idivis k gt cur IF cur gt max THEN cur gt max k gt result END END MSGBOX Max of max factors for result MAXFACTORS 100 LS SD a T Syntax FOR var FROM start TO finish STEP incremenf DO commands Sets variable var to
312. ith vertex at A direction given by v half angle t and if provided height h and h cone Pnt A Vect v Real t Real h Defines a conic from an expression and draws it Without a second argument x and y are taken as the default conic Expr LstVar Returns 1 if a list or set contains an element and O if the list or set does not contain the element contains Lst il or Set 1 Elem e Used in programming to bypass remaining statements in the current iteration and begin the next iteration in a loop Returns the value of an expression subjected to a command 343 convexhull CopyVar correlation COS count covariance covariance_correl atio cpartfrac crationalroot cube cumSum cyan 344 convert Expr Cmd Returns the convex hull of a list of two dimensional points convexhull Lst Copies the first variable into the second variable without evaluation CopyVar Varl Var2 Returns the correlation of the elements of a list or matrix correlation Lst Mtrx Cosine cosx COS value Applies a function to the elements in a list or matrix and returns their sum count Pie Lst Mtrx Returns the covariance of the elements in a list or matrix covariance Lst Mtrx Returns the list of the covariance and the correlation of the elements of a list or matrix covariance correlation Lst Mtrx Returns the result of partial fraction decomposi
313. ject of interest the regression line or the data points Shows or hides the menu buttons Plot setup As with all the apps that provide a plotting feature he Plot Setup view EMA Setup enables you to set the range and appearance of Plot view The common settings available are discussed in Common operations in Plot Setup view on page 86 The Plot Setup view in the Statistics 2Var app has two additional settings Statistics 2Var app 211 Plotting mark Connect Page 1 of the Plot Setup view has fields namedS1MARK through S5MARK These fields enable you to specify one of five symbols to use to represent the data points in each data set This will help you distinguish data sets in Plot view if you have chosen to plot more than one Page 2 of the Plot Setup view has a Connect field If you choose this option straight lines join the data points in Plot view Predicting values In Plot view In Home view 212 PredX is a function that predicts a value for X given a value for Y Likewise Predy is a function that predicts a value for Y given a value for x In both cases the prediction is based on the equation that best fits the data according to the specified fit type You can predict values in the Plot view of the Statistics 2Var app and also in Home view 1 In the Plot view tap to display the regression curve for the data set if it is not already displayed 2 Make sure the trace cursor is on the reg
314. jects as a result of some operation such as defining a polar function performing a calculation or setting an option For example if you define a polar function that definition is assigned to variable named R to R If you use the Function app to find the slope of a curve at some x value the slope is assigned to a variable named Slope And if you choose binary as the base for integer arithmetic a built in variable named Base is given the value O If you had chosen octal instead Base would have been given the value 1 Variables you create are assigned whatever value you give them You can assign a value to certain built in variables such as the Home variables You can also create your own variables Example 1 below gives an example of assigning a value to a built in variable and example 2 illustrates how to create a variable and assign a value to it Example 1 To assign 7 to the built in variable A eme e Your stored value ma a A fae appears as shown at the right If you then wanted d mrA 9 86960440109 to multi our store PY y peremen pemn aeae e pa p value by 5 you could enter mm er 5 Chars A 4 X 373 Using variables to change settings 374 To assign an object to a built in variable it is important that you choose a variable that matches the type of object For example you cannot assign a complex number to the variables A through Z These are reserved fro real numbers Complex numbers need t
315. kph to 27 78 m s 100 kph over a distance of 100 m The equation to solve is V2 U 2AD where V final speed U initial soeed A acceleration needed and D distance Open the 1 Open the Solve app Solve Symbolic View 28 HE1 Solve app Select Solve HE2 BES The Solve app starts in a TRN E6 Symbolic view where you ae specify the equation to a4 solve Enter function EDIT CHK NOTE In addition to the built in variables you can use one or more variables you created yourself either in Home view or in the CAS For example if you ve created a variable called ME you could include it in an equation such as this Y G ME Functions defined in other apps can also be referenced in the Solve app For example if you have defined F1 X to be X2 10 in the Function app you can enter F1 X 50 in the Solve app to solve the equation X 10 50 Clear the 2 If you have no need for any equations or expressions already app and defined press Clear Tap to confirm your define the intention to clear the app equation q 3 Define the equation SOE Sye View Sr vE E1 Y U 2 A D mmy ea y HE2 fain ers 2 E A AGG D BEA mrs BE BES BES Enter function EDIT amp CHK Enter known 4 Display the Numeric view variables 236 Solve app NOTE Solve the unknown variable Plot the equation Solve app Num amp Setup Solve Namere view meee
316. l the apps mentioned above are described in detail in this user guide The exception is the DataStreamer app A brief introduction to this app is given in the HP Prime Quick Start Guide Full details can be found in the HP StreamSmart 410 User Guide available on the product CD Application Library Apps are stored in the Application Library displayed by pressing Gi To open an 1 Open the Application app Library Z vanced Da 2 Find the app s icon and tap Staehing on It YA D Geometry Inference Linear Explore Linear Solver You can also use the cursor Jk Pai Polar Aa S 28 i keys to scroll to the app parametric and when it is highlighted r either tap or press a To reset an You can leave an app at any time and all the data and settings app in it are retained When you return to the app you can continue as you left off However if you don t want to use the previous data and settings you can return the app to its default state that is the state it was in when you opened it for the first time To do this 1 Open the Application Library 2 Use the cursor keys to highlight the app 3 Tap EES 4 Tap Gels to confirm your intention You can also reset an app from within the app From the main view of the app which is usually but not always the Symbolic view press and tap to confirm your intention To sort apps By default the apps in the Application Library are sorted c
317. l user entries and return the calculator to its factory default settings 6 Ifyou want the exam mode indicator to flash periodically while the calculator is in exam mode select Blink LED 7 Using the supplied USB cable connect a student s calculator Insert the micro A connector the one with the rectangular end into the USB port on the sending calculator and the other connector into the USB port on the receiving calculator 8 To activate the configuration on an attached calculator tap _The Exam Mode screen closes The connected calculator is now in exam mode with the specitied disabled features not accessible to the user of that calculator Limiting functionality 523 9 Repeat from step 7 for each calculator that needs to have its functionality limited Cancelling exam mode If you want to cancel exam mode before the set time period has elapsed you will need to enter the password for the current exam mode activation 1 Connect the calculator that is in exam mode 2 If the Exam Mode screen is not showing press ema EI tap and tap GREE 3 Enter the password for the current exam mode activation and tap twice Modifying configurations Exam mode configurations can be changed You can also restore the default configuration To change a configuration 1 If the Exam Mode screen is not showing press em ED tap and top MES 2 Select the configuration you want to change from the Configuration list
318. l_ rem JE N 2 Optionally choose a color for your graph see Choose a color for plots on page 74 Open the Plot Setup view Setup Reset all settings to their default values E3 Clear Sequence app 6 7 Plot the 8 sequence 9 10 Explore the graph Select Stairstep from the Seq Plot menu Set the X Rng maximum and the Y Rng maximum to 8 as shown at the right Plot the Fibonacci sequence Plot 4Setup Return to Plot Setup view Em E and select Cobweb from the Seq Plot menu Plot the sequence Plot 4Setup cs Sequence Plot Setup ae A Seq Plot Stairstep N Rng 1 24 X Rng 1 8 8 Y Rng 1 8 X Tick 1 Y Tick 1 Enter maximum vertical value Page T U1 N 1 U1 N 1 The button gives you access to common plot exploration tools such as Zoom in or out on the plot Trace along a graph Go to a specified N value Display the sequence definition These tools are explained in Common operations in Plot view on page Split screen and autoscaling functionality is also available by pressing eam Sequence app 259 Display Numeric view Explore the table of values 260 11 Display Numeric N 12 With the cursor view Num amp 4Setup 0 0 ND UW BWN lt O anywhere in the N column type a new value and tap The table of values scrolls to the value y
319. lays the special symbols palette shown at the right Select a character by tapping it or scrolling to it and pressing TE A similar palette the relations palette is displayed if you press 2 s The palette displays operators useful in math and programming Again just tap the character you want Other math shortcut keys include f Pressing this key inserts an X T 8 or N depending on what app you are using This is explained further in the chapters describing the apps Similarly pressing enters a degree minute or second character It enters if no degree symbol is part of your expression enters if the previous entry is a value in degrees and enters if the previous entry is a value in minutes Thus entering 36 Fa 174 40 EED 117 20 EA 1 yields 36 40 20 See Hexagesimal numbers on page 23 for more information The fraction key cycles through thee varieties of fractional display If the current answer is the decimal Getting started Hexagesimal numbers Getting started fraction 5 25 pressing converts the answer to the vulgar fraction 21 4 If you press again the answer is converted to a mixed number fraction 5 1 4 If pressed again the display returns to the decimal fraction 5 25 The HP Prime will approximate fraction and mixed number representations in cases 5 22360679775 l 5 219602 where it cannot find 98209 23184 exact ones F
320. lculator will provide one solution if there is one and you will not be alerted if there are multiple solutions Vary the seed values to find other potential solutions 6 Select the variables you want solutions for In this example we want to find values for both X and Y so make sure that both variables are selected Note too that if you have more than two variables you can enter seed values for more than one of them 7 Tap to find a solution S near X 2 that satisfies V 228388218142 V 3 28388218142 each selected equation Solutions if found are displayed beside each selected variable Enter value or press SOLVE DEEN SOLVE You cannot plot equations if more than one is selected in Symbolic view The HP Prime will not alert you to the existence of multiple solutions If you suspect that another solution exists close to a particular value repeat the exercise using that value as a seed In the example just discussed you will find another solution if you enter 3 as the seed value for X In some situations the Solve app will use a random number seed in its search for a solution This means that is it not always predictable which seed will lead to which solution when there are multiple solutions Solution information 240 When you are solving a single equation the button appears on the menu after you tap ETS Tapping Solve app Solve app displays a message giving you some information abou
321. le as variable takes on values from begin to end values taken at increment steps Example In Home generate a series of squares from 23 to 27 6 1 Function al Ni Vars x x Chars A y L Eval O ALPHA Ix alpha J Chars A Eval O 23 Eval O 7E Eval O MAKELIST A2 A 23 27 1 529 576 625 676 729 DS a a Sorts the elements in a list in ascending order SORT list Example SORT 2 5 3 returns 2 3 5 Creates a list by reversing the order of the elements in a list REVERSE list Example REVERSE 1 2 3 returns 3 2 1 Concatenates two lists into a new list Lists Position Size ALIST Lists CONCAT list list2 Example CONCAT 1 2 3 4 returns 1 2 3 4 Returns the position of an element within a list The element can be a value a variable or an expression If there is more than one instance of the element the position of the first occurrence is returned A value of O is returned if there is no occurrence of the specified element POS list element Example POS 3 7 12 19 12 returns 3 Returns the number of elements in a list SIZE list Example SIZE 1 2 3 returns 3 Creates a new list composed of the first differences that is the differences between consecutive elements in a list The new list has one less element than the original list The differences for x X2 X35 Xy J Xn Are x7 X XZ X i ee ALIST listl
322. le you have created a variable called COST you could incorporate that into a definition either by typing it or choosing it from the User menu one of the sub menus of the Variables menu Thus you could have a definition that reads F1 X X COST To select a user variable press 85 tap QUES select User Variables and then select the variable of interest From Home variables Some Home variables can be incorporated into a symbolic definition To access a Home variable press 5 tap EH select a category of variable and select the variable of interest Thus you could have a definition that reads F1 X X Q Q is on the Real sub menu of the Home menu Home variables are discussed in detail in chapter 28 Troubleshooting beginning on page 507 From app variables An introduction to HP apps An introduction to HP apps All settings definitions and results for all apps are stored as variables Many of these variables can be incorporated into a symbolic definition To access app variables press ws tap EEE select the app select the category of variable and then select the variable of interest You could for instance have a definition that reads F2 X X X Root The value of the last root calculated in the Function app is substituted for Root when this definition is evaluated App variables are discussed in detail in chapter 28 Troubleshooting beginning on page 507 From math functions Some o
323. le if cells are selected Cancel Cancel the input and clear the entry line Accept and evaluate the input Spreadsheet 183 Button or key Purpose Continued Clears the spreadsheet Formaiting options The formatting options appear when you tap REE They apply to whatever is currently Number Format 3Font Size selected a cell block column facotor row or the entire spreadsheet The options are 184 Name displays an input form for you to give a name to whatever is selected Number Format Auto Standard Fixed Scientific or Engineering See Home settings on page 27 for more details Font Size Auto or from 10 to 22 point Color color for the content text number etc in the selected cells the gray dotted option represents Auto Fill background color that fills the selected cells the gray dotted option represents Auto Align horizontal alignment Auto Left Center Right Align vertical alignment Auto Top Center Bottom Column lt gt displays an input form for you to specify the required width of the selected columns only available if you have selected the entire spreadsheet or one or more entire columns You can also change the width of a selected column with an open or closed horizontal pinch gesture Row displays an input form for you to specify the required height of the selected rows only available if you have selected the entire spread
324. lect it and press BE Enter the value for Y zoom and press QE Or in a program type n gt Yzoom The default value is 4 Determines the alternative hypothesis used for a hypothesis testing Choose an option from the Symbolic view In a program type 0 gt AltHyp for U lt Uo 1 gt AltHyp for u gt uo 2 gt AltHyp for U Uo Can contain any equation or expression Independent variable is selected by highlighting it in Numeric View Example X Y X 2 YP El Can contain any expression Independent variable is x Example SIN X gt F1 497 H1 H5 Statistics 1 Var H1Type H5Type Statistics 1 Var Method Inference RO R9 Polar 1 85 Statistics 2Var 498 Contains the data values for a 1 variable statistical analysis For example H1 n returns the nth value in the data set for the H1 analysis Sets the type of plot used to graphically represent the statistical analyses H1 through H5 From the Symbolic setup specify the type of plot in the field for Typel Type 2 etc Or in a program store one of the following constant integers or names into the variables H1Type H2Type etc 0 Histogram default 1 Box and Whisker 2 Normal Probability 3 Line A Bar 5 Pareto Example 2 gt H3Type Determines whether the Inference app is set to calculate hypothesis test results or confidence intervals In a program type 0 gt Method for Hypothesis Test 1 Method for Confidenc
325. linear equations You can use matrices to solve systems of linear equations such as the following 2x 3y 4z 5 x y z 4x y 2z In this example we will use matrices M1 and M2 but you could use any of the ten matrices available 1 Open the Matrix Catalog clear M1 choose to create a vector and open the Matrix Editor select M1 K Matrices M1 1 1 0 F edit ins size Gol Jcolumn 419 2 Create the vector of Mi i the three constants in 2 3 lt N Wu the linear system K Ene y Enter fins size T Go Column 3 Return to the Matrix M1 3 Catalog r M3 1 1 023KB M4 1 1 023KB M5 2 2 047KB The size of M1 M6 3 039KB 3 M7 1 1 023KB should be showing ai aad peos as 3 M9 1 1 023KB MO 1 1 edit Delete vecte send 4 Select and clear M2 and re open the Matrix Editor Press or to select M2 5 Enter the equation coetticients 2 e J3 fue J pm Tap in cell R1 C3 2 aE C WAL E 4l Ee JLSJ1 COS 6 Return to Home view and left multiply the constants vector by the inverse of the coefficients matrix e AU alpha J ixi m Function C J yk x alpha J xim The result is a vector of the solutions x 2 y 3 and z 2 0 F edit ins Size Go gt Jcolumn 420 Matrices An alternative method is to use the RREF function see page 422 Matrix functions and
326. ll be provided in what order and if a heading is to be provided An empty string will display all information and all headings The 315 STATI 316 configuration codes are listed below Add H as a prefix to have a heading generated for that information h This column contains the row headers S This column contains the start of the period E This column contains the end of the period HB HI P This column contains the Principal paid this period B This column contains the balance at the end of the period This column contains the interest paid this period n is the number of periods for the loan is interest rate pv is the present value pmt is the per period payment e Optional parameters ppyr is the number of payments per year cpyr is the number of compounding periods per year e Grouping is the number of periods that need to be grouped together in the amortization table beg is 1 when payment is at the beginning of each period else it is O fix is the number of decimal places to be used for the calculations Example AMORT A1 12 6 100 200 he STAT1 function provides a range of one variable statistics It can calculate all or any of X L2 s s o 02 serr sad n min ql med q3 and max STATI oO tp t e COnrtiTguration aAnpur mode e Output is the cell range where the results are placed If only one cell is specified then the range of cells is automa
327. llustration might be ditferent from the one at the right Pointer 4 3 32 om 4 ae 0 We ll now make the tangent stand out by giving it a bright color If the curve is selected tap a blank area of the screen to deselect and then tap on the tangent to select it Press and select Change Color Esc Pick a color from the color picker press and then tap on a blank area of the screen Your tangent should now be colored Press to select point B If there is only one point on the screen pressing automatically selects it If there is more than one point a menu will appear asking you to choose a point With point B selected use the cursor keys to move it about Note that whatever you do point B remains constrained to the curve Moreover as you move point B the tangent moves as well If the moves off the screen you can always bring it back by dragging your finger across the screen in the appropriate direction Press to deselect point B The derivative of a graph at any point is the slope of its tangent at that point We ll now create a new point that will be constrained to point B and whose ordinate value is the derivative of the graph at point B We ll constrain it my forcing its x coordinate that is its abscissa to always match that of 125 126 point B and its y coordinate that is its ordinate to always equal the slope of the derivative at that point 16 17 To det
328. loring plots in Plot view see Common operations in Plot view on page 77 11 Open the Numeric ae 1 570796361 VIEW 1 5531971E1 1 5012601e1 1 417517361 1 306027261 Num amp 4Setup The Numeric view 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 0 1 WON DU hBWN displays a table of values for 0 and R if yOu had _Zoom Big Defn Width specified and selected more than one polar function in Symbolic view a column of evaluations would appear for each one R2 R3 R4 and so on 12 With the cursor in the 8 column type a new value and tap The table scrolls to the value you entered You can also zoom in or out on the independent variable thereby decreasing or increasing the increment between consecutive values This and other options are explained in Common operations in Numeric view on page 90 You can see the Plot and Numeric views side by side See Combining Plot and Numeric Views on page 96 Polar app 16 Sequence app The Sequence app provides you with various ways to explore sequences You can define a sequence named for example U1 e in terms of n e in terms of U1 n 1 e in terms of U1 n 2 e in terms of another sequence for example U2 n or e in any combination of the above You can define a sequence by specifying just the first term and the rule for generating all subsequent terms However you will have to enter the second term if the
329. lowing variables are used by the Finance app They correspond to the fields in the Finance app Numeric view Compounding periods per year Sets the number of compounding periods per year for a cash flow calculation From the Numeric view of the Finance app enter a value for C YR In a program type nh amp CPYR where n gt 0 Programming END FV IPYR NbPmt PMT Programming Determines whether interest is compounded at the beginning or end of the compounding period From the Numeric view of the Finance app Check or uncheck END In a program type 1 gt END for compounding at the end of the period Default 0 gt END for compounding at the beginning of the period Future value Sets the future value of an investment From the Numeric view of the Finance app enter a value for FV In a program type nervy Note positive values represent return on an investment or loan Interest per year Sets the annual interest rate for a cash flow From the Numeric view of the Finance app enter a value for ISYR In a program type nhPIPYR where n gt 0 Number of payments Sets the number of payments for a cash flow From the Numeric view of the Finance app enter a value for N In a program type neNoPmt where n gt 0 Payment value Sets the value of each payment in a cash flow From the Numeric view of the Finance app enter a value for PMT In a program type n PMT Note that payment values
330. luated e From other definitions You could for example define F3 X as F1 X F2 X Evaluate a dependent definition If you have a dependent definition that is one defined in terms of another definition you can combine all the definitions into one by evaluating the dependent definition 1 Select the dependent expression 2 Top EEB Consider the example at the Function Symbolic View right Notice that F3 X is 1 Jet Oa a2 X24 defined in terms of two other aL ae functions It is a dependent definition and can be evaluated If you highlight F3 X and tap EAE F3 x becomes DENOTE 2 AKO a V E EF3 X F1 X 2 F2 X Select or deselect a definition to explore In the Advanced Graphing Function Parametric Polar Sequence and Solve apps you can enter up to 10 definitions However only those definitions that are selected in Symbolic view will be plotted in Plot view and evaluated in Numeric view You can tell if a definition is selected by the tick or checkmark beside it A checkmark is added by default as soon as you create a definition So if you don t want to plot or evaluate a particular definition highlight it and tap QB Do likewise if you want to re select a deselected function Choose a color for plots 74 Each function and open Parametric Symbolic View sentence can be plotted in a different color If you want to change the default color of a plot Select graph color An int
331. lue of RADIUS and exports the variable for use outside the program EXPORT RADIUS EXPORT GETRADIUS BEGIN 451 Qualifying the name of a variable Functions their arguments and parameters 452 INPUT RADIUS END Note that EXPORT Function 11 28 command for the variable RADIUS appears before the heading of the function where RADIUS is Program Variables assigned After you execute this program a COENS UE new variable named RADIUS appears on the USER GETRADIUS section of the Variables menu The HP Prime has many system variables with names that are apparently the same For example the Function app has a variable named Xmin but so too does the Polar app the Parametric app the Sequence app and the Solve app In a program and in the Home view you can refer to a particular version of these variables by qualifying its name This is done by entering the name of the app or program that the variable belongs to followed by a dot and then the actual variable name For example the qualified variable Function Xmin refers to the value of Xmin within the Function app Similarly the qualified variable Parametric Xmin refers to the value of Xmin in the Parametric app Despite having the same name Xmin the variables could have different values You do likewise to declare a local variable in a program specify the name of the program followed by the dot and then variable name You can define yo
332. m that to which the receiver is connected e Consult the dealer or an experienced radio or television technician for help Modifications The FCC requires the user to be notified that any changes or modifications made to this device that are not expressly approved by Hewlett Packard Company may void the user s authority to operate the equipment Cables Connections to this device must be made with shielded cables with metallic RFI EMI connector hoods to main tain compliance with FCC rules and regulations Applica ble only for products with connectivity to PC laptop Declaration of Conformity for products Marked with FCC 535 Logo United States Only This device complies with Part 15 of the FCC Rules Oper ation is subject to the following two conditions 1 this device may not cause harmful interference and 2 this device must accept any interference received including interference that may cause undesired operation If you have questions about the product that are not related to this declaration write to Hewlett Packard Company P O Box 692000 Mail Stop 530113 Houston TX 77269 2000 For questions regarding this FCC declaration write to Hewlett Packard Company P O Box 692000 Mail Stop 510101 Houston TX 77269 2000 or call HP at 281 514 3333 To identity your product refer to the part series or model number located on the product Canadian Notice This Class B digital apparatus meets all requirements of
333. ment until you get the column width exactly as you want it The value you enter will be the width of the column in pixels 20 Select cell D3 21 Enter a formula to add up your commission Sia SUM COMMIS Note that instead of entering SUM by hand you could have chosen it from the Apps menu one of the Toolbox menus 22 Select cell c5 173 174 23 Enter a label for your fixed costs mal ABB W2 JCOSTSL e 24 In cell c5 enter 100 This ETT eT s what you have to pay MER et the landowner for renting 5 the space for your stall 25 Enter the label PROFIT in 3 e cell c7 at a 26 ln cell D7 enter a formula MAEMO to calculate your profit JD3 LJ DSL You could also have named D3 and D5 say TOTCOM and COSTS respectively Then the formula in D7 could have been TOTCOM COSTS 27 Enter the label GOAL in cell E1 You can swipe the screen with a finger or repeatedly press the cursor keys to bring E1 into view 28 Enter 250 in cell F1 This is the minimum profit would want to make on the day 29 In cell c9 enter the label GO HOME 30 In cell D9 enter JD7 FI You can select from the relations palette Ea S What this formula does is Spreadsheet place O in D9 if you have 4p nanos p oat not reached your goal 1 hora comms profit and 1 if you have gt costs fos It provides a quick way for 7 prom ho o EET you to see when you have
334. methods In a program type 0 Method select adaptive 1 gt Method select fixed step segments 2 gt Method select fixed step dots Defines the minimum and maximum values for the independent variable Appears as the NRNG fields in the Plot Setup view In Plot Setup View enter values for NRNG In a program type n Nmin n gt Nmax where n lt n Recenters at the cursor when zooming From Plot Zoom Set Factors check or uncheck Recenter In a program type Programming S1mark SSmark Statistics 2Var SeqPlot Sequence Omin Omax Polar Ostep Polar Tmin Tmax Parametric Programming 0 gt Recenter to turn recenter on default 1 gt Recenter to turn recenter off Sets the mark to use for scatter plots In Plot Setup view for two variable statistics select one of Slmark Somarks In a program type Enables you to choose between a Stairstep or a Cobweb plot In Plot Setup view select SeqPlot then choose Stairstep or Cobweb In a program type 0 gt SeqPlot for Stairstep 1 gt SegqPlot for Cobweb Sets the minimum and maximum independent values In Plot Setup View enter values for RNG In a program type ny gt Omin n Omax where n lt n Sets the step size for the independent variable In Plot Setup view enter a value for STEP In a program type n gt Ostep where n gt 0 Sets the minimum and maximum independent variable
335. mical substances in our products as needed to comply with legal requirements such as REACH Regulation EC No 1907 2006 of the European Parliament and the Council A chemical information report for this product can be found at hito www hp com qo reach Perchlorate Material special handling may apply This calculator s Memory Backup battery may contain perchlorate and may require special handling when recycled or disposed in California FmPaSASeRALSEHARReR SBR 2768 ese ABAEBRRTLE ii Pb RH Ca AME sekr SAIM crivn PBB PBDE PCA X o o o 0 o O RRRASASARERSEMASRVAPS 2 SENT 11363 2006 FRATARRBRAT RA BRSR SOREL ERSASR HRAAPHSRBY S71 1363 2006 FRAEARRER RRRA X SRARERBR SR BROWSER BARNS RBS FS2003F1827B RF SFSBRLEPRARARLRESMR2002 95 EC BES FRRAGRHSSHRMATSALSLEHSZASRSRS 539 540 Product Regulatory Information Index A absolute value 303 add 299 Advanced Graphing 197 Advanced Graphing app vari ables summary 486 algebraic entry 31 angle measure 28 annunciators 12 Ans last answer 36 antilogarithm common 300 natural 300 aplet key 17 aplet views canceling operations in 10 app attaching notes 296 commands 410 definition of 479 delete 82 deleting 297 Explorer 217 Finance 203 Function 119 functions 460 HP Apps 79 471 Inference 167 library 81 Linear Solver 211 open 81 Parametric 187 Polar 193 reset 81 resetting 296 sending and receiving 296 Sequence 199 Index sorting
336. mma Displays a number as 12456 98 dot mode or as 12456 98 comma mode Dot mode uses commas to separate elements in lists and matrices and to separate function arguments Comma mode uses periods dots as separators in these contexts 29 Page 2 Setting Font Size Calculator Name Textbook Display Menu Display Time Date Color Theme 30 Options Choose between small medium and large font for general display Enter a name for the calculator If selected expressions and results are displayed in textbook format that is much as you would see in textbooks If not selected expres sions and results are displayed in algebraic format that is in one dimensional format For example t gt is displayed as 4 51 6 21 in algebraic format This setting determines whether the commands on the Math and CAS menus are presented descriptively or in common mathematical shorthand The default is to provide the descriptive names for the functions If you prefer the functions to be presented in mathematical shorthand deselect this option Set the time and choose a format 24 hour or AM PM format Set the date and choose a format YYYY MM DD DD MM YYYY or MM DD YYYY Light black text on a light back ground Dark white text on a dark back ground Getting started Page 3 Page 4 Setting Options Continued Appearance Choose a color for the shading such as the color of the
337. mmary of menu buttons on page 86 and e Numeric view Summary of menu buttons on page 94 Throughout this chapter we will explore the parametric equations x T 8sin T and y T 8cos T These equations produce a circle l Open the Parametric Symbolic View Te Parametric app X11 ry E ym S Select ae Parametric E Y2 1 X3 T The Parametric E Y3 1 app starts in wale Enter function Symbolic view This is the defining view It is where you symbolically define that is specity the parametric expressions you want to explore 247 Define the functions 248 The graphical and numerical data you see in Plot view and Numeric view are derived from the symbolic functions defined here There are 20 fields for detining functions These are labelled x1 T through x9 T and x0 T and Y1 T through Y9 T and Y0 T Each X function is paired with a Y function 2 Highlight which pair of functions you want to use either by tapping on or scrolling to one of the pair If you are entering a new function just start typing If you are editing an existing function tap and make your changes When you have finished defining or changing the function press L t Define the two expressions SIN xt0 8 Parametric Symbolic View ri XISSI T 8 z ulu 8 CosT oL ooo X3 T Notice how the E yT key enters XA T Enter function whatever variable Show is relevant to the
338. mple 1 success count Sample 2 success count Sample 1 size Sample 2 size Confidence level Results The results are et osn C Confidence level Critical Z Critical values for Z Lower Lower bound for Ar Upper Upper bound for Ar One Sample T Interval Menu name T Int 1 u This option uses the Student s t distribution to calculate a confidence interval for u the true mean of a population 232 Inference app Inputs Results for the case in which the true population standard deviation o is unknown The inputs are Field Definition name Sample mean Sample standard deviation Sample size Confidence level The results are est oen C Confidence level DF Degrees of freedom Critical T Critical values for T Lower Lower bound for u Upper Upper bound for u Two Sample T Interval Menu name Inputs Inference app T Int u1 u2 This option uses the Student s t distribution to calculate a confidence interval for the difference between the means of two populations 11 u2 when the population standard deviations ojand cv are unknown The inputs are est omn zi Sample 1 mean X5 Sample 2 mean 233 est oenn S1 Sample 1 standard deviation S2 Sample 2 standard deviation ny Sample 1 size n gt Sample 2 size Confidence level Pooled Whether or not to pool the samples based on their standard deviations Results The results are en onn C Confiden
339. mplex number to and then press Enter For example to store 2 3i in variable z6 LOJ22 330 ARS 2 Jol e As well as giving you access to many types of mathematical calculations the HP Prime enables you to Getting started General procedure Getting started create various objects that can be saved and used over and over again For example you can create apps lists matrices programs and notes You can also send these objects to other HP Primes Whenever you encounter a screen with as a menu item you can select an item on that screen to send it to another HP Prime You used the supplied USB cable to send teen Coe gt objects from one HP Micro A sender Micro B receiver Prime to another Note that the connectors on the ends of the USB cable are slightly ditferent The micro A connector has a rectangular end and the micro B connector has a trapezoidal end To share objects with another HP Prime the micro A connector must be inserted into the USB port on the sending calculator with the micro B connector inserted into the USB port on the receiving calculator The general procedure for sharing objects is as follows 1 Navigate to the screen that lists the object you want to send This will be the Application Library for apps the List Catalog for lists the Matrix Catalog for matrices the Program Catalog for programs and the Notes Catalog for notes 2 Connect the USB cable between the two calculators
340. n 145 Curve Circle Ellipse Hyperbola Parabola Special Circumcircle 146 Tap at the center of the circle and press _ _ Tap at point on the circumference and press __ _ A circle is drawn about the center point with a radius equal to the distance between the two tapped points Keyboard shortcut You can also create a circle by first defining in Symbolic view The syntax is circle GA GB where A and B are two points A circle is drawn in Plot view such that A and B are on the circumference Tap at one focus point and press __ _ Tap at the second focus point and press m Tap at point on the circumference and press t Tap at one focus point and press __ _ Tap at the second focus point and press _ _ Tap at point on one branch of the hyperbola and press _ er_ Tap at the focus point and press __ _ Tap either on a line the directrix or a point the vertex and press Fe _ A circumcircle is the circle that passes through each of the triangle s three vertices thus enclosing the triangle Tap at each vertex of the triangle pressing after each tap Geometry Incircle Excircle Locus Plot Geometry An incircle is a circle that is tangent to each of a polygon s sides The HP Prime can draw an incircle that is tangent to the sides of a triangle Tap at each vertex of the triangle pressing after each tap If you extend two sides
341. n With that in mind we will create the following views START SETSIDES and SETNUMROLLS The START option will initialize the app and display a note that gives the user instructions The user will also interact with the app through the Numeric view and the Plot view These views will be activated by pressing and 3 but the functions Num and Plot in our app program will actually launch those views after doing some configuration The program discussed earlier in this chapter to get the number of sides for a dice is expanded here so that the possible sums of two such die are stored in dataset D1 Enter the following sub routines into the program for the DiceSimulation app START BEGIN DICESIMVARS PD1 D2 SetSample H1 D1 S trreq hi p2Z 3 OPH Type END VIEWS Roll Dice ROLLMANY BEGIN LOCAL k roll MAKELIST xt X7 1724 5S LDEo L lL D17 MAKELIOT Xt x 1 2 SiLDEo L LIEDZ POR Jk PROM 1 TO ROLES DO roll ROLLDIE SIDES ROLLDIE SIDES DZ rollalL lLeD2 roll END Programming Programming 1 gt Xmin MAX D1 1 gt Xmax Oy Ymin MAX D2 1 Ymax STARTVIEW 1 1 END VIEWS Set Sides SETSIDES BEGIN REPEAT INPUT SIDES Die Sides N ENTER num sides 2 PLOOR SLDES Po lLDES TE SLiDES lt 2 THEN MSGBOX Must be gt 2 END UNTIL SIDES gt 2 END VIEWS Set Rolls SETROLUS BEGIN REPEAT
342. n o Population standard deviation a Alpha level for the test We ll leave the data as it is for now but the Numeric view is where you add the data you are particularly interested in Display the 6 Display the test x test results results sare COTSTSTIE Test X 0 461368 Crit Z mph elmer Crit X 0 432843347747 The test distribution value and its associated Fail to reject H at a 0 05 probability are Ly A Te a displayed along with the critical value s of the test and the associated critical value s of the statistic Tap to return to Numeric view Plot the test 7 Display a graphical P 172021922639 results view of the test Test Z 946205374811 results The graph of the distribution is displayed with the test Zvalue marked The corresponding X value is also shown Tap to see the critical Zvalue With the alpha level showing you can press or to decrease or increase the a level 218 Inference app Importing statistics The Inference app can calculate contidence intervals and test hypotheses based on data in the Statistics 1Var and Statistics 2Var apps The following example illustrates the process A series of six experiments gives the following values as the boiling point of a liquid 82 5 83 1 82 6 83 7 82 4 and 83 0 Based on this sample we want to estimate the true boiling point at the 90 confidence level Open the l Open the Statistics Statistics 1Var Numeric Vi
343. n The following menu buttons are available in the debugger WET Skips to the next line of the program EFS Executes the current line 447 Programming Edit a program 448 EAS Opens a menu of variables ETB Closes the debugger Ge Continues program execution without debugging Execute the FOR loop command Step The FOR loop starts and the top of the display shows the next line of the program the MSGBOX command Execute the MSGBOX command Step The message box appears Note that when each message box is displayed you still have to dismiss it by tapping or pressing L Tap and press repeatedly to execute the program step by step Tap to close the debugger at the current line of the program or tap to run the rest of the program without using the debugger You edit a program using the Program Editor which is accessible from the Program Catalog 1 Open the Program Procean Catalog Function OKB Catalog i MYPROGRAM lt 1KB P ExportName lt 1KB em Tap the program you want to edit or use the arrow keys to highlight it and press E The HP Prime opens the Program Editor The name of your program appears in the title bar of the display The buttons and keys you can use to edit your program are listed in Program Editor buttons and keys on page 442 Programming Copy a You can use the global Copy and Paste commands to program or copy part or all of a program The
344. n Home view which yield numeric approximations You can share results and variables between the CAS and Home view and vice versa A collection of items such as matrices lists programs and the like New items you create are saved to a catalog and you choose a specific item from a catalog to work on it A special catalog that lists the apps is called the Application Library 527 command expression function Home view input form key Library list matrix 528 An operation for use in programs Commands can store results in variables but do not display results A number variable or algebraic expression numbers plus functions that produces a value An operation possibly with arguments that returns a result It does not store results in variables The arguments must be enclosed in parentheses and separated with commas The basic starting point of the calculator Most calculations can be done in Home view However such calculations only return numeric approximations For exact results you can use the CAS You can share results and variables between the CAS and Home view and vice versa A screen where you can set values or choose options Another name for a dialog box A key on the keypad as opposed to a button which appears on the screen and needs to be tapped to be activated A collection of items more speficially the the apps See also catalog A set of values separated
345. n Z B is diagonal B i i divides B i 1 i 1 and B U A YV ismith Mtrx A LQ Factorization Factorizes a m x n matrix into three matrices L Q and P where L m x n lowertrapezoidal Q n x n orthogonal P m x m permutation and P A L Q LO matrix Least Squares Displays the minimum norm least squares matrix or vector corresponding to the system matrix 1 X matrix2 LSQ matrix 1 matrix2 LU Decomposition Factorizes a square matrix into three matrices L U and P where L lowertriangular U uppertriangular P ermutation and P A L U LU matrix QR Factorization Factorizes an mxn matrix A numerically as Q R where Q is an orthogonal matrix and R is an upper triangular matrix and returns R R is stored in var2 and Q A inv R is stored in var QR matrix A var1 var2 425 SCHUR SVD SVL Vector Cross Product Dot Product L2 Norm L Norm Max Norm Examples Identity Matrix 426 Schur Decomposition Factorizes a square matrix into two matrices If matrix is real then the result is orthogonal upper quasi triangular If matrix is complex then the result is unitary upper triangular SCHUR matrix Singular Value Decomposition Factorizes an m x n matrix into two matrices and a vector m x m square orthogonall n x n square orthogonal real SVD matrix Singular Values Returns a vector containing the singular values of matrix SVL matrix
346. n expression and press fer The independent variable must be X and the expression must not contain any unknown variables Example 1 5 x cosx 0 3 x sinx Note that in this app variables must be entered in uppercase Computed statistics 208 When you tap three sets of statistics become available By default the statistics involving both the independent and dependent columns are shown Tap to see the statistics involving just the independent column or to display the statistics derived from the dependent column Tap to return to the default view The tables below describe the statistics displayed in each view The statistics computed when you tap are Sie Deon The number of data points Correlation coefficient of the independent and dependent data columns based only on the linear fit regardless of the fit type chosen Returns a value between and 1 where 1 and 1 indicate best fits The coefficient of determination that is the square of the correlation coefficient The value of this statistics is dependent on the Fit type chosen A measure of 1 indicates a perfect fit Statistics 2Var app Statistics 2Var app Statistic Definition Continued Sample covariance of independent and dependent data columns Population covariance of independent and dependent data columns Sum of all the individual products of of x and y The statistics displayed when you tap are Ste Deion
347. n mass mp mp me ratio mpme fine structure a magnetic flux Faraday F Rydberg R Bohr radius a Bohr magneton u nuclear magneton Uy photon wavelength i photon frequency fo Compton wavelength 397 398 Units and constants 23 Lists A list consists of comma separated real or complex numbers expressions or matrices all enclosed in braces A list may for example contain a sequence of real numbers such as 1 2 3 Lists represent a convenient way to group related objects You can do list operations in Home and in programs There are ten list variables available named L0 to L9 You can use them in calculations or expressions in Home or in a program Retrieve a list name from the Vars menu Reale or just type its name from the keyboard You can create edit delete send and receive named lists in the List Catalog uw o List You can also create and store lists named or unnnamed in Home view List variables are identical in behavior to the columns C1 CO in the Statistics 2Var app and the columns D1 D0 in the Statistics 1Var app You can store a statistics column as a list or vice versa and use any of the list functions on the statistics columns or the statistics functions on the list variables Create a list in the List Catalog 1 Open the List Catalog ul List f 0 0 0 0 L5 0 0 0 0 0 0 The number of elements in a list is shown beside the list
348. n perpendicular of the lines D1 and D2 common perpendicular Line D1 Line D2 Draws a cone with vertex A direction v and with half angle t and with altitude h and h cone Pnt A Vect v Real t Real h Convex hull of a list of 2 d points Geometry convexhull Lst cube Draws the direct cube with vertices A B with a face in the plan A B C cube Pnt A Pnt B Pnt C cylinder Draws a cylinder with axis A v with radius r and with altitude h cylinder Pnt A Vect v Real r Real h display Draws an geometrical object with color black 0 red 1 green 2 yellow 3 blue 4 If object is closed object can be filled Line_width_n O lt n lt 8 is for the width of the line and dash_line is for dotted line display circle 0 1 2 returnsa green circle of radius 1 display square 0 5 filledtbluetline width 6 returns a blue square of sides 5 filled with blue and a of line width of 6 faces Returns the list of the faces 1 face matrix n 3 where the n rows are the n vertices of the face of the polyhedron P faces Polygon or Polyedr P half_cone Draws a half cone with vertex A direction v and with half_angle t and with altitude h half cone Pnt A Vect v Real t Real h harmonic_conjugate Returns the harmonic conjugate of 3 points or of 3 parallel or concurrent lines or the line of conjugates of a point in respect to 2 lines harmonic conjugate Line
349. n rules to reduce an expression to its simplest form For example simplify e e yields b EXP a EXP c EA copies a selected entry ion history to the entry line EIB displays the selected entry in full screen mode with horizontal land vertical scrolling enabled The entry is also presented in textbook format CAS calculations Example 1 52 With one exception you perform calculations in CAS view just as you do in Home view The exception is that there is no RPN entry mode in CAS view just algebraic and textbook modes All the keys work in the same way in CAS view as Home view The primary difference is that the default display of answers is symbolic rather than numeric You can also use the template key 2 9 to help you insert the framework for common calculations and for vectors and matrices This is explained in detail in Math template on page 21 The most commonly used Function CAS functions are available from the CAS menu one of the Toolbox menus To display the menu press If the CAS menu is not open by default tap Wem Other CAS commands are available from the CATLG menu another of the Toolbox menus To choose a function select a category and then a command To find the roots of 2x 3x 2 1 With the CAS menu open select Polynomial and then Find Roots Computer algebra system CAS Example 2 Settings Page The function proot appears on the entry line
350. n the illustration above tapped MZI changed one or both of the point s coordinates and tapped you would find on returning to Plot view a circle of a different size You can also create an object in Symbolic view Tap WEIS define the object for example point 4 6 and press Ete The object is created and can be seen in Plot view Geometry Re ordering entries Hiding an object Deleting an object Renaming an object Geometry Another example to draw aline through points P and Q enter line GP GQ in Symbolic view and press _ te _ When you return to Plot view you will see a line passing through points P and Q The object creation commands available in pein RN 1 equilateral_triangle i i V GE hexagon 5 4 2hexagon Symbolic view can be seen vV GG undef 3isosceles triangle by tapping EES The sisopolygon syntax for each command is e u given in Geometry functions and commands on page 151 You can re order the entries in Symbolic view Objects are drawn in Plot view in the order in which they are defined in Symbolic view To change the position of an entry highlight it and tap either to move it down the list or to move it up To prevent an object displaying in Plot view deselect it in Symbolic view 1 Highlight the item to be hidden 2 Tap nk Repeat the procedure to make the object visible again As well as deleting an object in Plot view see page 1
351. nables you to override certain system wide settings See Common operations in Symbolic Setup view on page 76 Getting started with the Spreadsheet app Spreadsheet Suppose you have a stall at a weekend market You sell furniture on consignment for their owners taking a 10 commission for yourself You have to pay the landowner 100 a day to set up your stall and you will keep the stall open until you have made 250 for yourself 1 Open the Spreadsheet app Apps fa and select Spreadsheet 2 Select column A Either tap on A or use the cursor keys to highlight the A cell that is the heading of the A column 171 3 Enter PRICE and tap EMIS You have named the entire first column PRICE 4 Select column B Either tap on B or use the cursor keys to highlight the B cell 5 Enter a formula for your commission being 10 of the price of each item sold PRICE J0 1 Because you entered the Spreadsheet AN formula in the heading of a column it is automatically copied to every cell in that column At the moment only O is o bo e shown since there are no SerInCnENnEBEN values in the PRICE column yet 6 Once again select the header of column B Tap and select Name 8 Type COMMIS and tap Note that the heading of column B is now COMMIS 9 Itis always a good idea to check your formulas by entering some dummy values and noting if the result is as expected Select cell A1
352. nnot This TVM principle underlies the notion of interest rates compound interest and rates of return There are seven TVM variables N The total number of compounding periods or payments Finance app PV P YR PMT C YR FV The nominal annual interest rate or investment rate This rate is divided by the number of payments per year P YR to compute the nominal interest rate per compounding period This is the interest rate actually used in TYM calculations The present value of the initial cash flow To a lender or borrower PV is the amount of the loan to an investor PV is the initial investment PV always occurs at the beginning of the first period The number of payments made in a year The periodic payment amount The payments are the same amount each period and the TVM calculation assumes that no payments are skipped Payments can occur at the beginning or the end of each compounding period an option you control by un checking or checking the End option The number of compounding periods in a year The future value of the transaction the amount of the final cash flow or the compounded value of the series of previous cash flows For a loan this is the size of the final balloon payment beyond any regular payment due For an investment this is its value at the end of the investment period TVM calculations Another example Finance app Suppose you have taken out a 30 year 1
353. ns you put the calculator into exam mode Before initiating exam mode you can choose to activate a light on the calculator that will flash periodically during exam mode The light is on the top edge of the calculator The light will help the supervisor of the examination detect if any particular calculator has dropped out of exam mode The flashing of lights on all calculators placed in exam mode will be synchronised so that all will flash at the same time Exam configurations Limiting functionality A particular set of enabled and disabled functions is called an exam mode configuration You can create a default exam mode configuration You can also create any number of additional configurations each with a name of your choosing 519 A configuration named Default Exam appears when you first access the Exam Mode screen This configuration has no functions disabled If only one configuration is needed you can simply modify the default exam configuration If you envisage the need for a number of contigurations different ones for different examinations for example modify the default configuration so that it matches the settings you will most often need and then create other configurations for the settings you will need less often There are two ways to access the screen for configuring and activating exam mode e press 2 EB E4 e choose the third page of the Home Settings screen The procedure below illustra
354. nt s t distribution function Returns the value x such that the student s t lower tail probability of x with n degrees of freedom is p STUDENT ICDF n p Example STUDENT_ICDF 3 0 0246659214814 returns 3 2 Inverse cumulative 7 distribution function Returns the value x such that the x lower tail probability of x with n degrees of freedom is p Functions and commands Binomial Poisson List Matrix Special Beta Functions and commands CHISQUARE ICDF n p Example CHISQUARE ICDF 2 0 952641075609 returns 6 1 Inverse cumulative Fisher distribution function Returns the value x such that the Fisher lower tail probability of x with numerator n and denominator d degrees of freedom is p FISHER ICDF n d p Example FISHER ICDF 5 5 0 76748868087 returns 2 Inverse cumulative binomial distribution function Returns the number of successes k out of n trials each with a probability of p such that the probability of k or fewer successes is q BINOMIAL ICDF n p q Example BINOMIAL ICDF 20 0 5 0 6 returns 11 Inverse cumulative Poisson distribution function Returns the value x such that the probability of x or fewer occurrences of an event with u expected or mean occurrences of the event in the interval is p POISSON ICDF wU p Example POISSON _ICDF 4 0 238103305554 returns 3 These functions work on data in a list They are explained in detail in chapter 23 Lists be
355. ntering the minimum and maximum y values thereby giving the default vertical range As well as changing this range on the Geometry Plot Setup screen you can change it by panning and Zooming e Axes A toggle option to hide or reshow the axes in Plot view Keyboard shortcut Geometry Geometry Labels A toggle option to hide or reshow the names of the geometric objects A B C etc in Plot view Function Labels A toggle option to hide or reshow the expression that generated a plot with the plot These should not be confused with calculation labels You can show function labels without also showing calculation labels and vice versa Shortcuts A toggle option to enable or disable keyboard shortcuts that is hot keys in Plot view With this option enabled the following shortcuts become available Key Result in Plot view Hide or reshow the axes Vars ars Selects the circle drawing tool Follow the instructions on the screen or see page 146 c O 33 7 7s a gt Erases all trace lines see page 142 Selects the intersection drawing tool Fol low the instructions on the screen or see page 142 Selects the line drawing tool Follow the instructions on the screen or see page 143 EEX Selects the point drawing tool Follow the instructions on the screen or see page 141 Selects the segment drawing tool Follow the instructions on the screen or see page 143 x lt
356. ntial ALOG EXPM1 LNP1 Trigonometry CSC Functions and commands CONJ xt y i Example CONJ 3 4 i returns 3 4 i Real part x of a complex number x y i RE x y i Example RE 3 4 i returns 3 Imaginary part y of a complex number x y i IM xty i Example IM 3 4 i returns 4 Sign of value If positive the result is 1 If negative 1 If zero result is zero For a complex number this is the unit vector in the direction of the number SIGN value SIGN x y Examples SIGN POLYEVAL 1 2 25 26 2 2 returns 1 SIGN 3 4 returns 6 8 Antilogarithm exponential ALOG value Exponent minus 1 e 1 EXPM1 value Natural log plus 1 In x J LNP1 value The trigonometry functions can also take complex numbers as arguments For SIN COS TAN ASIN ACOS and ATAN see Keyboard functions on page 285 Cosecant 1 sinx CSC value 291 ACSC SEC ASEC COT ACOT Hyperbolic SINH ASINH COSH ACOSH TANH ATANH Probability Factorial 292 Arc cosecant ACSC value Secant 1 cosx SEC value Arc secant ASEC value Cotangent cosx sinx COT value Arc cotangent ACOT value The hyperbolic trigonometry functions can also take complex numbers as arguments Hyperbolic sine SINH value Inverse hyperbolic sine sinh7 x ASINH value Hyperbolic cosine COSH value Inverse hyperbolic cosine
357. ntry line Between the parentheses add abscissa GB slope GC You can enter the commands by hand or choose them from the Catlg menu one of the five Toolbox menus Geometry Add some calculations Geometry 20 Tap 21 22 Press AB 23 Tap Geometry Symbolic View vV GA plotfunc 3 sin x The definition of your V GB element GA 7 70265434582 f V GC tangent GA GB display green new point IS added to Wa GD point abscissa GB slope Symbolic view When you return to Plot view you will see a point named D and it will have the same x coordinate as point B Press EG If you can t see point D pan until it comes into view The y coordinate of D will be the derivative of the curve at Fecit v New 1 Delete Pointer 3 68 ponia Since its difficult to read coordinates off the screen we ll add a calculation that will give the exact derivative to three decimal places and which we can display in Plot view Numeric view is where you enter calculations 24 Tap and choose Measure gt slope 25 Between parentheses add the name of the tangent namely GC and tap Notice that the current slope is calculated and displayed The value here is dynamic that is if the slope of the tangent changes in Plot view the value of the slope is automatically updated in Numeric view 26 With the new calculation highlight
358. o be assigned to variables ZO through Z9 Likewise matrices can only be assigned to the built in variables MO through M9 See Home variables on page 377 for more information You can also take advantage of the built in variables in CAS view However the built in CAS variables must be entered in lowercase a z Example 2 You can create your own variables in Home view and in CAS view For example suppose you want to create a variable called ME and assign z to it You would enter A message appears asking if you want to create a variable called ME Tap or press to confirm your intention You can now use that variable in subsequent calculations ME 3 will yield 303 for example You can also create variables by entering variable name object For example entering assigns 55 to the variable YOU You can now use that variable in subsequent calculations YOU 60 will yield 115 for example Just as you can assign values to variables you create yourself you can assign values to certain built in variables You could modify Home settings on the Home Settings screen E RB But you can also modify a Home setting from Home view by assigning a value to the variable that represents that setting For example entering O ET Base in Home view forces the setting for the integer base to binary A value of 1 would force it to octal 2 to decimal and 3 to hex Another example you can change the angle measure settin
359. o press when you have finished Press to go back to Numeric view Notice that the area and radius calculations have been automatically updated If an entry in Numeric view is too long for the screen you can press to scroll the rest of the entry into view Press to scroll back to the original view 139 Geometry Listing all objects Getting object properties Displaying calculations in Plot view Editing a calculation Deleting a calculation 140 When you are creating a ceameiny Numan Ven TTT new calculation in Numeric MERTA view the menu item appears Tapping gives you a list of all the objects in your Geometry workspace These are also 2 vertices GIpi2I gt G grouped according to their Sa Ls Cancel OK _ type with each group given its own menu 1 point 5 7 2 9 gt GA 2point 0 2 1 7 gt GB 3circle GA GB GA gt GC 4point 5 3 5 5 gt GD 5tangent GC GD gt GE gt 6 point 6 9 6 3 gt GG gt point 6 5 2 7 gt GH gt square GG GH gt GI Geometry Vars If you are building a calculation you can select an object from one of these variables menus The name of the selected object is placed at the insertion point on the entry line As well as employing functions to make calculations in Numeric view you can also get various parameters of objects just by tapping specifying the object s name For example you can g
360. of 181 182 these variables is provided in chapter 21 Variables beginning on page 373 Spreadsheet Buttons and keys Button or key Purpose Activates the entry line for you to edit the object in the selected cell Only visible if the selected cell has content Name Converts the text you have entered on the entry line to a name Only visible when the entry line is active g Forces the calculation to be handled by the CAS Only visible when the entry line is active 5 Tap to enter the symbol A shortcut when entering absolute references Only visible when the entry line is active Format Displays formatting options for the selected cell block column row or the entire spread sheet See See Formatting options on page 184 Displays an input form for you to specify the cell you want to jump to Sets the calculator to select mode so that you can easily select a block of cells using the cur sor keys It changes to to enable you to deselect cells You can also press hold and drag to select a block of cells or A toggle button that sets the direction the Go F cursor moves alter content has been entered in a cell Displays the result in the selected cell in full screen mode with horizontal and vertical scrolling enabled Only visible if the selected cell has content Enables you to select a column to sort by and to sort it in ascending or descending order Only visib
361. of columns of a matrix colDim Mtrx Functions and commands comDenom common_perpend icular companion compare complexroot cone conic contains CONTINUE CONVERT Functions and commands Rewrites a sum of rational fractions as a one rational fraction The denominator of the one rational fraction is the common denominator of the rational fractions in the original expression With a variable as second argument the numerator and denominator are developed according to it comDenom Expr Var Draws the common perpendicular of the lines D1 and D2 common perpendicular Line D1 Line D2 Returns the companion matrix of a polynomial companion Poly Var Compares objects and returns 1 if type arg1 lt type arg2 or it type arg 1 type arg2 and arg lt arg 2 and returns O otherwise compare Obj argl Obj arg2 With two arguments returns vectors each of which is either a complex root of the polynomial P with its multiplicity or an interval the boundaries of which are the opposite vertices of a rectangle with sides parallel to the axis and containing a complex root of the polynomial with the multiplicity of this root With four arguments returns vectors described as for two arguments but only for those roots lying in the rectangle with sides parallel to the axis having complex a and complex b as opposite vertices complexroot Poly P Real 1l Cplx a Cp1lx b Draws a cone w
362. of the screen tap EENS When you reach x 6 you will see that the PREDY value also displayed at the bottom of the screen 203 reads 2931 5 Thus the model predicts that sales would rise to 2 931 50 if advertising were increased to 6 minutes You could use the same tracing technique to predict although roughly how many minutes of advertising you would need to gain sales of a specitied amount However a more accurate method is available return to Home view and enter Predx s where s is the sales figure Predy and Predx are app functions They are discussed in detail in Statistics 2Var app functions on page 331 Entering and editing statistical data 204 TNote Each column in Numeric view is a dataset and is represented by a variable named C0 to C9 There are three ways to get data into a column Go to Numeric view and enter the data directly See Getting started with the Statistics 2Var app on page 199 for an example Go to Home view and copy the data from a list For example if you enter L1 C1 in Home view the items in list L1 are copied into column C1 in the Statistics 1 Var app Go to Home view and copy the data from a the Spreadsheet app For example suppose the data of interest is in Al A10 in the Spreadsheet app and you want to copy it into column C7 With the Statistics 2Var app open return to Home view and enter Spreadsheet Al1 A10 ey ee A data column must have at least
363. ol umn See Generating data on page 193 Statistics 1Var app Edit a data set Delete data Insert data Generating data Statistics 1Var app Item Purpose Continued Calculates statistics for each data set selected in Symbolic view See Computed statistics on page 194 In Numeric view highlight the data to change type a new value and press _ You can also highlight the data tap to copy it to the entry line make your change and press _ Etter yA To delete a data item highlight it and press 8 The values below the deleted cell will scroll up one row To delete a column of data highlight an entry in that column and press E3 Clear Select the column and tap To delete all data in every column press Clear select Al1 columns and tap Highlight the cell below where you want to insert a value Tap and enter the value If you just want to add more data to the data set and it is not important where it goes select the last cell in the data set and start entering the new data You can enter a formula Make Column Data 17 891 to generate a list of data pressione points for a specified Rink column In the example Stop 10 i Step 2 at the right 5 data points Pipe will be placed in column D2 They will be Enter expression to evaluate generated by the Fedit x Cancel OK _ expression X F where X comes from the set 1 3 5 7 9 These are the
364. olumn and tap Geis To delete all data in every column press SS Clear select Al11 columns and tap isi Highlight the cell below where you want to insert a value Tap and enter the value 205 Sort data values If you just want to add more data to the data set and it is not important where it goes select the last cell in the data set and start entering the new data 1 In Numeric view place the highlight in the column you want to sort and tap BEJA Specify the Sort Order Ascending or Descending Specify the Independent and Dependent data columns Sorting is by the independent column For instance if Age is C1 and Income is C2 and you want to sort by Income then you make C2 the independent column and C1 the dependent column To sort just one column choose None for the dependent column For one variable statistics with two data columns specify the frequency column in the Frequency field 4 Tap EES Defining a regression model You define a regression model in Symbolic view There are three ways to do so Choose a fit 206 Accept the default option to fit the data to a straight line Choose a pre defined fit type logarithmic exponential and so on Enter your own mathematical expression The expression will be plotted so that you can see how closely it fits the data points Press Eig to display the Symbolic view For the analysis you are interested in S1 through S5
365. on Pnt B or Cplx or Dr3 Angle al Pnt A or Curve Returns the row n or the sequence of the rows n1 n2 of the matrix A row Mtrx A Intg n Interval nl n2 Returns the matrix obtained from matrix A after the n2th row is replaced by the sum of the nlth row and the n2th row rowAdd Mtrx A Intg nl1 Intg n2 Returns the number of rows of a matrix rowDim Mtrx Returns the matrix obtained from matrix A after the n1th row and the n2th row are swapped rowSwap Mtrx A Intg nl Intg n2 Returns the values of a recurrent sequence or a system of recurrent sequences rsolve Expr or LstExpr Var or LstVar InitVal or LstInitVal Draws a line segment connecting two points segment Pnt or Cplx Pnt or Cplx Var Var 365 select seq seqsolve shift_phase signature similarity simult SIN 366 Returns a list with only the elements that satisty the Boolean function remaining select FncBool f Lst 1 With an expression and two integers a and b as arguments returns the sequence obtained when the expression is evaluated within the interval given by a and b With an expression and three integers a b and p as arguments returns the sequence obtained when the expression is evaluated with step of p within the interval given by a and b With an expression and three integers n a and b as arguments returns the sequence obtained when the expression is evaluated n time
366. onally algvar alog10 altitude AND angleatraw Ans append apply approx 340 Used in programming with assume to state an additional assumption about a variable assume n integer additionally nS 3 7 Returns the list of the symbolic variable names used in an expression The list is ordered by the algebraic extensions required to build the original expression algvar Expr Returns the solution when 10 is taken to the power of an expression alog10 Expr Draws the altitude through A of the triangle ABC altitude Pnt or Cplx A Pnt or Cplx B Pnt or Cplx C Logical And expri AND expr2 Example 3 1 4 AND 4 lt 5 returns 1 Displays the value of the measure of the angle AB AC at point z0 angleatraw Pnt A Pnt B Pnt C Pnt or COLS If n gt 0 returns the n 1 th answer in the command history If n lt O returns the n th previous answer If no n is provided returns the previous answer ans ime n Appends an element to a list sequence or set append Lst Seq Set Elem Returns the result of applying a function to the elements in a list apply Fnc Lst With one argument returns the numerical evaluation of it With a second argument returns the numerical evaluation of the first argument with the number of significant figures taken from the second argument Functions and commands areaat areaatraw ASIN assume ATAN barycenter basis BEG
367. one object select it and tap J Note that an object is distinct from the points you entered to create it Thus deleting the object does not delete the points that define it Those points remain in the app For example if you select a circle and press J the circle is deleted but the center point and radius point remain Geometry Clearing all objects Moving about the Plot view Zooming If you tap when no object is selected a list of objects appears Tap on the point 3 8 3 176 circle GA GB GA one you want to delete and tap l to confirm your eae E intention If you don t want to Semliay E point 9 0 3 delete an object press to close the list Note that points you add to an object once the object has been detined are cleared when you clear the object Thus if you place a point say D on a circle and delete the circle the circle and D are deleted but the defining points the center and radius points remain To clear the app of all geometric objects press FP You will be asked to confirm your intention to do so Tap Qs to clear the app or GEREN to keep the app as it is You can pan by dragging a finger across the screen either up down left or right You can also use the cursor keys to pan once the cursor is at the edge of the screen You can zoom using touch gestures see page 3 or by tapping and choosing a zoom option The zoom options are the same as you find in t
368. one variable as arguments returns the derivative of the expression with respect to the derivation in the second argument onwards in the arguments can be followed by k k is an integer to indicate the number of times the expression should be derived with respect to the variable For example dift exp x y x 3 y 2 z is the same as diff exp x y x x x y y Z diff Expr var or Gutt Expr varuekl varZ2sSkZy sss Returns the indefinite integral of an expression With one expression as argument returns the indefinite integral with respect to x With the optional second third and fourth arguments you can specify the variable of integration and the bounds of the integrate int Expr Var x Real a Real b Returns the limit of an expression when the variable approaches a limit point a or infinity With the optional fourth argument you can specify whether it is the limit from below above or bidirectional d 1 for limit from below and d 1 for limit from above d 0 for bidirectional limit If the fourth argument is not provided the limit returned is bidirectional limit Expr Var Val a Dir d Returns the series expansion of an expression in the vicinity of a given equality variable With the optional third and fourth arguments you can specify the order and direction of the series expansion If no order is specified the series returned is fifth order If no direction is specified the series is bidi
369. ontinue to use the built in Sequence app to build and explore other sequences and return as needed to your special version of the Sequence app when you next want to explore the Fibonacci series Or you could create a customized version of the Solve aopp named for example Triangles in which you set up just once the equations for solving common problems involving right angled triangles such as H O SIN 8 A H COS 0 O A TAN 0 etc You could continue to use the Solve app to solve other types of problems but use your Triangle app to solve problems involving right angled triangles Just open Triangles select which equation to use you won t need to re enter them enter the variables you know and then solve for the unknown variable Like builtin apps customized apps can be sent to another HP Prime calculator This is explained in Sharing data on page 40 An introduction to HP apps 97 Example 98 Customized apps can also be reset deleted and sorted just as builtin apps can as explained earlier in this chapter Note that the only apps that cannot be customized are the Linear Explorer e Quadratic Explorer and Trig Explorer apps Suppose you want to create a customized app that is based on the built in Sequence app The app will enable you to generate and explore the Fibonacci series 1 Press and USE the Application Library 08 35 cursor keys to highlight the Sequence app Don t o
370. op coHoMeE d h profitand fe made enough proltand qua ATTESTED can go home 31 Select C9 and D9 You can select both cells with a finger drag or by highlighting C9 selecting and pressing Spreadsheet 32 Tap and select Color 33 Choose a color for the contents of the selected cells 34 Tap and select Fill 35 Choose a color for the background of the selected cells The most important cells in the spreadsheet will now stand out from the rest The spreadsheet is complete but you may want to check all UJ O k a 795 the formulas by adding some 705 dummy data to the PRICE column When the profit reaches 250 you should see the value in D9 change from O quae ERECT SEE to Basic operations Navigation selection and gestures Spreadsheet You can move about a spreadsheet by using the cursor keys by swiping or by tapping and specifying the cell you want to move to You select a cell simply by moving to it You can also select an entire column by tapping the column letter and select an entire row by tapping the row number You can also select the entire spreadsheet just tap on the unnumbered cell at the top left corner of the spreadsheet It has the HP logo in it A block of cells can be selected by pressing down on a cell that will be a corner cell of the selection and after a second dragging your finger to the diagonally opposite cell You can also select a block o
371. or example 5 atone enter J 5 to see the ES LS LS LS ee decimal approximation 2 236 Press once to see 22 74 and again to see 416020 g 2 ee Pressing a third time will cycle back to the original decimal representation Any decimal result can de displayed in hexagesimal format that is in units subdivided into groups of 60 This includes degrees minutes and seconds as well as hours minutes and seconds For example enter to see the decimal result 1 375 Now press to see 1 22 30 Press again to return to the decimal representation The HP Prime will produce the best approximation in cases where an exact result is not possible Enter 5 to see the decimal approximation 2 236 Press to see 2 14 9 844719 Note that the degree and minute entries must be positive integers Decimals are not allowed except in the seconds Note too that the HP Prime treats a value in hexgesimal format as a single entity Hence any operation performed on h 5 2 14 9 844719 TASXAJESIMAN YAU IS geasaet Irae a5aaa5e performed on the entire ES e pe p ATS value For example if 23 EEX key powers of 10 24 you enter 10 25 26 the whole value is squared not just the seconds component The result in this case is 108 39 26 854445 Numbers like 5x 10 and 3 21 x 10 are expressed in scientific notation that is in terms of powers of ten This is simpler to work with
372. or of the graphs y a sin hx c d and y a cos bx c d as the values of a b cand d change The menu items available in this app are or ERM toggles between graph mode and equation mode or E toggles between sine and cosine graphs or WEB toggles between radians and degrees as the angle measure for x or MB toggles between translating the graph EA and changing its frequency or amplitude ER You make these changes using the cursor keys GEE enters test mode or QQ toggles the increment by which parameter values change 2 9 1 6 7 4 or 20 30 45 depending on angle measure setting A Press and select Y 1 SIN 1 X Trig Explorer An equation is shown at the top of the display E with its graph shown 2 4 below it Choose the type of function you want to explore by tapping either or SIN The Explorer apps Graph mode Equation mode The Explorer apps The app opens in graph yeiesinax0 8331 07 mode In graph mode you manipulate a copy of the graph by pressing the Tt Tt an cursor keys All four keys are available The 4 original graph converted to dotted lines remains in place for you to easily see the result of your manipulations When is chosen _ 1 8 sing the cursor keys simply translate the graph horizontally and vertically When is chosen pressing or changes the amplitude of the graph tha
373. orm tap ER If the triangle you are investigating is not a right angled triangle or you are not sure what type it is you should use the general input form Special cases The indeterminate If two sides and an adjacent acute angle are entered and case there are two solutions only one will be displayed initially Triangle Solver app 273 In this Case the Triangle Solver button is displayed as in lution found this exam le You can a 14 9052520363 A 111 317812546 p l b 8 B 30 tap to display the T c s 6821874535_ second solution and tap again to return to the first solution ET i F edit Degree Rect _Alt_ Solve No solution with If you are using the AETIA given data general input form No solution with given data and you enter more a 5 A than 3 values the zU B 40 values might not be se cL consistent that is no i triangle could possibly have all the Enter angle c fs Edit D Rect Sol values you specified Edit __ Degree Rect __ Solve In these cases No sol with given data appears on the screen The situation is similar if you are using the simpler input form for a right angled triangle and you enter more than two values Not enough data If you are using the general input form you need to specify at least three values for the Triangle Solver to be able to calculate the remaining i Enter length of side a specify less than three Not enough
374. ou can enter hexadecimal numbers using the Oxdigits syntax The first pixel of the line is defined by the least significant bit of the number the 2nd pixel by the second least significant bit etc Syntax GETPIX G xposition yposition GETPIX P G xposition yposition Returns the color of the pixel G with coordinates x y G can be any of the graphics variables and is optional The default is GO the current graphic Syntax GROBH G GROBH P G Returns the height of G G can be any of the graphics variables and is optional The default is GO 475 476 GROBW P GROBW INVERT_P INVERT LINE P LINE PIXOFF_P PIXOFF Syntax GROBW G GROBW P G Returns the width of G G can be any of the graphics variables and is optional The default is GO Syntax INVERT G x yl x2 y2 INVERT P G xl yl x2 y2 Inverts a rectangle on G between points xl y 1 and x2 y2 This means that every black pixel becomes white and vice versa In the same way Light gray and dark gray are inverted G can be any of the graphics variables and is optional The default is GO x2 y2 are optional and if not specified will be the bottom right of the graphic xl yl are optional and if not specified will be the top left of the graphic If only one x y pair is specified it refers to the top left Syntax LINE G x yl x2 y2 c LINE P G xl yl x2 y2 c Draws a line of color c on G between points xl y1
375. ou entered You can then see the corresponding value in the sequence The example at the right PIEDADE ZSENDCNT shows that the 25th value in the Fibonacci sequence is 75 025 The button gives you access to common table exploration tools such as Change the increment between consecutive values Change the size of the font Display the sequence definition Choose the number of sequences to display These tools are explained in Common operations in Numeric view on page 90 Split screen and autoscaling functionality is also available by pressing eas Sequence app Sequence Num Setup soif Set up the The Numeric Setup view table of provides options Numstates values common to most of the MUTSEN graphing apps See Num Zoom 4 Common operations in Numeric Setup view on p o ai page 95 for more Enter table start value nlormmation Edit J Pote Another example A table of cubes In the following example Sequence Symbolic View aal a table of cubes is U1 1 N F E u1 2 created Note that if you fyi Yummy are specitying two U2 1 starting terms as in the E u22 Fibonacci example U2 N above or one as inthe 7 example at the right the rule that generates the sequence must be placed in the U N field Sequence app 261 262 Sequence app 17 Finance app The Finance app enables you to solve time value of money TVM and amortization p
376. ou have finished selecting the functions to be disabled tap GS If you want to activate exam mode now continue with Activating Exam Mode below Press ER The Home Settings screen appears Tap Page v Top CEERI The Exam Mode screen appears Choose Default Exam from the Configuration list Top WEEE select Reset from the menu and tap to confirm your intention to return the configuration to its default settings Creating a new configuration You can modify the default exam configuration when new circumstances require a different set of disabled functions Alternatively you can retain the default configuration and create a new configuration When you create a new contiguration you choose an existing configuration on which to base it Limiting functionality 1 Press ER The Home Settings screen appears 521 6 Tap Top GS Top CHEER The Exam Mode Exam Mode ehh screen appears Configuration Default Exam Timeout 15 Minutes Choose a base Password Erase memory configuration from l Blink LED the Configuration list If you have not ee Choose exam mode configuration created any exam mode configurations before the only base configuration will be Default Exam Tap GEEZ select copy from the menu and enter a name for the new configuration See Adding text on page 20 if you need help with entering alphabetic characters twice Tap ES
377. ove to A Y 0 0 equation mode In equation mode you use _tel I the cursor keys to move YX b 4ac 0 between parameters in ben the equation and change their values observing gS ET ETERENERET SED the effect on the graph displayed Press or to decrease or increase the value of the selected parameter Press gt or to select another parameter Press to change the sign You have four forms or levels of graph and the keys available for manipulating the equation depend on the level chosen Tap to enter test mode In Test mode you test your skill at matching an equation to the graph shown Test mode is like equation mode in that you use the cursor keys fo select and change the value of each parameter in the equation The goal is to try to match the graph that is shown The app displays the graph of a randomly chosen quadratic function Tap the Level button to choose between one of four forms of quadratic equation You can also choose graphs that are relatively easy to match or graphs that are harder match by tapping or respectively Now press the cursor keys to select a parameter and set its value When you are ready tap to see if you have correctly matched your equation to the given graph Tap to see the correct answer and tap to exit Test mode 279 Trig Explorer app The Trig Explorer app can be used to investigate the Open the app 280 behavi
378. p The first special view is launched by Programming Integer Programming VIEW BITAND BITNOT BITOR BITSL STARTVIEW 8 the second with STARTVIEW 9 and SO On You can also launch views that are not specific to an app by specifying a value for n that is less than O HomeScreen 1 Home Modes 2 Memory Manager 3 Applications Library 4 Matrix Catalog s List Catalog 6 Program Catalog 7 Notes Catalog 8 Syntax VIEWS string program_name Adds a view to the Views menu When string is selected runs program_name Syntax BITAND intl int2 intn Returns the bitwise logical AND of the specified integers Example BITAND 20 13 returns 4 Syntax BITNOT int Returns the bitwise logical NOT of the specified integer Example BITNOT 47 returns 549755813840 Syntax BITOR intl int2 intn Returns the bitwise logical OR of the specified integers Example BITAND 9 26 returns 27 Syntax BITSL intl int2 Bitwise Shift Left Takes one or two integers as input and returns the result of shifting the bits in the first integer to the left by the number places indicated by the second integer If there is no second integer the bits are shifted to the lett by one place Examples BITSL 28 2 returns 112 BITSL 5 returns 10 483 484 BITSR BITXOR B R GETBASE GETBITS R B SETBITS Syntax BITRL intl int2 Bitwise Shift Right Takes one or two
379. pMean SampMean2 SampStdDev SampStdDev2 SampSize SampSize2 pooled ConfLevelL Output is a reference to where you would like the output to be placed Note if a range is specified it will limit the size of the output but can also change the orientation 329 from vertical to horizontal if the range is wider than it is tall Configuration is a string that controls what results are shown and what order they appear in An empty string will default to show all in default order including headers h if present the header cells will be created DF T ZX zXh zXm Std Input list is the list of input see Input Parameters below This can be a range reference a list of cell references or a simple list of values Input Parameters SampMean SampMean2 SampStdDev SampStdDev2 SampSize SampSize2 pooled ConfLevel Statistics 1Var app functions Do 1VStats 330 The Statistics 1Var app has three functions designed to work together to calculate summary statistics based on one of the statistical analyses H1 H5 defined in the Symbolic view of the Statistics 1Var app Do 1 variable statistics Performs the same calculations as tapping in the Numeric view of the Statistics 1Var app and stores the results in the appropriate Statistics 1Var app results Hn must be one of the Statistics 1Var app Symbolic view H1 H5 DolVStats Hn Functions and commands SetFreq SetSample Set frequency Sets the freq
380. pear like this is algebraic entry mode LN 5 nl e Advanced RPN where RPN stands for Reverse Polish Notation The arguments of the expression are entered first followed by the operator The entry of an operator automatically evaluates what has already been entered Thus you will need to enter a two operator expression as in the example above in two steps one for each operator Step 1 5 the natural logarithm of 5 is calculated and displayed in history Step 2 SA 3 2 is entered as a divisor and applied to the previous result You choose your preferred entry method from page 1 of the Home Settings screen E E See System wide settings starting on page 27 for instructions on how to choose settings RPN is available in Home view but not in CAS view Reverse Polish Notation RPN 43 The same entry line editing tools are available in RPN mode as in algebraic and textbook mode e Press to delete the character to the left of the cursor e Press to delete the character to the right of the cursor e Press to clear the entire entry line e Press to clear the entire entry line History in RPN mode 44 The results of your calculations are kept in history This history is displayed above the entry line and by scrolling up to calculations that are no longer immediately visible The calculator offers three histories one for the CAS view and two for Home view CAS history is discussed in chapt
381. pecified will be the bottom right of srcGRB xl yl are optional and if not specified will be the top left of srcGRB SUBGROB G1 G4 will copy G1 in G4 Syntax TEXTOUT text G x y font cl width c2 Programming Programming TEXTOUT P text G x y font cl width c2 Draws text using color c1 on graphic G at position x y using font Do not draw text more than width pixels wide and erase the background before drawing the text using color c2 G can be any of the graphics variables and is optional The default is GO Font can be 0 current font selected in mode screen 1 small font 2 large font Font is optional and if not specified is the current font selected in mode screen cl can be 0 to 3 0 black 1 dark gray 2 light gray 3 white c1 is optional The default is black width is optional and if not specified no clipping is performed c2 can be 0 to 3 0 black 1 dark gray 2 light gray 3 white c2 is optional If not specified the background is not erased Example This program displays the successive approximations for using the series for the arctangent 1 EXPORT RUNPISERIES BEGIN LOCAL sign 2 gt K 4 DA 1 gt sign RECT FEXTOUT PANS T 05 0 4 TEXTOUT P FI APPROX 0 30 7 RE PRAT At sign 4 2 K 1 gt A EEATOUL Pit hug 070727 Oy LU0 po 7 TEXTOUT P A 90 30 2 0 100 3 7 479 Matrix 480 ADDCOL ADDROW DELCOL DELROW sign 1 g
382. pen Solve Linear Solver pon Trig Explorer ine app Triangle Solver Finance Linear Explore Parametric 2 Tap This enables you to create a copy of the b H d 7 Polar Sequence AA PET save Reset sort send start under a new name Any data already in the built in app is retained and you can return to it later by opening the Sequence app 3 In the Name field enter a name for your new app say Fibonacci and press twice Your new app is added to Application Libcary 5 the Application Library Note that it has the same Solve Linear Solver pon ons Trig Explorer icon as the parent app Sequence but with Triangle Solver Finance Linear Explore Parametric the name you gave it Fibonacci in this C3 G Fibonacci example Save Delete Sort Send Start 4 If you want to clear the new app of any data that was in the parent app make sure your new y app is highlighted i in the Application Library and tap Tap Ge are asked to confirm your intention when you Note that this step is entirely optional If you want to keep building on data that was in the parent app then don t reset your new app 5 You are now ready to use this app just as you would the builtin Sequence app Tap on the icon of your new app to An introduction to HP apps open it You will see in it all the same views and options as in the parent app In this example we have used the Fibonacci series as
383. point A and a plane BCD as arguments draws the orthogonal line of the plane that passes through the point orthogonal Pnt A Line BC or Plane BCD Takes a prime integer n congruent to 1 modulo 4 and returns a b such that a 2 b 2 n pa2b2 Intg n Returns the Pade approximation i e a rational fraction P Q such that P Q Xpr mod x n 1 or mod N with degree P lt p pade Expr Xpr Var x Intg n Poly N Intg p With two points F A as arguments draws a parabola of focus F and top A With three points F A and P as arguments draws a parabola with focus F and top A in the plane ABP With a complex A and a real c as arguments draws a parabola of equation y yA c x xA 2 With one second degree polynomial P x y as argument draws the parabola when the polynomial is set to equal O parabola Pnt F Pnt xAt i yA Pnt A Real c y Lent LEEI With a point and a line as arguments draws the line through the point that is parallel to the given line With a point and a plane as arguments draws the plane through the point that is parallel to the given plane with a point and two lines as arguments draws the plane through the point that is parallel to the plane made by the two given lines parallel Pnt or Line Line or Plane Line Draws a parallelepiped with sides AB AC and AD The faces of the parallelepiped are parallelograms parallelepiped Pnt A Pnt B Pnt C Pnt D D
384. powers for example x 3x x 4 Setting Recursive Evaluation Recursive Replacement Recursive Function Computer algebra system CAS Purpose Specify the maximum number of embedded variables allowed in an interactive evaluation See also Recursive Replacement below Specify the maximum number of embedded variables allowed in a single evaluation in a program See also Recursive Evalua tion above Specify the maximum number of embedded function calls allowed 55 Setting the form of menu items To use an expression or result from Home view 56 Setting Purpose Cont Epsilon Any number smaller than the value specified for epsilon will be shown as zero Probability Specify the maximum probability of an answer being wrong for non deterministic algorithms Set this to zero for deterministic algo rithms Newton Specify the maximum number of iterations when using the Newto nian method to find the roots of a quadratic One setting that affects the CAS is made outside the CAS Settings screen This setting determines whether the commands on the CAS menu are presented descriptively or by their command name Here are some examples of identical functions that are presently differently depending on what presentation mode you select Descriptive name Command name Factors List itactors Complex Zeros cZeros Groebner Basis gbasis Factor by Degree factor_xn Find Roots proot The def
385. press you get 6 since 4 1 3 6 F1 X 573 To turn e To turn off tracing tap ERS ai onor To turn on tracing tap GEER 0 If these options are not displayed tap WAIS When tracing is off pressing the cursor keys no longer constrains the cursor to a plot An introduction to HP apps 85 Plot view Summary of menu buttons Button Purpose Displays a menu of zoom options See Zoom options on page 78 A toggle button for turning off and turning on trace functionality See Trace on page 84 Displays an input form for you to specify a value you want the cursor to jump to The value you enter is the value of the independent variable Displays a menu of options for analyzing a Function only plot See Analyzing functions on page 109 Displays the definition responsible for generating the selected plot A toggle button that shows and hides the other buttons across the bottom of the screen Common operations in Plot Setup view This section covers only operations common to the apps mentioned See the chapter dedicated to an app for the app specific operations done in Plot Setup view Press to open Plot Setup view Configure Plot view 86 Scope Advanced Graphing Function Plot Setup Function Parametric Polar Sequence Statistics 1 Var Statistics 2Var YRNG 10 9 10 9 XTICK 1 YTICK 1 The Plot Setup view is used to configure the appearance of Plot view and to set
386. programs e using variables in programs e executing programs e debugging programs e creating programs for building custom apps e sending a program to another HP Prime An HP Prime program contains a sequence of commands that execute automatically to perform a task Commands are separated by a semicolon Commands that take multiple arguments have those arguments enclosed in parentheses and separated by a comma For example PIXON xposition yposition Sometimes arguments to a command are optional If an argument is omitted a default value is used in its place In the case of the PXON command a third argument could be used that specifies the color of the pixel PIXON xposition yposition color The last argument indicates which of four colors to use when lighting up the pixel Here the default value is O black In this manual optional arguments to commands appear inside square brackets as shown above In the PIXON example a graphics variable G could be specified as the first argument The default is GO which always contains the currently displayed screen Thus the full syntax for the PXON command is 437 Program Structure Comments PIXON G xposition yposition color Some built in commands employ an alternative syntax whereby function arguments do not appear in parentheses Examples include RETURN and RANDOM Programs can contain any number of subroutines each of which is a fun
387. provided in packages called HP apps The HP Prime comes with 18 HP apps 10 dedicated to mathematical topics or tasks three specialized Solvers three function Explorers a spreadsheet and an app for recording data streamed to the calculator from an external sensing device You launch an app by first pressing which displays the Application Library screen and tapping on the icon for the app you want What each app enables you to do is outlined in the following where the apps are listed in alphabetical order App name Use this app to Advanced Explore the graphs of symbolic open Graphing sentences in x and y Example Des ad x y 64 Data Streamer Collect real world data from scientific sensors and export it to a statistics app for analysis Finance Solve time value of money TVM problems and amortization problems Function Explore real valued rectangular functions of y in terms of x Example y 2x 3x 5 Geometry Explore geometric constructions and perform geometric calculations Inference Explore confidence intervals and hypothesis tests based on the Normal and Student s t distributions Linear Explorer Explore the properties of linear equations and test your knowledge An introduction to HP apps 59 60 App name Linear Solver Parametric Polar Quadratics Explorer Sequence Solve Spreadsheet Statistics 1 Var Statistics 2Var Triangle Solver Trig Explorer Use this app to Cont
388. quares 1 Tap on the cell with the HP logo in it at the top left corner Alternatively a ae you can use the cursor zie pe pe k 343 2401 16807 keys to move to that cell 512 goss s2768 y 5 00 1000 hoos fio0000 just as you can to selecta jogoo peace eos tr i RowCol 1 column or row heading SEATIDEDErmEE 2 On the entry line type ea 2 Rowl L OJ Coll J Note that Row and Col are built in variables They are placeholders for the row number and column number of the cell that has a formula containing them 3 Tap or Press t Note that each column gives the nth power of the row number starting with the squares Thus 9 is 59 049 You can import data from the Statistics Var and Statistics 2Var apps and from any app customized from a statistics app In the procedure immediately below dataset D1 from the Statistics 1Var app is being imported 1 Select a cell 2 Enter Statistics 1Var D1 3 Press Ee Spreadsheet External functions Spreadsheet The column is filled with the data from the statistics app starting with the cell selected at step 1 Any data in that data will be overwritten by the data being imported You can also export data from the Spreadsheet app to a statistics app See Entering and editing statistical data on page 191 for the general procedure It can be used in both the Statistics 1Var and Statistics 2Var apps You can us
389. r regulatory matters is Hewlett Packard GmbH Dept MS HQ TRE Herren berger Strasse 140 71034 Boeblingen GERMANY 537 Japanese Notice CORE TIABSMRANRE CT TORE RERI CEB FSECERBNMELTIETD COREPIVAPCTFLEV a y RER EL CHASNSL SEBS SHCTTCERHWVWET FAR AAS cts CIEL UW RUYELT FAL VCCI B Korean Class Notice IE AWEFCHle AAVAGSSS Ft INEA F JSOA ASot AS SASS oH GE AAAA At 8 4 SISLICL Bs 212l Olds S SseDp Disposal of Waste Equipment by Users This symbol on the product or on its in Private packaging indicates that this product must Household in the not be disposed of with your other household waste Instead it is your European Union responsibility to dispose of your waste equipment by handing it over to a designated collection point for the O recycling of waste electrical and electronic equipment The separate collection and recycling of your waste equipment at the time of disposal will help to conserve natural resources and ensure that it is recycled in a manner that protects human health and the environment For more information about where you can drop off your waste equipment for recycling please contact your local city office your household waste disposal service or the shop where you purchased the product 538 Product Regulatory Information Chemical Substances Product Regulatory Information HP is committed to providing our customers with informa tion about the che
390. racing cursor is the answer provided This is a faster way of choosing a point of interest than using the trace cursor You can move this tracing cursor using the cursor keys if you need finer precision To find an Just as there are two roots of the quadratic equation there intersection of the are two points at which both functions intersect As with two functions roots you need to position your cursor closer to the point you are interested in In this example the intersection close to x 1 will be determined The Go To command is another way of moving the trace cursor to a particular point SB to re display the menu tap ESB enter 1 and tap i The tracing cursor will now be on one of the functions at x 1 2 Tap and select Intersection Intersection of F2 X and A list appears giving you a choice of functions and axes 3 Choose the function whose point of intersection with the currently selected function you wish to find Function app 111 To find the slope of the quadratic function To find the signed area between the two functions 112 2 Press Eea Specify the start The coordinates of the intersection are displayed at the bottom of the screen Tap on the screen near the other intersection and repeat from step 2 The coordinates of the intersection nearest to where you tapped are displayed at the bottom of the screen Intersection 1 3028 2 30278
391. raise a matrix to any power as long as the power is an integer The following example shows the result of raising matrix M1 created earlier to the power of 5 alpha ea 1 fy E i 5 Function You can also raise a matrix to a power without first storing it as a variable ii 5 1069 1558 2337 3406 Matrices can also be LF LS LY LL S raised to negative powers In this case the result is equivalent to 1 matrix ABS power In the following example M1 is raised to the power of 2 y 7 rE EA T Function ET i 2 5 5 2 5 M1 3 75 1 75 SS o a a a AD For division of a matrix or a vector by a square matrix the number of rows of the dividend or the number of elements if it is a vector must equal the number of rows in the divisor This operation is not a mathematical division it is a left multiplication by the inverse of the divisor M1 M2 is equivalent to M27 M1 Matrices To divide the two matrices you created for the previous example press the following keys alpha EA Ea T 2 M1 5 4 Ma 4 3 CT A To invert a matrix You can invert a square matrix in Home view by typing the matrix or its variable name and pressing er _ You can also use the INVERSE command in the Matrix category of the Math menu To negate each You can change the sign of each element in a matrix by element pressing entering the matrix name and pressing Solving systems of
392. raws the parallelogram ABCD such that vector AB vector AD vector AC parallelogram Pnt A Cplx Pnt B Cplx Pnt C iP PCpLx vax D Displays the perimeter at point zO of a circle or polygon A legend is provided perimeterat Polygon Pnt Cplx z0 Displays the perimeter at point zO of a circle or polygon perimeteratraw Polygon Pnt Cplx z0 Functions and commands perpen_bisector perpendicular PI PIECEWISE plane plotinequation plotparam plotpolar plotseq Functions and commands Draws the bisection line or plane of the segment AB perpen bisector Pnt or Cpilx A Pnt or Cp1x B With a point and a line as arguments returns the line that is orthogonal to the given line and that passes through the given point With a line and a plane as arguments draws the plane that is orthogonal to the given plane and that contains the given line perpendicular Pnt or Line Line or Plane Inserts pi Takes as arguments pairs consisting of a condition and an expression Each of these pairs defines a subfunction of the piecewise function and the domain over which it is active piecewise Condl Exprl Cond2p Expr2p Expr2 pt1 With three points as arguments draws the plane made by the three points With a point and a line as arguments draws the plane made by the point and the line With an equation as argument draws the plane corresponding to the equation in 3D space
393. re all default settings press E3 Common operations in Plot view Plot view functionality that is common to many apps is described in detail in this section Functionality that is available only in a particular app is described in the chapter dedicated to that app Press to open Plot view An introduction to HP apps 77 Zoom Zoom factors Zoom options Zoom keys 78 Scope Advanced Graphing Function Parametric Polar Sequence Solve Statistics 1 Var and Statistics 2Var Also to a limited degree Geometry Zooming redraws the plot on a larger or smaller scale It is a shortcut for changing the range settings in Plot Setup view The extent of most zooms is determined by two zoom factors a horizontal and a vertical factor By default these factors are both 2 Zooming out multiplies the scale by the factor so that a greater scale distance appears on the screen Zooming in divides the scale by the factor so that a shorter scale distance appears on the screen To change the default zoom factors 1 Open the Plot view of the app EB 2 Tap to open the Plot view menu 3 Tap to open the Zoom menu 4 Scroll and select Set Zoom Factors Factors xzom o Y Zoom 2 The Zoom Factors screen Recenter V appears 5 Change one or both zoom factors Enter horizontal zoom factor 6 Ifyou want the plot to be centered around the current position of the cursor in Plot view select Recenter 7 Tap or press F
394. re explained in Common operations in Numeric Setup view on page 95 However you can choose to build your own table where just the values you enter appear as independent variables 1 Open Numeric Setup view em Choose BuildYourOwn from the NUMTYPE menu Open Numeric view Numeric view will be empty In the independent column the left most column enter a value of interest Top SEB If you still have other values to evaluate repeat from step ETmETETETDEALI 4 To delete one row of data in your custom table place the cursor in that row and press 8 To delete all the data in your custom table 1 Press E3 2 Tap or press to confirm your intention 93 Numeric view Summary of menu buttons 94 Button BuildYourOwn only BuildYourOwn only BuildYourOwn only BIG Purpose To modify the increment between consecutive values of the independent variable in the table of evaluations See page 90 To edit the value in the selected cell To overwrite the value in the selected cell you can just start entering a new value without first tapping BEIA Only visible if NUMTYPE is set to BuildYourOwn See Custom tables on page 93 To create a new row above the currently highlighted cell with zero as the independent value You can immediately start typing a new value Only visible if NUMTYPE is set to BuildYourOwn See Custom tables
395. re zooming After zooming In Numeric view zoom options are available from two sources e the keyboard e the menu in Numeric view Note that any zooming you do in Numeric view does not affect Plot view and vice versa However if you choose a zoom option from the Views menu EB while you are in Numeric view Plot view is displayed with the plots zoomed accordingly In other words the zoom options on the Views menu apply only to Plot view Zooming in Numeric view automatically changes the NUMSTEP value in the Numeric Setup view There are two zoom keys pressing zooms in and pressing zooms out The extent of the scaling is determined by the NUMZOOM setting explained above In Numeric view tap and tap an option An introduction to HP apps 91 Evaluating 92 The zoom options are explained in the following table Option In Out Decimal Integer Trig Undo Zoom Result The increment between consecutive values of the independent variable becomes the current value divided by the NUMZOOM setting Shortcut press a J The increment between consecutive values of the independent variable becomes the current value multiplied by the NUMZOOM setting Shortcut press kz J Restores the default NUMSTART and NUMSTEP values O and 0 1 respectively The increment between consecutive values of the independent variable is set to 1 e If the angle measure setting is radians sets the increment betw
396. rectional Series Expr Houalk var limic point Orde ely Dr il O71 19 With two arguments returns the discrete antiderivative of the expression with respect to the variable sum Expr Var With four arguments returns the discrete sum of the expression with respect to the variable from a to b Functions and commands Differential Curl Divergence Gradient Hessian Integral By Parts v x By Parts u v F b F a Functions and commands sum Expr Var VarMin a VarMax b Returns the rotational curl of a vector field defined by curl A B C x y z dC dy dB dz dA dz dC dx dB dx dA dy Cur Lbs Ay BG Set xyz Returns the divergence of a vector field defined by divergence A B C x y z dA dx dB dy dC dz divergence Lst A B C Lst x v z Returns the gradient of an expression With a list of as second argument returns the vector of partial derivatives for all grad Expr LstVar Returns the Hessian matrix of an expression hessian Expr LstVar Performs integration by parts of the expression f x u x v x with f x as the first argument and v x or O as the second argument With the optional third fourth and fifth arguments you can specify a variable of integration and bounds of the integrate If no variable of integration is provided it is taken as x Tbpdyv Expr CE Gx EXPE V X go ver x Re altal Real Cb Performs integration by parts of
397. ression curve Press or if it is not 3 Press or 4 The cursor moves along the regression curve and the corresponding X and Y values are displayed across the bottom of the screen If these values are not visible tap METS You can force the cursor to a specific X value by tapping EERE entering the value and tapping SH The cursor jumps to the specified point on the curve If the Statistics 2Var app is the active app you can also predict X and Y values in the Home view Enter Predx Y to predict the X value for the specified Y value Enter Predy X to predict the Y value for the specified X value Statistics 2Var app You can type PredxX and Statistics 2Var Predy directly on the entry line or select them from the App functions menu under the Statistics 2Var category The App functions menu is one of App Functions 1 Statistics 2Var 2 Statistics 1Var Triangle Solver 4Spreadsheet 5Function 6Solve 7Inference Parametric AO cals ox the Toolbox menus E HINT In cases where more than one fit curve is displayed the Predx and Predy functions use the first active fit defined in the Symbolic view Troubleshooting a plot If you have problems plotting check the following Statistics 2Var app The fit that is regression model that you intended to select is the one selected Only those data sets you want to analyze or plot are selected in Symbolic v
398. riable If you just wanted the current value of P and not have the value change if P changed just enter P and press __ e _ This is an example of an entered variable Variables given values in other apps can also be referenced in a spreadsheet In chapter 12 we see how the Solve app can be used to solve equations An example used is V U 2AD You could have four cells in a spreadsheet with v U A and D as formulas As you experiment with different values for these variables in the Solve app the entered and the calculated values are copied to the spreadsheet where further manipulation could be done The variables from other apps includes the results of certain calculations For example if you have plotted a function in the Function app and calculated the signed area between two x values you can reference that value in a spreadsheet by pressing 22 tapping EMI and then selecting Function gt Results gt SignedArea Numerous system variables are also available For example you could enter to get the last answer calculated in Home view You could also enter SA Ema to get the last answer calculated in Home view and have the value automatically updated as new calculations are made in Home view Note that this works only with the Ans from Home view not the Ans from CAS view All the variables available to you are listed on the variables menus displayed by pressing 3 s A comprehensive list
399. riable 162 Statistics 1 Var data set definition 142 deleting data 146 158 editing data 146 158 histogram range 150 width 150 inserting data 146 158 plot types 148 sorting data 146 158 Statistics 1Var app variables Results 456 summary 488 Statistics 2Var adjusting plotting scale 162 choosing the fit 159 curve fitting 159 define your own fit 160 detining a fit 159 detining a regression model 159 tit models 159 160 getting started 153 inserting data 158 plot setup 164 predicted values 165 regression curve fit models 159 tracing a scatter plot 162 troubleshooting plots 166 Statistics 2Var app variables Results 458 547 Index summary 489 storing a value in Home view 372 list element 338 matrix elements 350 subtract 299 syntax of functions 306 T tangent 301 template key 21 templates 18 textbok entry 31 the 335 time 13 times sign 33 too few arguments 511 touch options 14 tracing more than one curve 104 transmitting lists 338 matrices 350 notes 369 programs 396 Triangle Solver app 213 Triangle Solver app functions 467 Triangle Solver app variables Numeric view 452 summary 494 Trig Explorer app variables summary 495 trigonometric fit 160 functions 324 TwoProportion Z Interval 183 Two Proportion Z Test 176 Two Sample T Interval 184 Two Sample T test 179 Two Sample Z Interval 181 Two Sample Z Test 174 U undefined 548 name 511 result 511 uppercase characters 366 Upper Tail Chi Square probab
400. ric constructions A geometric construction can be composed of any number of geometric objects such as points lines polygons curves tangents and so on You can take measurements such as areas and distances manipulate objects and note how measurements change There are five app views e Plot view provides drawing tools for you to construct geometric objects Symbolic view provides editable definitions of the objects in Plot view Numeric view for making calculations about the objects in Plot view e Plot Setup view for customizing the appearance of Plot view e Symbolic Setup view for overriding certain system wide settings There is no Numeric Setup view in this app To open the Geometry app press and select Geometry The app opens in Plot view Getting started with the Geometry app Geometry The following example shows how you can graphically represent the derivative of a curve and have the value of the derivative automatically update as you move a point of tangency along the curve The curve to be explored is y 3sin x Since the accuracy of our calculation in this example is not too important we will first change the number format to fixed at 3 decimal places This will also help keep our geometry workspace uncluttered 123 Preparation Open the app and plot the graph Add a constrained point 124 Press I On the Home Setting screen set the number format to Fixed and the number o
401. roblems You can use the app to do compound interest calculations and to create amortization tables Compound interest is accumulative interest that is interest on interest already earned The interest earned on a given principal is added to the principal at specified compounding periods and then the combined amount earns interest at a certain rate Financial calculations involving compound interest include savings accounts mortgages pension funds leases and annuities Getting Started with the Finance app Suppose you finance the purchase of a car with a 5 year loan at 5 5 annual interest compounded monthly The purchase price of the car is 19 500 and the down payment is 3 000 First what are the required monthly payments Second what is the largest loan you can afford if your maximum monthly payment is 300 Assume that the payments start at the end of the first period 1 Start the Finance app Select Finance The app opens in the Numeric view 2 Inthe N field enter Time Value oL Monen 5 12 and press Neo wro PV 0 P YR 12 ane CYR 12 Fv 0 End y Notice that the result of the calculation Group Size 12 60 appears in the Enter number of payments or solve field This is the COERCED number of months over a five year period Finance app 263 3 In the 1 yR field type 5 5 the interest rate and press Fer 4 In PV field type 19500 3000 and press Enter This is the present value
402. roduction to HP apps 1 2 3 Delete a definition Tap the colored square to the left of the function s definition You can also select the square by pressing while the definition is selected Pressing moves the selection from the definition to the colored square and from the colored square to the definition tap GEES Select the desired color from the color picker To delete a single definition 1 2 Tap once on it or highlight it using the cursor keys Press l To delete all the definitions LP 2 An introduction to HP apps Press mi G3 Tap or press to confirm your intention 7S Button ia Function only gt Advanced Graphing only lt Advanced Graphing only F Parametric only e Polar only N Sequence only Solve only Symbolic view Summary of menu buttons Purpose Copies the highlighted definition to the entry line for editing Tap when done To add a new definition even one that is replacing an existing one highlight the field and just start entering your new definition Selects or deselects a definition Enters the independent variable in the Function app You can also press 4 Enters an X in the Advanced Graphing app You can also press i2 Enters an Y in the Advanced Graphing app Enters the independent variable in the Parametric app You can also press 4 Enters the independent variable in
403. ror occurs during execution of commands I execute sequence of commands2 Otherwise execute sequence of commands3 IFERR commandsil THEN commands2 ELSE commands3 END If a condition is satisfied returns Expr otherwise returns Expr2 351 igcd ilaplace incircle inter interval2center inv inversion iPart iquorem isobarycenter isopolygon IFTE Cond Expr1 Expr2 Returns the greatest common divisor of two integers or two rationals or two polynomials of several igcd Intg a or Poly Intg b or Poly Returns the inverse Laplace transform of a rational fraction ilaplace Expr Var IlapVar Draws the incircle of triangle ABC incircle Pnt or Cplx A Pnt or Cplx B Pnt or Cplx C With two curves or surfaces as arguments returns the intersection of the curves or surfaces as a vector With a point as the third argument returns the intersection of the curves or surfaces close to the point inter Curve Curve Pnt Returns the center of an interval or object interval2center Interval or Real Returns the inverse of an expression or matrix inv Expr Mtrx Returns point Al such that A1 is on line CA and mes_alg CA1 CA k inversion Pnt C Real k Pnt A Returns a real number without its fractional part or a list of real numbers each without its fractional part 1Part Real LstReal Returns the Euclidean quotient and remainder of two integers
404. rt Expr a Returns a matrix of ncolumns made by splitting a list into rows each containing n terms If the number of elements in the list is not divisible by n then the matrix is completed with zeros list2mat Lst 1 Intg n Returns the natural logarithm of an expression ln Expr Returns a list of the in an expression lname Expr Returns the expanded form of a logarithmic expression lnexpand Expr Used in programming to define local LOCAL varl var2 varn locus M A draws the locus of M locus d A draws the envelope of d A element C C is a curve locus Pnt Elem Returns the natural logarithm of an expression LOG Expr Returns the log base 10 of an expression Functions and commands logarithmic_ regressio logb logistic_ regression Ivar magenta map matZlist matpow MAXREAL mean median median _line Functions and commands log10 Expr Returns the coefficients a and b of y a In x b where y is the natural logarithm that best approximates the points whose coordinates are the elements in two lists or the rows of a matrix logarithmic regression lst Mtrx A Lst Returns the logarithm of base b of a Log a b Returns y y C y max xmax and R where y is a logistic function the solution of y y a y b such that y xO y0 and where y xO y xO 1 is the best approximation of the line formed by the elements in the list L logistic re
405. s 71 However if you entered 27b you would get a syntax error as 2 and 7 are not integers found in binary arithmetic You would have to enter 27 as 11011b since 2710 11011 2 Setting a default base means that you do not always have to specify a base marker for numbers when doing integer arithmetic The exception is if you want to include a number from the non default base it will have to include the base marker Thus if your default base is 2 and you want to enter 27 for an integer arithmetic operation you could enter just 11011 without the b suffix But if you wanted to enter E46 you need to enter it with the suffix E4h The HP Prime adds any omitted base markers when the calculation is displayed in history Integer arithmetic Note that if you change the Function 17 default base any calculation in history that involves integer arithmetic for which you did not explicitly add a base marker will be resisplayed in the new base 100b 111b 1011b In the example at the right the EPE am first calculation explicitly ee ee ee es ee R included base markers b for each operand The second calculation was a copy of the first but without the base markers The default base was then changed to hex The first calculation remained as it was while the second without base markers being explicitly added to the operands was redisplayed in base 16 Changing the default base The calculator s default base for integ
406. s and commands Without a third argument the value of h is set to 0 001 With a real as third argument it is the value of h nDeriv Expr Var var Real h Unary minus Enters the negative sign Returns the expanded irreducible form of an expression normal Expr Returns a vector divided by its I norm where the norm is the square root of the sum of the squares of the vector s coordinates normalize Lst Cplx Returns the logical inverse of a Boolean expression not Boolean Gives the expression for calculating the nth root of a number Draws an octahedron with center A and vertex B and such that the plane ABC contains four vertices octahedron Pnt A Pnt B Pnt C Returns 1 if a given integer is odd and returns O otherwise odd Intg n Draws a polygonal line with vertices at the elements of the given list open polygon LstPnt LstCp1lx Logical Or expri OR expr2 Example 3 1 4 OR 8 lt 5 returns 1 Returns the remainder O term of a series expansion limit x a order_size x x 0 0 if a gt 0 order size Expr Shows the orthocenter of the triangle made with three points orthocenter Pnt or Cplix Pnt or Cplx Pnt or Cpilx With a point A and a line BC as arguments draws the orthogonal plane of the line that passes through the point 357 pa2b2 pade parabola parallel parallelepiped parallelogram perimeterat perimeteratraw With a
407. s argument either as symbolic expression or as a vector of coefficients POLYROOT P x or Vect Returns a function whose gradient is the vector field defined by Vect V and VectVar potential Vect Vv Veeck Var Returns the coefficients m b of y b x m where y is the monomial which best approximates the points whose coordinates are the elements in two lists or the rows of a matrix power regression Lst Mtrx A Lst Returns the real number d 2 R 2 where d is the distance between the point and the center of the circle and R is the radius of the circle powerpc Crcle Pnt or Cplx Adds an element to the beginning of a list prepend Lst Elem Returns a polynomial divided by the greatest common divisor of its coefficients primpart Poly Var Draws a prism whose base is the plane ABCD and whose edges are parallel to the line made by A and A1 prism LstPnt A B C D Pnt A1 With an expression as the first argument returns the product of solutions when the variable in the expression is substituted from a to b with step p If p is not provided it is taken as 1 With a list as the first argument returns the product of the values in the list With a matrix as the first argument returns the element by element product of the matrix product Expr Lst Var Lst Intg a Intg b Intg p 361 projection propfrac ptayl purge pyramid q2a quadrilateral quantile quartile
408. s drawn between the two end points Tap the point that is the vertex of the angle to be bisected A and press e _ Tap another point B and press __ er_ Tap a third point C and press _ _ A line is drawn through A bisecting the angle formed by AB and AC Tap one point on the line L you want to bisect and press Eter _ Tap another point on Land press __ _ A line is drawn perpendicular to L and equidistant from the two points you tapped You can also draw a perpendicular bisector to a line that doesn t exist Just tap and press at one point and do the same at another point A line is drawn perpendicular to the imaginary line between the two points and equidistant from both points If you are drawing a perpendicular bisector to a segment choose the segment first and then select Perp Bisector from the Line menu The bisector is drawn immediately without you having to select any points Just press to save the bisector Tap on a point P and press _ J Tap on a line L and press __ A new line is draw parallel to L and passing through P Tap on a point P and press __ _ Tap on a line L and press __ A new line is draw perpendicular to L and passing through P Tap on a curve C and press _ _ Tap on a point P and press _ e _ A one or more lines are drawn from P tangent to C Tap on a vertex A and press __ _ tap on the line opposite the vertex and press _ _ A line is drawn
409. s in history You can also retrieve and reuse any result that is in history Getting started Using the clipboard TIP To reuse the last result Getting started TIP To retrieve an expression and place it on the entry line for editing either e tap twice on it or its result or e use the cursor keys to highlight the expression and then either tap on it or tap EDB To retrieve a result and place it on the entry line use the cursor keys to highlight it and then tap 9 Note that double tapping a result copies the associated expression to the entry line If the expression or result you want is not showing press repeatedly to step through the entries and reveal those that are not showing You can also swipe the screen to quickly scroll through history Pressing takes you straight to the very first entry in history and pressing takes you straight to the most recent entry Your last four expressions are always copied to the clipboard and can easily be retrieved by pressing E8 This opens the clipboard from where you can quickly choose the one you want Note that expressions and not results are available from the clipboard Note too that the last four expressions remain on the clipboard even if you have cleared history Press Ans to SS aN NV aav retrieve your last answer ia 1 77245385091 for use in another Ans 13 23 0419000618 calculation Ans SS eh a a appears on the entry line This is a
410. s of angles AAS Uses the measure of two angles and the length of the non included side to calculate the measure of the third angle and the lengths of the other two sides Returns all 6 values AAS angle angle side ASA Uses the measure of two angles and the length of the included side to calculate the measure of the third angle and the lengths of the other two sides Returns all 6 values 335 SAS SSA SSS DoSolve ASA angle side angle SAS Uses the length of two sides and the measure of the included angle to calculate the length of the third side and the measures of the other two angles Returns all 6 values SAS side angle side SSA Uses the lengths of two sides and the measure of a non included angle to calculate the length of the third side and the measures of the other two angles Returns all 6 values SSA side side angle SSS Uses the lengths of the three sides of a triangle to calculate the measures of the three angles SSS side side side Solves the current problem in the Triangle Solver app The Triangle Solver app must have enough data entered to successtully solve that is there must be at least three values entered one of which must be a side length DoSolve Example In Degree mode SAS 2 90 2 returns 45 2 82 45 In the indeterminate case AAS where two solutions may be possible AAS may return a list of two such lists containing both results Linear Explorer functions
411. s of equal spacing within the interval given by a and b seq Expr Intg n Var var Intg a Intg b Intg p Returns the value of a recurrent sequence or a system of recurrent sequences u_ n 1 f u_n or u_ n 2 t u_ n 1 u_n seqsolve Expr or LstExpr Var or LstVar InitVal or LstInitVal Returns the result of applying a phase shift of pi 2 to a trigonometric expression shift phase Expr Returns the signature of a permutation Signature Permut With two points B and A a real k and an angle al as arguments returns a point that is the point similar to A across center B with angle al and with scaling coefficient k With an axis Dr3 a real k an angle a1 and a point A as arguments returns a point that is the point similar to A across the axis given by the line with angle al and with scaling coefficient k Similarity Pnt B or Dr3 Real k Angle al Pnt A Returns the solution to a system of linear equations or several systems of linear equations presented in matrix form In other words in the case of one system of linear equations takes a matrix A and a column matrix B and returns column matrix X such A X B Sine sinx Functions and commands sincos single_inter slopeat slopeatraw sphere spline sqrt square stddev Functions and commands SIN value Returns an expression with the complex exponentials rewritten in terms of sin and cos
412. s the standard error of the independent values X of the current 2 variable statistical analysis S1 S5 Contains the mean of the dependent values Y of the current 2 variable statistical analysis S1 S5 Contains the sum of the dependent values Y of the current 2 variable statistical analysis S1 S5 Variables LY2 Contains the sum of the squares of the dependent values Y of the current 2 variable statistical analysis S1 S5 sY Contains the sample standard deviation of the dependent values Y of the current 2 variable statistical analysis S1 S5 oY Contains the population standard deviation of the dependent values Y of the current 2 variable statistical analysis S1 S5 serrY Contains the standard error of the dependent values Y of the current 2 variable statistical analysis S1 S5 Inference app variables Category Names Results Result CritScore explained TestScore CritVal1 below TestValue CritVal2 Prob DF Symbolic AltHyp Type Method Numeric Alpha Pooled Conf sl Mean 1 s2 Mean ol n o2 n2 x uO x2 xO Modes AAngle ADigits AComplex AFormat Results CritScore Contains the value of the Z or t distribution associated with the input o value Variables 385 CritVal1 CritVal2 DF Prob Result TestScore TestValue 386 Contains the lower critical value of the experimental variable associated with the negative TestScore value which was calculated from the input a level
413. select a Y X Ouadratio 2i itiee Explorer ee ee oo eer eflt tl The left half of the display shows the graph of a pene lane T quadratic function The jf right half shows the Eq Graphe incr 1 Leva Test _ general form of the equation being explored at the top and below it the current equation of that form The keys you can use to manipulate the graph or equation appear below the equation These will change depending on the level of equation you choose Displayed beneath they keys is the equation the discriminant that is b 4ac and the roots of the quadratic l Y a X h v Y X2 3 The app opens in graph mode In graph mode you manipulate a copy of bio Kie beedac 12 oa om os X1 1 73205080757 Fos X2 1 73205080757 the graph using whatever keys are available The original p graph converted to a GENES dotted lines remains in place for you to easily see the result of your manipulations Four general forms of quadratic equations are available for you to explore y ax Level 1 y x h Level 2 y x y Level 3 y a xth y v Level 4 Choose a general form by tapping the Level button EEB and so on until the form you want is displayed The keys available to you to manipulate the graph vary from level to level The Explorer apps Equation mode Test mode The Explorer apps Tap HEBD to m
414. sequence Syntax st ring object Returns a string representation of the object The result varies depending on the type of object string 2 3 results in string 2 3 Examples string 2 3 0 666666666667 string Fl when F1 X COS X COS X 1 2 3 string L1 when L1 1 2 3 string M1 whenM 1 1 2 3 4 5 6 123 456 Syntax inString str l str2 Returns the index of the first occurrence of str2 in strl Returns O if str2 is not present in str 1 Note that the first character in a string is position 1 Examples 471 472 LEFT RIGHT MID ROTATE STRINGFROMID REPLACE IH H inString vanilla van returns 1 I H inString banana na returns 3 inString ab abc returns O Syntax left str n Return the first n characters of string str If n gt dim str or n lt 0 returns str If n O returns the empty string Example left MOMOGUMBO 3 returns MOM Syntax right str n Returns the last n characters of string str If n lt O returns empty string If n gt dim str returns str Example right MOMOGUMBO 5 returns GUMBO Syntax mid str pos n Extracts n characters from string str starting at index pos nis optional if not specified extracts all the remainder of the string Example mid MOMOGUMBO 3 5 returns MOGUM mid PUDGE 4 returns GE Syntax rotate strn Permutation of characters in strin
415. sheet or one or more entire rows You can also change the height of a selected row with an open or closed vertical pinch gesture Spreadsheet e show show quote marks around strings in the body of the spreadsheet Auto Yes No e Textbook display formulas in textbook format Auto Yes No Caching turn this option on to speed up calculations in spreadsheets with many formulas only available if you have selected the entire spreadsheet Format Each format attribute is represented by a parameter that can be Parameters referenced in a formula For example D1 1 returns the name of cell D1 or nothing if D1 has not been named The attributes that can be retrieved in a formulas by referencing its associated parameter are listed below Parameter Attribute Result 1 content contents or empty 2 name name or empty 3 number format Standard O Fixed 1 Scientific 2 Engineering 3 4 number of deci mal places 5 font System O Small 1 Medium 2 6 textbook mode Yes 0 No 1 as opposed to algebraic mode 7 show strings in Yes 0 No 1 quotes 8 horizontal align Left O Center 1 ment Right 2 9 vertical align Top 0 Center ment 1 Bottom 2 10 background cell fill color color Spreadsheet 185 Parameter Attribute Result Continued 1 foreground color contents color As well as retrieving format attributes you can set a format attribute or cell content by specifying it in a form
416. sign 7 to it You would enter A message appears asking if you want to create a variable called ME Tap or press to confirm your intention You can now use that variable in subsequent calculations ME 3 will yield 303 for example You can also create variables in CAS view in the same way However the built in CAS variables must be entered in lowercase However the variables you create yourself can be uppercase or lowercase See chapter 21 Variables starting on page 373 for more information 39 As well as built in Home and CAS variables and the variables you create yourself each app has variables that you can access and use in calculations See App functions and variables on page 99 for more information Complex numbers Sharing data 40 You can perform arithmetic operations using complex numbers Complex numbers can be enterded in any one of the following forms where x is the real part y is the imaginary part and i is the imaginary constant 1 gt xy e x iyor e x iy To enter i e press FLY EA TAN or press EAZ There are 10 built in variables available for storing complex numbers These are labeled Z0 to z9 You can also assign a complex number to a variable you create yourself To store a complex an alee eee AN AN number in a variable enter the complex eo ses number press iene iP sto ED LT LY LY ST enter the variable that you want to assign the co
417. srcGRB can be any of the graphics variables dx2 dy2 are optional and if not specitied will be calculated so that the destination area is the same size as the source area sx2 sy2 are optional and if not specified will be the bottom right of the srcGRB sx I sy are optional and if not specified will be the top left of srcGRB dx 1 dy are optional and if not specified will be the top left of trgtGRB ccan be 0 to 3 0 black 1 dark gray 2 light gray 3 white cis optional If not specified all pixels from G2 will be copied 474 Programming NOTE DIMGROB_P Programming DIM_GROB GETPIX_P GETPIX GROBH P GROBH Using the same variable for trgtGRB and srcGRB can be unpredictable when the source and destination overlap Syntax DIMGROB G w h c or DIMGROB G line_ 1 line_2 line_h DIMGROB G w h c or DIMGROB G line_1 line_2 line_h Sets the dimensions of GROB G to w h Initializes the graphic G with color c or with the graphic data provided in the list G can be any graphics variable except GO c can be 0 to 3 0 black 1 dark gray 2 light gray 3 white c is optional The default is white If the graphic is initialized using graphic data the list must have as many numbers as the height of the GROB Each number as seen in base 16 describes a line Two bits are used for each pixel 00 black 01 dark gray 10 light gray 11 white Hence each hex digit describes two pixels Y
418. ssa the first column in the matrix and ordinate the second column in the matrix plotlist Lst 1 Mtrx M 311 App menu Press to open the Statistics 1Var a8 16 Toolbox menus one of which is the App menu App functions are used in HP apps to perform common calculations For example in the Function app the Plot eSolve view Fen menu has a Anp Cotlg OK function called SLOPE that calculates the slope of a given function at a given point The SLOPE function can also be used from the Home view or a program to give the same results The App functions described in this section are grouped by app 1 Statistics 1Var gt 2Function gt 3 Quadratic Explorer gt 4Spreadsheet gt 5 Statistics 2Var gt 6Advanced Graphing gt zr Geometry gt Function app functions AREA EXTREMUM ISECT The Function app functions provide the same functionality found in the Function app s Plot view under the FCN menu All these operations work on functions The functions may be expressions in X or the names of the Function app variable FO through F9 Area under a curve or between curves Finds the signed area under a function or between two functions Finds the area under the function Fn or below Fn and above the function Fm from lower X value to upper X value AREA Fn Fm lower upper Example AREA X X 2 2 1 returns 4 5 Extremum of a function Finds the extremum if one exists of the
419. t deltalist Lst Returns the value of the Dirac delta function for a real number Dirac Real Returns a point M such that for the given a and b z a k z b and z MA k MB division point Pit or Cplx a Pat or Cplx b Cplx k Used in programming to initiate a step or sequence of steps Draws the line with slope m that goes through the point a b i e y b m x a DrawSlp Real a Real b Real m Enters the mathematical constant e Euler s number Returns three polynomials U V and D such that for two polynomials A and B U x A x V x B x D x GCD A x B x where GCD A x B x is the greatest common divisor of polynomials A and B 345 eigenvals eigenvects eigVc eigVI element ellipse ELSE END equilateral_ triangle 346 The polynomials can be provided in symbolic form or as lists Without a third argument it is assumed that the polynomials are expressions of x With a variable as third argument the polynomials are expressions of it egcd Poly or Lst A Poly or Lst B Var Returns the sequence of eigenvalues of a matrix eigenvals Mtrx Returns the eigenvectors of a diagonalizable matrix eigenvects Mtrx Returns the eigenvectors of a diagonalizable matrix eigVc Mtrx Returns the Jordan matrix associated with a matrix when the eigenvalues are calculable eigV1 Mtrx Shows a point on a curve or a real in an interval
420. t o sign PI APPROX K 1 gt K UNLLL Oy END The program executes until the user presses to terminate The spaces after K the number of the term and A the current approximation in the TEXTOUT_P commands are there to overwrite the previously displayed value Some matrix commands take as their argument the matrix variable name on which the command is applied Valid names are the global variables MO M9 or a local variable that contains a matrix Syntax ADDCOL name value valuen column_number Inserts values into a new column inserted before column_number in the specified matrix You enter the values as a vector These are not optional arguments The values must be separated by commas and the number of values must be the same as the number of rows in the matrix name Syntax ADDROW name value I valuen row_number Inserts values into a new row inserted before row_number in the specified matrix You enter the values as a vector These are not optional arguments The values must be separated by commas and the number of values must be the same as the number of columns in the matrix name Syntax DELCOL name column_number Deletes column column_number from matrix name Syntax DELROW name row_number Deletes row row_number from matrix name Programming EDITMAT REDIM REPLACE SCALE SCALEADD SUB SAWAPCOL Programming SWAPROW Syntax EDITMAT name St
421. t The last answer fans 1 189207115 1 09050773266 shown in the 1 04427378242 T h ht 1 02189714865 illustration at tne ri E TOn CS ED A CS is 32 2 When your are working in Home view you can retrieve an expression or result from the CAS by tapping and selecting Get from CAS The CAS opens Press or until the item you want to retrieve is highlighted and press e _ The highlighted item is copied to the cursor point in Home view Getting started Storing a value in a variable Getting started You can store a value in a variable that is assign a value to a variable Then when you want to use that value in a calculation you can refer to it by the variable s name You can create your own variables or you can take advantage of the built in variables in Home view named A to Z and 0 and in the CAS named a to z and a few others CAS variables can be used in calculations in Home view and Home variables can be used in calculations in the CAS There are also built in app variables and geometry variables These can also be used in calculations Example To assign 7 to to the variable A Your stored value SAN Se E appears as shown at the right If you then wanted d mA 9 86960440109 to multi our store Py y Fo SE He A value by 5 you could enter AA Ces Js O fer You can also create your own variables in Home view For example suppose you wanted to create a variable called ME and as
422. t here are two fields only one for the minimum and one for the maximum value An introduction to HP apps 87 Page 2 88 Setup field S MARK Stats 2 Var only XRNG YRNG XTICK YTICK Setup field AXES LABELS GRID DOTS GRID LINES CURSOR CONNECT Stats 2 Var only Purpose Cont Sets the graphic that will be used to represent a data point in a scatter plot A ditferent graphic can be used for each of the five analyses that can be plotted together Sets the initial range of the x axis Note that here are two fields one for the minimum and one for the maximum value In Plot view the range can be changed by panning and zooming Sets the initial range of the y axis Note that there are two fields one for the minimum and one for the maximum value In Plot view the range can be changed by panning and zooming Sets the increment between tickmarks on the x axis Sets the increment between tickmarks on the y axis Purpose Shows or hides the axes Places values at the ends of each axis to show the current range of values Places a dot at the intersection of each horizontal and vertical grid line Draws a horizontal and vertical grid line at each integer x value and y value Sets the appearance of the trace cursor standard inverting or blinking Connects the data points with straight segments An introduction to HP apps Setup field Purpose Cont METHOD
423. t is it is stretched or shrunk vertically and pressing or changes the frequency of the graph that is it is stretched or shrunk horizontally The or button at the far right of the menu determines the increment by which the graph moves with each press of a cursor key By default the increment is set at 2 9 or 20 Tap to switch to y sinc xronp 0 equation mode In equation mode you use the cursor keys to move between parameters in 2 the equation and change their values You can then gga gery gre geen acer eres observe the effect on the graph displayed Press or to decrease or increase the value of the selected parameter Press or to select another parameter You can switch back to graph mode by tapping EEI 281 Test mode 282 Tap to enter test mode In test mode you test your skill at matching an equation to the graph shown Test mode is like equation mode in that you use the cursor keys to select and change the value of one or more parameters in the equation The goal is to try to match the graph that is shown The app displays the SIN 1 X 0 graph of a randomly chosen sinusoidal function Tap a Level button METEB 2 and so on to choose 4 between one of five types of sinusoidal equations Now press the cursor keys to select each parameter and set its value When you are ready tap to see if you have correctly matched your equation
424. t the solutions found if any Tap to clear the message Message Zero Sign Reversal Extremum Cannot find solution Meaning The Solve app found a point where both sides of the equation were equal or where the expression was zero a root within the calculator s 12 digit accuracy Solve found two points where the two sides of the equation have opposite signs but it cannot find a point in between where the value is zero Similarly for an expression where the value of the expression has different signs but is not precisely zero This might be be cause either the two points are neighbours they differ by one in the twelfth digit or the equation is not real valued between the two points Solve returns the point where the value or difference is closer to zero If the equation or expression is continuously real this point is Solve s best approximation of an actual solution Solve found a point where the value of the expression approximates a local minimum for positive values or maximum for negative values This point may or may not be a solution Or Solve stopped searching at 9 99999999999E499 the largest number the calculator can represent Note that the Ext remum message indicates that it is highly likely that there is no solution Use Numeric view to verify this and note that any values shown are suspect No values satisfy the selected equation or expression 241 242 Message
425. t the right down a little and to the right 1 Tap and select Vector 2 Draw a vector in the direction you want to Zoom Point Line Polygo Curve Transfo move the circle and of the same length as move you intend If you need help see Vector on page 144 3 Tap WED 4 Tap the vector and press t Geometry Reflection Dilation Geometry 5 Tap the object to be moved and press The object is moved the same length as the vector and in the same direction The original object is left in place Reflection is a transformation in which a copy of an object is made and every point on the new object is the same distance from a symmetry axis or mirror line as the original point In the example at the right the original triangle D is reflected an imaginary symmetry axis that passes through point l 1 Tap and select Reflection 2 Tap a point that will be in the symmetry axis that is mirror line and press fe _ 3 Tap the object that is to be reflected across the symmetry axis and press __ e _ The object is reflected across the symmetry axis detined by the point created at step 2 Dilation is a transformation where an object is enlarged or reduced by a given factor around a given center point The factor is sometimes referred to as the homothetic ratio or scale factor and the center point is called the homothetic center or center of dilation the illustration at the rig
426. tatement should stop being executed 369 USIMPLIFY valuation variance vector vertices vertices _abca vpotential when WHILE XOR yellow Zip 370 Simplifies a unit in a unit object usimplify Unit Returns the valuation degree of the term of lowest degree of a polynomial With only a polynomial as argument the valuation returned is for x With a variable as second argument the valuation is performed for it valuation Poly Var Returns the variance of a list with the second argument as pound or the list of variances of the columns of a matrix variance Lst Mtrx Lst With one point as argument defines a vector from the origin to the point With two points as arguments defines a vector from the first point to the second point With a point and a vector as arguments defines a vector beginning from the point and with direction and magnitude of the vector vector Pnt Pnt Put Vect Returns the list of the vertices of a polygon or polyhedron vertices Polygon or Polyedr Returns the closed list A B A of the vertices of a polygon or polyhedron vertices abca Polygon or Polyedr Returns U such as curl U V vpotential Vect V LstVar Used to introduce a conditional statement Used to indicate the conditions under which a statement should be executed Exclusive or Returns 1 if the first expression is true and the second expression is false or if the first expr
427. te on measurements just as you do on numbers without attached units The units are kept with the numbers in subsequent operations The units are on the Units menu Press Units and if necessary tap MMS Function Units gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt s cceleration om Units OK l The menu is organized by category Each category is listed at the left with the units in the selected category listed at the right e length e acceleration electricity e area e force light e volume e energy e angle e time e power e viscosity e speed e pressure e radiation e mass e temperature 391 Prefixes The Units menu includes an entry that is not a unit category namely Prefix Selecting this option displays a palette of prefixes Function gt gt gt gt gt gt gt gt sAcceleration Y yotta Z zeta E exa P peta T tera G giga M mega k kilo h hecto D deca d deci c centi m milli u micro n nano p pico f femto a atto z zepto y octo Unit prefixes provide a handy way of entering large or small numbers For example the speed of light is approximately 300 000 m s If you wanted to use that in a calculation you could enter it as 300_km s with the pretix k selected from the prefix palette Select the prefix you want before selecting the unit Unit calculations Example 392 A number plus a unit is a measurement You can perform calculat
428. tes that the number is to interpreted as a binary number 115 Likewise E4h Integer arithmetic 513 represents 22849 In this case the base marker h indicates that the number is to interpreted as a hexadecimal number E46 Note that with integer arithmetic the result of any calculation that would return a remainder in floating point arithmetic is truncated only the integer portion is presented Thus 100b 10b gives the correct answer 10b since 449 21 is 29 However 100b 11b gives just the integer component of the correct result 1b Note too that the accuracy of integer arithmetic can be limited by the integer wordsize The wordsize is the maximum number of bits that can represent an integer You can set this to any value between 1 and 64 The smaller the wordsize the smaller the integer that can be accurately represented The default wordsize is 32 which is adequate for representing integers up to approximately 2 x 10 However integers larger than that would be truncated that is the most significant bits that is the leading bits would be dropped thus the result of any calculation involving such a number would not be accurate The default base 514 Setting a default base only affects the entry and display of numbers being used in integer arithmetic If you set the default base to binary 27 and 44 will still be represented that way in Home view and result of those numbers being added will still be represented a
429. tes the second method Modifying the default configuration 520 4 Tap EMA The 1 Press EB The Home Settings screen appears 2 Top GEESE 3 Tap CURSE The Exam Mode screen appears You Exam Mode Timeout 15 Minutes y use this screen to EER activate a particular Erase memory 8 3 Blink LED configuration just before an ti b Choose exam mode configuration SO PENS for example Exam Mode Configuration OBEGIETIS C User Apps 18 22 Exam Mode e Physics Configuration Hiep Units screen appears Matrices C Complex cas 5 Selectthose functions LAro C Notes and Programs you Wa nt d isabled C New Notes and Programs LI Mathematics and make sure that v __ cancel ok those functions you don t want disabled are not selected Limiting functionality To return to the default configuration N An expand box at the left of a function indicates that there are sub functions that you can individually disable Notice that there is an expand box beside System Apps in the example shown above Tap on the expand box to see the sub functions You can then select the sub functions individually If you want to disable all the sub functions just select the top level function You can select or deselect an option either by tapping on the check box beside it or by using the cursor keys to scroll to it and tapping MR When y
430. than 50 000 or 0 000 000 321 To enter numbers like these use the functionality This is easier than using J10 4 Example Suppose you want to calculate 4x10 6 x 107 axi First select Scientific as the number format 1 Open the Home Settings window 2 Select Scientific Home Settings from the Number Angle Measure Radians Number Format v Standard Format menu entry _Fixed ne Scientific ntegers 3 Return home Engineering Complex a v 4 Enter AGE 13 Language English Decimal Mark Dot 6 23 Choose format for numbers EEX _ J 3 5 H Press Geometry The result is 8 0000815 This is equivalent to 8 x 10 4 0000E 13 6 0000E23 3 0000E 5 Getting started Menus To select from a menu Shortcuts To close a menu Getting started A menu offers you a choice of items As in the 1 Numbers case shown at the right arithmetic gt i maximum 3Trigonometry 2 Minimum some menus have sub 4Hyperbolic gt Modulus 1Argument 5Probability gt 4Find Root 2 Conjugate menus and sub sub 6 List 15Percentage Real Part menus Matrix 16Complex gt 4 Imaginary Part 8 Special gt Exponential gt 5 Unit Vector vah CC ETI ET There are two techniques for selecting an item from a menu e direct tapping and e using the arrow keys to highlight the item you want or pressing Enter Note that the menu of buttons along the
431. the 15 Display the numeric view Numeric view Num amp 999805046 a 999695385 4 i 3 999561355 16 With the cursor in pieten i l 1 7999220192 the T column type Peere a new value and 1 7 998781561 tap The Size Defn Column table scrolls to the value you entered You can also zoom in or out on the independent variable thereby decreasing or increasing the increment between consecutive values This and other options are explained e u Ww in Common operations in Numeric view on page 90 You can see the Plot and Numeric views side by side See Combining Plot and Numeric Views on page 96 Parametric app 251 252 Parametric app Polar app 15 The Polar app enables you to explore polar equations Polar equations are equations in which r the distance a point is from the origin 0 0 is defined in terms of 9 the angle a segment from the point to the origin makes with the polar axis Such equations take the form r K0 Getting started with the Polar app Open the Polar app Define the function Polar app The Polar app uses the six standard app views described in chapter 4 An introduction to HP apps beginning on page 59 That chapter also describes the menu buttons used in the Polar app Throughout this chapter we will explore the expression 5ncos 0 2 cos 8 l Open the Polar Polar Symbolic View ma app of i A E R2 8
432. the Polar app You can also press 2 Enters the independent variable in the Sequence app You can also press 4 Enters the equals sign in the Solve app A shortcut equivalent to pressing EE Displays the selected definition in full screen mode See Large results on page 36 for more information Evaluates dependent definitions See Evaluate a dependent definition on page 74 Common operations in Symbolic Setup view An introduction to HP apps Scope all apps Function Symbolic Setup eal The Symbolic Setup view is the oo eS same for all apps Its primary Complex System purpose is to allow you to override three of the system wide settings specified on the Home Settings window Choose Angle Measure Press to open Symbolic Setup view Override system wide settings 1 Tap once on the setting you want to change You can tap on the field name or the field 2 Tap again on the setting A menu of options appears 3 Select the new setting Note that selecting the Fixed Scientific or Engineering option on the Number Format menu displays a second field for you to enter the required number of significant digits You could also select a field tap G REEY and select the new setting Restore default settings To restore default settings is to return precedence to the settings on the Home Settings screen To restore one field to its detault setting 1 Select the field 2 Press 8 To resto
433. the expression f x u x v x with f x as the first argument and u x or O as the second argument With the optional third fourth and fifth arguments you can specify a variable of integration and bounds of the integrate If no variable of integration is provided it is taken as x ibpu Expr f x Expr u x Var x Rea ia Read Returns F b F a preval Expr F var Real a Real b Var 301 Limits Riemann Sum Taylor Taylor of Quotient Transform Laplace Inverse Laplace FFT Inverse FFT Solve Solve 302 Returns in the neighbourhood of n 0 an equivalent of the sum of Xpr var1 var2 for var2 from var2 1 to var2 var when the sum is looked at as a Riemann sum associated with a continuous function defined on 0 1 sum riemann Expr Xpr Lst varl var2 Returns the Taylor series expansion of an expression With the optional second and third arguments you can specify the limit point and the order of the expansion If no limit point is provided it is taken as x 0 If no order is provided the series returned is fifth order taylor Expr Var limit point Order Returns the quotient Q of the division of polynomial A by polynomial B by increasing power order with degree Q lt n or Q 0 In other words Q is the Taylor expansion at order n of A B in the vicinity of x 0 divpe Ay By ng N Returns the Laplace transform of an expression laplace Expr Var Lap
434. third argument you can specify a guess for the solution or an interval within which it is expected that the solution will occur With the optional fourth argument you can name the iterative algorithm to be used by the solver nSolve Expr Var Guess or Interval Method Returns the solution to a differential equation deSolve Eg TimeVar FncVar Returns an approximate value of y at a final value t1 of a given variable where y t is the solution of y t t t y t y t0 y0 odesolve Expr f t y VectVar t y Vec tinitecond t0 y0 FinalVal tl tstep v al Curve Returns the solution to a system of linear equations linsolve LstLinkgq LstVar 303 Functions and commands Rewrite Incollect powexpand tExpand Exp amp Ln ey Inx y Inx exp 2trig expexpand Sine asinx acosx asinx gt atanx sinx gt cosx tanx 304 Returns an expression rewritten with the logarithms collected applies In a n ln b gt In a b n for integers n Incollect Expr Returns an expression with a power of sum rewritten as a product of powers powexpand Expr Returns a transcendental expression in expanded form tExpand Expr Returns an expression of the form exp n In x rewritten as a power of x exp2pow Expr Returns an expression with powers rewritten as an exponentials pow2exp Expr Returns an expression with complex exponentials rewritten in terms o
435. tically calculated e Configuration is a string that defines if a header row needs to be created starts with H and what result to place in which column An empty string headers will use all the Functions and commands REGRS Functions and commands Note that many of the characters representing statistics for example X and o can be selected from the symbol palette SA9 e Input is the can be a cell range reference a simple list or anything that results in a list of values Mode is optional and defines what to calculate the mean of The valid values are 1 one value 2 with frequency data 3 with weighted data 4 multiplies two data sets together to form a single data set Examples STATI B1 A25 A37 STATI Bl Ax Ho A25 A37 Regression analysis function Can calculate all or any of sl slope int intercept cor cd sCov pCov px predict x and py predict y REGRS Output Conrtiguration input mode y x e Output is a reference to where you would like the output to be placed Note if a range is specified it will limit the size of the output but can also change the orientation from vertical to horizontal if the range is wider than it is tall e Configuration is a string that controls what results are shown and in what order they appear An empty string will default to show all in default order including headers Input can be a cell rang
436. til there are no more pairs Note that numbers appended to amp can only be from 1 to 9 inclusive EXECON can also operate on more than one list For example EXECON amp 1 amp 2 1 2 3 4 5 6 returns 5 7 9 Programming Programming HMS HMS ITERATE TICKS TIME In the example above amp 1 indicates an element in the first list and amp 2 indicates the corresponding element in the second list The plus operator between them adds the two elements until there are no more pairs Note that numbers appended to amp can only be from 1 to 9 inclusive EXECON can also begin operating on a specified element in a specitied list For example EXECON amp 23 61 1 5 16 4 5 6 7 returns hg ke In the example above amp 23 indicates that operations are to begin on the second list and with the third element To that element is added the first element in the first list The process continues until there are no more pairs Again the digits appended to amp can only be from 1 to 9 inclusive Syntax HMS value Converts a decimal value to hexagesimal format that is in units subdivided into groups of 60 This includes degrees minutes and seconds as well as hours minutes and seconds Example HMS 54 8763 returns 54 52 34 68 Syntax HMS value Converts a value expressed hexagesimal format to decimal format Example HMS gt 54 52 34 68 returns 54 8763 Syntax ITERATE
437. tion of a rational fraction in the complex field cpartfrac RatFrac Returns the list of complex rational roots of a polynomial without indicating the multiplicity crationalroot Poly Draws a cube with a vertex at the line AB and a face in the plane containing A B and C cube Pnt A Pnt B Pnt C Returns the list sequence or string whose elements are the cumulative sum of the original list sequence or string cumSum Lst Seq Str Used with display to specify the color of the geometrical object to be displayed Functions and commands cylinder DEBUG delcols delrows deltalist Dirac division_point DO DrawSlp egcd Functions and commands Draws a cylinder with axis from A in the direction of vector v with radius r and if provided with height h cylinder Pnt A Vect v Real r Real h Starts the debugger for the program name you specify In a program DEBUG will act as a breakpoint and launch the debugger at that location This allows you to start debugging at a specific location rather than starting at the beginning of the program debug program name Returns the matrix that is matrix A with the columns n1 nk deleted deLeols Mtrx A Interval n1l nk In1 Returns the matrix that is matrix A with the rows nl nk deleted delrows Mtrx A Interval nl n2 n1 Returns the list of the differences between consecutive terms in the original lis
438. tion set tap EEE now the input form displays three equations 2 You define the equations you want to solve by entering the coefficients of each variable in each equation and the constant term Notice that the cursor is positioned immediately to the left of x in the first equation ready for you to insert the coefficient of x 6 Enter the coefficient and either tap press fu J 3 The cursor moves to the next coefficient Enter that co efficient and either tap or press Continue doing likewise until you have defined all the equations Once you have Linear Equation Solver entered enough 6X ol E values for the 7X 10W 87 T solver to be able to generate X 0 Y 1 666666667 Z 3 3333333333 solutions those solutions appear near the bottom Edit_ 2x2 3x3e of the display In this example the solver was able to find solutions for x y and z as soon as the first coefficient of the last equation was entered As you enter 2 g 9 Y 6Z 5 7X 10 Y 8Z 10 6X 4Y OZ 6 6 solution changes _ x 3 1666666667 Y 3 25 Z 2 5416666667 each of the remaining known values the The graphic at the right shows Fed mialan abs manan nan the final solution once all the coefficients and constants had been entered Linear Solver app Solve a two by If the three equation UAA IAAT two system input form is ke o Y 0 displayed and you OX 0 Y
439. tions 319 physical constants 331 509 pinch 15 plot box and whisker 149 cobweb 199 histogram 148 line 149 one variable statistics 148 pareto 149 scatter 162 stairsteps 199 statistical data one variable 148 two variable 162 Plot view app variables 437 441 Polar app 193 Polar app variables 492 power x raised to y 302 precedence 34 probability functions 319 320 Q Quadratic Explorer app variables summary 495 quadratic fit 160 quotes in strings 431 R random numbers 320 real number maximum 308 minimum 308 real number functions 320 324 receive error 511 reduced row echelon form 360 regression 159 Index reset app 81 resetting app 296 calculator 481 memory 482 result copying to edit line 35 reusing 35 reverse polish notation See RPN 29 root nth 302 RPN 29 31 41 S scientific number format 22 28 scrolling move between relations in Trace mode 104 searching menu lists 24 speed searches 24 seconds symbol 18 sending apps 296 lists 338 matrices 350 notes 369 programs 396 Sequence app 199 graphs 199 Sequence app variables in menu map 492 settings Home 27 shortcuts menus 24 Show button 33 sign reversal 139 sine 301 sine cosine tangent 301 Solve app function 462 Solve app variables 486 summary 486 sort apps 81 82 splitscreen 116 Spreadsheet app variables summary 486 square root 302 stack 42 stairsteps graph 199 standard number format 28 statistical data two va
440. tising on sales Advertising minutes Resulting sales independent x dependent y Statistics 2Var app 199 Open the Statistics 2Var app Enter data Choose data columns and fit 200 l Open the Statistics Statistics 2Var Numeric View 11 93 2Var app Select Statistics 2Var Enter value or expression Feat ins Size Make stats 2 Enter the advertising minutes data in column C1 21 EE 3a 5_ 5 4 3 Enter the resulting Statistics 2Var Numeric View aeaf C1 C2 C3 C4 sales data in 5 a0 7 1 920 column C2 5 5 2265 wool fs es 4 2200 920 __ Ete SS yool Ee 2265 Enter value or expression 2890 2200 _ Ete In Symbolic view you can define up to five analyses of two variable data named S1 to S5 In this example we will define just one s1 The process involves choosing data sets and a fit type 4 Specify the columns that contain the data you want to analyze Symb B L gt Setup In this case C1 Statistics 2Var Symbolic View BEET Type1 Linear and C2 appear W Fiti M xX B by default But you 2 Type2 Linear E Fit2 M X B entered your data lt 3 could have Enter independent column into columns other than C1 and C2 Statistics 2Var app 5 Select a fit From the Type 1 Statistics 2Var Symbolic View e field select a fit In thi Logarithmic Is example Exponential select Linear
441. to available memory you can store as many notes as you want in the Note Catalog These notes are independent of any app The Note Catalog lists the notes by name This list excludes notes that were created in any app s Info view but these can be copied and then pasted into the Note Catalog via the clipboard From the Note Catalog you create or edit individual notes in the Note Editor Note Catalog While you are in the Note Catalog you can use the button and keys following buttons and keys Note that some buttons will not be available if there are no notes in the Note Catalog Button or Key Purpose REN Notes and Info Opens the selected note for editing Begins a new note and prompts you for a name Tap to provide additional features See below 429 Button or Key Purpose Continued AT Save creates a copy of the selected note and prompts you to save it under a new name Rename renames the selected note Sort sorts the list of notes sort options are alphabetical and chronological Delete deletes the selected note Clear deletes all notes Deletes the selected note Deletes all notes in the catalog Sends the selected note to another HP Prime or PC The Note Editor The Note Editor is where you create and edit notes You can launch the Note Editor from the Notes Catalog and also from within an app Notes created within an app stay with that app even if
442. try app variables summary 485 gestures 14 glossary 479 graph bar 149 box and whisker 149 cobweb 199 histogram 148 line 149 normal probability 149 pareto 149 stairsteps 199 statistical data one variable 148 graphics copying into an app 369 storing and recalling 414 Greek characters 18 H header 12 hexagesimal format 22 histogram 148 Home 11 calculating in 31 reusing lines 35 543 settings 27 variables 371 483 variables categories 377 Home variables list of 483 horizontal zoom 99 111 hyperbolic trig 56 S6 57 312 313 hypothesis alternative hypothesis 168 tests 168 I O commands 422 implied multiplication 33 importing graphics 369 inference contidence intervals 180 hypothesis tests 173 One Proportion Z Interval 182 One Proportion Z Test 175 One Sample T Interval 184 One Sample T Test 178 One Sample Z Interval 180 One Sample Z Test 173 Two Proportion Z Interval 183 Two Proportion Z Test 176 Two Sample T Interval 184 Two Sample T Test 179 Two Sample Z Test 174 Two Sample Z Interval 181 Inference app variables Numeric view 446 Results 460 summary 490 infinite result 510 insufficient memory 510 insufficient statistics data 510 integer functions 313 314 22 317 integral definite 306 invalid 544 dimension 510 statistics data 510 syntax 510 inverse hyperbolic trig 312 K key 480 keyboard customizing 403 editing keys 17 entry keys 17 inactive keys 23 list catalog keys 335
443. turns 1 2 3 or 4 if the 4 points or the object build a parallelogram 2 for a rhombus 3 for a rectangle 4 for a square and O otherwise is parallelogram Pnt or Cplx Pnt or Cplx Pnt or Cplx Pnt or Cplx Returns 1 if 2 lines are perpendicular is perpendicular Line or Plan Line or Plan Returns 1 2 or 3 if the 3 points or the object build a rectangular triangle with vertex 1 2 or 3 and O otherwise or 1 if the 4 points or the object build a rectangle 2 if the 4 points or the object build a square and O otherwise is rectangle Pnt Cplx Pnt Cplx Pnt Cplx P nt Cplx 163 is_square Returns 1 if the 4 points build a square and O otherwise is square Pnt Pity Pnt Pnt Other Geometry functions angleat angleatraw areaat areaatraw The following functions are not available from a menu in the Geometry app but are available from the Catlg menu angleat A B C z0 displays at point zO the value of the measure of the angle made by AB and AC along with a legend angleat A B C z0 Same as angleat but without providing a legend Displays at point z0 with a legend algebraic area of a circle or of a star polygon e g triangle square areaat Polygon Pnt Cplx z0 Displays at point zO algebraic area of a circle or of a star polygon e g triangle square areaatraw Polygone Pnt Cplx z0Q common_perpendicular cone convexhull 164 Draws the commo
444. u to define a mathematical object such as an expression or an open sentence plot it and see the values generated by it An introduction to HP apps Each of these views has an accompanying setup view a view that enables you to configure the appearance of the data in the accompanying major view These views are called Symbolic Setup Plot Setup and Numeric Setup They are accessed by pressing G3 Gs BE ond B GS Not all apps have all the six views outlined above The scope and complexity of each app determines its particular set of views For example the Spreadsheet app has no Plot view or Plot Setup view and the Quadratic Explorer has only a Plot view What views are available in each app is outlined in the next six sections Note that the DataStreamer app is not covered in this chapter See HP StreamSmart 410 User Guide for information about this app Symbolic view The table below outlines what is done in the Symbolic view of each app App Use the Symbolic view to Advanced Specify up to 10 open sentences Graphing Finance Not used Function Specify up to 10 real valued rectangular functions of y in terms of x Geometry View the symbolic definition of geometric constructions Inference Choose to conduct a hypothesis test or test a contidence level and select a type of test Linear Explorer Not used Linear Solver Not used Parametric Specify up to 10 parametric fun
445. uadratic equation move the tracing cursor near to it if necessary tap and select No minimum or maximum found Extremum 113 NOTE The coordinates of the extremum are displayed at the bottom of the screen The ROOT INTERSECTION and EXTREMUM operations return only one value even if the function in question has more than one root intersection or extremum The app will only return values that are closest to the cursor You will need to move the cursor closer to other roots intersections or extrema if you want the app to calculate values for those The Function Variables To access Function variables 114 The result of each numerical analysis in the Function app is assigned to a variable These variables are named e Root Isect for Intersection e Slope e SignedArea e Extremum The result of each new analysis overwrites the previous result For example if you find the second root of a quadratic equation after finding the first the value of Root changes form the first to the second root The Function variables are available in Home view and in the CAS where they can be included as arguments in calculations They are also available in Symbolic view 1 To access the Function variables press App Vars Vars 1 Function gt n tap 25olve gt and select aStatistics 1Var gt 4Statistics 2Var gt Function S5lnference gt 6Parametric gt 2 Select Results 7Polar 3 S and then the ae 4 variabl
446. uency for one of the statistical analyses H1 H5 detined in the Symbolic view of the Statistics 1Var app The frequency can be either one of the column DO D9 or any positive integer Hn must be one of the Statistics 1Var app Symbolic view H1 H5 If used Dn must be one of the column DO D9 otherwise value must be a positive integer SETFREQ Hn Dn or SETFREO Hn value Set sample data Sets the sample data for one of the statistical analyses H1 H5 defined in the Symbolic view of the Statistics 1 Var app Sets the data column to one of the column DO D9 for one of the statistical analyses H1 H5 SETSAMPLE Hn Dn Statistics 2Var app functions PredX PredY Resid Do2VStats Functions and commands The Statistics 2Var app has a number of functions Some are designed to calculate summary statistics based on one of the statistical analyses S1 S5 defined in the Symbolic view of the Statistics 2Var app Others predict X and Y values based on the fit specitied in one of the analyses Predict X Uses the fit from the first active analysis S1 S5 found to predict an x value given the y value PredxX value Predict Y Uses the fit from the first active analysis S1 S5 found to predict a y value given the x value PredyY value Residuals Calculates a list of residuals based on column data and a fit defined in the Symbolic view via S1 S5 Resid Sn or Resid Resid looks for the first defined analysis in th
447. ula in the relevant cell For example wherever it is placed g5 1 6543 enters 6543 in cell g5 Any previous content in g5 is replaced Similarly B3 5 2 forces the contents of B3 to be displayed in medium font size Spreadsheet functions 186 As well as the functions on the Math CAS and Catlg menus you can use special spreadsheet functions These can be found on the App menu one of the Toolbox menus Press tap INT and select Spreadsheet The functions are described on Spreadsheet functions on page 314 Remember to precede a function by an equals sign SA gt it you want the result to automatically update as the values it is dependent on change Without an equals sign you will be entering just the current value Spreadsheet Statistics 1Var app The Statistics 1 Var app can store up to ten data sets at one time It can perform one variable statistical analysis of one or more sets of data The Statistics 1 Var app starts with the Numeric view which is used to enter data The Symbolic view is used to specify which columns contain data and which column contains frequencies You can also compute statistics in Home and recall the values of specific statistics variables The values computed in the Statistics 1 Var app are saved in variables and can be re used in Home view and in other apps Getting started with the Statistics 1Var app Statistics 1Var app Suppose that you are measuring the heights o
448. unctions and commands See Ctlg menu on page 338 E Some functions can be chosen from the math template displayed by fa pressing See Math template Lint foao foo on page 21 You can also create your own functions See Creating your own functions on page 371 You can choose to have entries on the Math and CAS menus presented either by their descriptive name or their command name The entries on the Catlg menu are always presented by their command name Descriptive name Command name Factors List ifactors Complex Zeros cZeros Groebner Basis gbasis Factor by Degree factor_xn Find Roots proot The default menu presentation mode is to provide the descriptive names for the Math and CAS functions If you prefer the functions to be presented by their command name deselect the Menu Display option on the second page of the Home Settings screen see Home settings on page 27 Abbreviations used in this chapter In describing the syntax of functions and commands the following abbreviations are used Expr a mathematical expression Poly a polynomial LstPoly a list of polynomials Frac a fraction Functions and commands RatFrac a rational fraction Fnc a function Var a variable LstVar a list of variables Keyboard functions e Functions and commands The most frequently used functions are available directly from the keyboard Many of the keyboard functions also
449. ur own functions in a program and data can be passed to a function using parameters Functions can return a value using the RETURN statement or not When a program is executed from Home view the program will return the value returned by the last statement that was executed Furthermore functions can be defined in a program and exported for use by other programs in much the same way that variables can be defined and used elsewhere Programming Program ROLLDIE Program ROLLMANY Programming In this section we will create a small set of programs each illustrating some aspect of programming in the HP Prime Each program will be used as a building block for a custom app described in the next section App Programs We ll first create a program called ROLLDIE It simulates the rolling of a single die returning a random integer between 1 and whatever number is passed into the function In the Program Catalog create a new program named ROLLDIE For help see page 441 Then enter the code in the Program Editor EXPORT ROLLDIE N BEGIN RETURN 1 FLOOR RANDOM N END The first line is the heading of the function Execution of the RETURN statement causes a random integer from 1 to N to be calculated and returned as the result of the function Note that the RETURN command causes the execution of the function to terminate Thus any statements between the RETURN statement and END are ignored In Home view in fact any
450. used An introduction to HP apps App Use the Numeric Setup view to Cont Trig Explorer Not used Quick example The following example uses all six app views and should give you an idea of the typical workflow involved in working with an app The Polar app is used as the sample app Open the app 1 Open the Application Library by pressing W3 2 Tap once on the icon of the Polar app The Polar app opens in Symbolic View Symbolic view The Symbolic view of the Polar app is where you define or specify the polar equation you want to plot and explore In this example we will plot and explore the equation r 4ncos 8 2 cos 0 3 Define the equation r 4ncos 0 2 cos 0 by entering 4a 20 lt 3 ay OIL E R4 6 This equation will draw E RS symmetrical petals E R6 provided that the angle measure is set to radians The angle measure for this app is set in the Symbolic Setup view Show Symbolic Setup view 4 Press E3 Polar Symbolic Setup mosi Angle Measure System 5 Select Radians from the Number Format Radian Angle Measure menu Complex Be hak Choose Angle Measure An introduction to HP apps 69 Plot view Plot Setup View Numeric View 70 6 Press 3 A graph of the equation is plotted However as the illustration at the right shows only a part of the petals is visible To see the rest you will need to change the plot setup parameters Press EA 8 Set the
451. ut Y In EAN yin Y Out Out 82 Zoom Traces EEEE ELELEE EEEE EEEE EELEE EEEE na gaa EEEE EEE EATE EEEE EU EOL EU SUELO ED EEE Menu Menu An introduction to HP apps Square Square Notice that in this example the plot on left has had a Y In zoom applied to it The Square zoom has returned the plot to its default state where the X and Y Menu scales are equal EEEE EEEE EEEE EELEE LEELEE Autoscale Autoscale EAEE EEEE EEEE EEEE Decimal Decimal Notice that in this example the plot on lett has had a X In zoom applied to it The Decimal zoom has reset the default values for the x range and y Zoom Traces Menu range Integer Integer EEEE EEEE EEEE EEEE EELEE Menu Trig Trig Ba aa Zoom Traces Menu An introduction to HP apps 83 Trace To select a plot To evaluate a definition 84 Scope Advanced Graphing Function Parametric Polar Sequence Solve Statistics 1 Var and Statistics 2Var The tracing functionality enables you to move a cursor the trace cursor along the current graph You move the trace cursor by pressing 4 or You can also move the trace cursor by tapping on or near the current plot The trace cursor jumps to the point on the plot that is closest point to where you tapped 4 0578905109 R1 8 1 0471975512 PRM The current coordinates of the cursor are shown at the bottom of the screen If menu buttons are
452. utput but can also change the orientation from vertical to horizontal if the range is wider than it is tall e Configuration is a string that controls what results are shown and what order they appear in An empty string will default to show all in default order including headers h if present the header cells will be created acc Accept Reject tT tM prob df ct cX cX2 e Input list is the list of input see Input Parameters below This can be a range reference a list of cell references or a simple list of values e Input Parameters SampMean SampStdDev SampSize NullPopMean SigLevel Mode Specifies how to calculate the statistic 1 Less than 2 Greater than 3 Not Equal Example XXXXX HypT2mean The hypothesis test HypT2mean is a two sample T test for comparing means Functions and commands 323 324 Syntax HypT2mean ouput configuration input TESE HypirZzmeam ouput Ccontigquration SampMeanl SampMean2 SampStdDevl SampStdDev2 SampSizel SampSize2 pooled SigLevel Mode e Output is a reference to where you would like the output to be placed Note if a range is specified it will limit the size of the output but can also change the orientation from vertical to horizontal if the range is wider than it is tall e Configuration is a string that controls what results are shown and what order they appear in An empty string will default to show all in default order
453. utputs depend on the current angle format Also accepts complex numbers ASIN value Example ASIN 1 returns 90 degrees mode Arc cosine cos x Output range is from 0 to 180 or O to T Inputs and outputs depend on the current angle format Also accepts complex numbers Output will be complex for values outside the normal cosine domain of 1 lt x lt 1 ACOS value Example ACOS 1 returns 0 degrees mode Arc tangent tan x Output range is from 90 to 90 or r 2 to t 2 Inputs and outputs depend on the current angle format Also accepts complex numbers ATAN value Functions and commands x em _ XI M em 1x Functions and commands Example ATAN 1 returns 45 degrees mode Square Also accepts complex numbers value Example 18 returns 324 Square root Also accepts complex numbers value Example 320 returns 17 88854382 x raised to the power of y Also accepts complex numbers value power Example 2 RAE returns 256 The nth root of x root value Example 3 ER returns 2 Reciprocal value Ss Example 3 returns 333333333333 Negation Also accepts complex numbers value Example 1 2 i returns 1 2 i Absolute value 287 value 7 x y matrix For a complex number ABS x y i returns 4x y For a matrix ABS returns the Frobenius norm of the matrix Example ABS 1 returns 1 ABS 1 2 returns 2
454. uv ibasis icontent icosahedron identity iegcd IFERR IFTE Functions and commands With three points F1 F2 and M as arguments draws an hyperbola with foci at F1 and F2 that passes though M With two points and a real F1 F2 and a as arguments draws an hyperbola with foci at F1 and F2 that passes through point M such that MF1 MF2 2a With one second degree polynomial p x y as argument draws the hyperbola defined when the polynomial is set to equal O hyperbola Focus Fl Focus F2 Pne M or Real a Returns u v such as au bv c for three integers a b and c Note that c must be a multiple of the greatest common divisor of a and b for there to be a solution iabcuv Intg a Intg b Intg c Returns the basis of the intersection of two vector spaces ibasis Lst Vect Vect Lst Vect Vect Returns the greatest common divisor of the integer coefficients of a polynomial icontent Poly Var Draws an icosahedron with center A vertex B and such that the plane ABC contains one vertex among the five nearest vertices from B icosahedron Pnt A Pnt B Pnt C Returns the solution to the identity function for an expression id Seq Returns the identity matrix of dimension n identity Intg n Returns the extended greatest common divisor of two integers ieged Intg Intg Used in programming to begin a conditional statement Executes sequence of commands If an er
455. vanced Graphing app The Advanced Graphing app uses the customary app views Symbolic Plot and Numeric described in chapter 4 For a description of the menu buttons available in this app see Symbolic view Summary of menu buttons on page 76 Plot view Summary of menu buttons on page 86 and Numeric view Summary of menu buttons on page 94 The Trace option in the Advanced Graphing app works differently than in other apps and is described in detail in this chapter In this chapter we will explore the rotated conic defined by 2 2 ae a 00 2 10 4 10 5 118 Advanced Graphing app Open the app Define the open sentence Set up the plot Advanced Graphing app 1 Open the Advanced Graphing app Select Advanced Graphing 2 Define the open sentence gt am 5 Mam J Note that lt can be Advanced Graphing Symbolic View TA H 5 2 H 53 B s4 Ss E se E s7 Enter an open sentence Advanced Graphing Symbolic View 1444 X2 7 X Y 347 X Y J X Y Ms 0 4 Ws 00 H 53 E s4 ss Se m eoa Enter an open sentence easily selected from the relations palette S ail 3 Decide if you want to it is plotted give one or more open sentence a custom color when evaluate a dependent function deselect a definition that you don t want to explore incorporate variables math commands
456. ve a _P suffix to the function name C PX Converts from Cartesian coordinates to screen coordinates DRAWMENU Syntax DRAWMENU f text texts Draws a menu showing the text items listed FREEZE Syntax FREEZE Pauses program execution until a key is pressed This prevents the screen from being redrawn after the end of the program execution leaving the moditied display on the screen for the user to see PX C Converts from screen coordinates to Cartesian coordinates Pixels and Cartesian ARC P ARC Syntax ARC G x y r al a2 c Programming 473 ARC P G x y r al a2 c Draws an arc or circle on G centered on point x y with radius rand color c starting at angle al and ending on angle a2 G can be any of the graphics variables and is optional The default is GO r is given in pixels c is optional and if not specified black is used al and a2 follow the current angle mode and are optional The default is a full circle BLIT P BLIT Syntax BLIT trgtGRB dx 1 dyl dx2 dy2 srcGRB sx I syl sx2 sy2 c BLIT_P trgtGRB dxl dyl dx2 dy2 srcGRB sx I syl sx2 sy2 c Copies the region of srcGRB between point sx sy and sx2 sy2 into the region of trgtGRB between points dx 1 dy and dx2 dy2 Do not copy pixels from srcGRB that are color c trgtGRB can be any of the graphics variables trgtGRB can be any of the graphics variables and is optional The default is GO
457. ve hypotheses cover the various cases for the two quantities being unequal lt gt and Inference app Select the inference method Enter data Inference app In this section we will conduct a Z Test on one mean on the example data to illustrate how the app works 2 5 Hypothesis Test is the default inference method If it is not selected tap on the Method field and select it Choose the type of test In this case select Z Test 1 u from the Type menu Select an alternative hypothesis In this case select u lt po from the Alt Hypoth menu Go to Numeric view to see the sample data AE 4Setup Inference Symbolic View ll Method v Hypothesis test Type Confidence interval Alt Hypoth p lt p Choose an inferential method Inference Symbolic View minea Method Hypothesis test Type v Z Test 1 p Z Test Z Test Alt Hypoth Z Test T Test T Test Choose a distribution statistic Method Hypothesis test Type Z Test 1 p Choose the alternative hypothesis C foose T T Inference Numeric View if R 0 461368 n 50 uo 0 5 d 0 2887 a 0 05 Sample mean COEREDTNIEBETD The table below describes the fields in this view for the sample data Field Definition name Sample mean 217 Field Definition Continued name n Sample size Lo Assumed population mea
458. vely Geometry app variables Category Names Numeric XMin XMax YMin Modes AAngle ADigits AComplex AFormat Spreadsheet app variables Category Names Numeric ColWidth RowHeight Row Col Cell Modes AAngle ADigits AFormat AComplex Variables 379 Advanced Graphing app variables Solve app variables 380 Category Names Symbolic Si S6 S2 S7 s3 s8 S4 S9 S5 SO Plot Axes Xmin Cursor Xtick GridDots Xzoom GridLines Ymax Labels Ymin Method Ytick Recenter Yzoom Xmax Numeric NumXStart NumType NumY Start NumXZoom NumXStep NumYZoom NumYStep Automatic Numlndep BuildYourOwn Modes AAngle ADigits AComplex AFormat Category Names Symbolic El E6 E2 E7 E3 E8 E4 E9 E5 EO Plot Axes Xmin Cursor Xtick GridDots Xzoom GridLines Ymax Labels Ymin Method Ytick Recenter Yzoom Xmax Variables Category Names Continued Modes AAngle ADigits AComplex AFormat Statistics 1Var app variables Category Names Results Nbltem gt explained Min ae below Ql Meanx Med sX Q3 OX Kax serrX Symbolic H1 H1Type H2 H2Type H3 H3Type H4 H4Type H5 H5Type Plot Axes Xmax Cursor Xmin GridDots RELGK GridLines Xzoom Hmin Ymax Hmax Ymin Hwidth Ytick Labels V7 oom Recenter Numeric Dl D6 D2 Di D3 D8 D4 D9 D5 DO Modes AAngle ADigits AComplex AFormat Variables 38 Results Nbltem Min Q1 Med Q3 Max X X2 MeanX sX oX serrX 382 Contains the number of data
459. view variables CO C9 Statistics 2Var DO D9 Statistics 1 Var 500 O Z Int 1 u Z Int u pw 2 ZInt 1 z 3 Z Int ni 1 A T Int 1 u 5 T Int u p gt Can contain any expression Independent variable is T Example SIN 4 T b gt Y1 2 SIN 0O T X1 Can contain any expression Independent variable is N Example RECURSE U U N 1 4N b7 2 PUL CO through C9 for columns of data Can contain lists Enter data in the Numeric view In a program type LIST Cn where n 0 1 2 3 9 and LIST is either a list or the name of a list DO through D9 for columns of data Can contain lists Enter data in the Numeric view In a program type LIST Dn where n 0 1 2 3 9 and LIST is either a list or the name of a list Programming NumIndep Function Parametric Polar Sequence NumStart Function Parametric Polar Sequence NumStep Function Parametric Polar Sequence NumType Function Parametric Polar Sequence NumZoom Function Parametric Polar Sequence Inference app variables Alpha Programming Specities the list of independent values to be used by Build Your Own Table Enter your values one by one in the Numeric view In a program type LIST gt NumIndep List can be either a list itself or the name of a list Sets the starting value for a table in Numeric view From Numeric Setup view enter a value for NUMSTART In a program type n gt NumStart
460. w set the value of Mean2 In a program type n gt Mean2 The following variables are used to set up hypothesis test or confidence interval calculations in the Inference app Sets the assumed value of the population mean for a hypothesis test From the Numeric view set the value of u0 In a program type n LO where 0 lt 110 lt 1 Sets the size of the sample for a hypothesis test or contidence interval For a test or interval involving the difference of two means or two proportions sets the size of the first sample From the Numeric view set the value of nl In a program type Programming n2 TO Pooled sl s2 ol Programming n n1 For a test or interval involving the difference of two means or two proportions sets the size of the second sample From the Numeric view set the value of n2 In a program type n n2 Sets the assumed proportion of successes for the One proportion Ztest From the Numeric view set the value of TO In a program type n gt TO where 0 lt 20 lt 1 Determine whether or not the samples are pooled for tests or intervals using the Student s T distribution involving two means From the Numeric view set the value of Pooled In a program type 0 gt Pooled for not pooled default 1 gt Pooled for pooled Sets the sample standard deviation for a hypothesis test or contidence interval For a test or interval involving the ditference of two
461. where in the calculator where a number can be used you can enter ROLLDIE 6 anda random integer between 1 and 6 inclusive will be returned Another program could use the ROLLDIE function and generate n rolls of a die with any number of sides In the following program the ROLLDIE function is used to generate n rolls of two dice each with the number of sides given by the local variable sides The results are stored in list L2 so that L2 1 shows the number of times the dies came up with a combined total of 1 L2 2 shows the number of times the dies came up with a combined total of 2 etc L2 1 should be O since the sum of the numbers on 2 dice must be at least 2 EXPORT ROLLMANY n Sides BEGIN LOCAL k roll 453 454 initialize list of frequencies MAKELIST 0 X 1 2 sides 1 PL2 FOR k FROM 1 TO n DO ROLLDIE sides ROLLDIE sides Proll L2 roll 1 gt L2 roll END END By omitting the EXPORT command when a function is declared its visibility can be restricted to the program within which it is defined For example you could define the ROLLDIE function inside the ROLLMANY program like this ROLLDIE I7 EXPORT ROLLMANY n sides BEGIN LOCAL k roll initialize list of frequencies MAKELIST 0 X 1 2 sides 1 gt L2 FOR k FROM 1 TO n DO ROLLDIE sides ROLLDIE sides Proll b2 POL aL PZ Od END END ROLLDIE n BEGIN RETURN 1 FLOOR RANDOM N END In this scenario assume th
462. which can then be stored mi asa 3x4 real matrix in any matrix variable M1 is used in this example ins __ Size Go Column You can then use the ESIET 1 14 RREF function to change this to reduced row echelon form storing it in any matrix variable M2 is used in this example Sto gt RREF M1 M2 a a 427 The reduced row echelon Function matrix gives the solution to the linear equation in the fourth column An advantage of using Rrerfm em2 ane the RREF function is that ates it will also work with inconsistent matrices resulting from systems of equations which have no solution or infinite solutions res a a a a For example the following set of equations has an infinite number of solutions xty z 5 2x y 7 x 2y z 2 The final row of zeros in Function the reduced row echelon form of the augmented matrix indicates an inconsistent system with RREF M3 1 0 333333333333 4 infinite solutions 0 1 666666666667 1 00 0 0 res ae re ee a sa 428 Matrices Notes and Info 25 The HP Prime has two text editors for entering notes The Note Editor opens from within the Note Catalog which is a collection of notes independent of apps e The Info Editor opens from the Info view of an app A note created in the Info view is associated with the app and stays with it if you send the app to another calculator The Note Catalog Subject
463. will be traced by default Since the linear equation is higher than the quadratic function in Symbolic view it is the plot on which the tracing cursor appears by default 9 Trace the linear function or Note how a cursor moves along the plot as you press the buttons Note too that the coordinates of the cursor appear at the bottom of the screen and change as you move the cursor FURR oe 10 Move the tracing cursor from the linear function to the quadratic function or 11 Trace the quadratic function Y or Again notice how the coordinates of the cursor appear at x4 F200 6 61 the bottom of the screen and change as you move the cursor ing is explai i re detail in Trace on Tracing is explained in more detail in T i page 84 Change the You can change the scale to see more or less of your scale graph This can be done in four ways e Press to zoom in or to zoom out on the current cursor position This method uses the zoom factors set in the Zoom menu The default for both x and y is 2 106 Function app Use the Plot Setup view to specify the exact x range XRNG and y range YRNG you want Use options on the Zoom menu to zoom in or out horizontally or vertically or both etc Use options on the View menu ER to select a pre defined view Note that the Autoscale option attempts to provide a best fit showing as many of the critical features of each plot as poss
464. will help you explore geometry and another to help you explore parametric equations There are also apps to help you solve systems of linear equations and to solve time value of money problems The HP Prime also has its own programming language you can use to explore and solve mathematical problems Functions commands apps and programming are covered in detail later in this guide In this chapter the general features of the calculator are explained along with common interactions and basic mathematical operations Before starting Getting started Charge the battery fully before using the calculator for the first time To charge the battery either Connect the calculator to a computer using the USB cable that came in the package with your HP Prime The PC needs to be on for charging to occur Connect the calculator to a wall outlet using the HP provided wall adapter A Battery Warning A Adapter Warning When the calculator is on a battery symbol appears in the title bar of the screen Its appearance will indicate how much power the battery has A flat battery will take approximately 4 hours to become fully charged To reduce the risk of fire or burns do not disassemble crush or puncture the battery do not short the external contacts and do not dispose of the battery in fire or water To reduce potential safety risks only use the battery provided with the calculator a replacement battery provided by
465. x x 0 0 1 and l1 The buttons and keys available in the Matrix Catalog are Button or Key Purpose Opens the highlighted matrix for editing or Deletes the content sof the selected matrix Changes the selected matrix into a one dimensional vector Transmits the highlighted matrix to another HP Prime en BA Clear Clears the contents of all matrices Matrices Working with matrices To open the Matrix Editor Matrix Editor Buttons and keys Matrices To create or edit a matrix go to the Matrix Catalog and tap on a matrix You could also use the cursor keys to highlight the matrix and then press WZI The Matrix Editor opens The buttons and keys available in the Matrix Editor are Button or Key Purpose Clear Eee O Copies the highlighted element to the entry line Inserts a row of zeros above or a column of zeros to the left of the highlighted cell You are prompted to choose row or column Displays a menu for you to choose the small font medium font or large font A three way toggle that controls how the cursor will move after an element has been entered moves the cursor to the right moves it downward and does not move it at all Displays a menu for you to choose 1 2 3 or 4 columns to be displayed at a time Replaces the contents of the highlighted cell with a zero Deletes the highlighted row or column or the entire matrix
466. x z0 slopeatraw d zO displays at point zO the value of the slope of the line or segment d slopeatraw Line Pnt Cplx z0 sphere A B resp sphere A r draws the sphere of diameter AB resp center A and radius r in the space 3 D sphere Pnt or Vect Pnt or Real Defines a vector origin is O if 1 arg with two points or two components or two affix for 2 D or with a point and a vector or with a point its extremity and its origin is 0 0 0 169 vector Pnt Pnt Pnt Vect vertices Returns the list of the vertices of the polygon or polyhedron P vertices Polygon or Polyedr P vertices _abca Returns the closed list A B A of the vertices of the polygon or polyhedron P vertices abca Polygon or Polyedr P 170 Geometry Spreadsheet The Spreadsheet app provides a grid of cells for you to enter content such as numbers text expressions and so on and to perform certain operations on what you enter To open the Spreadsheet app MPEGS press and select Spreadsheet You can create any number of customized spreadsheets each with its own name see Creating an app on page 97 You open a customized spreadsheet in the same way by pressing and selecting the particular spreadsheet The maximum size of any one spreadsheet is 10 000 rows by 676 columns The app opens in Numeric view There is no Plot or Symbolic view There is a Symbolic Setup view EMA GRY that e
467. y the data you want to import Top GRE Inference app Tl From the App field Import Sample Statistics duasi select the statistics app 82 8833333333 that has the data you ok s 0 487510683644 want to import App Statistics 1Var 12 In the Column field coum specify the column in that app where the Choose column to import data is stored D1 is CEG GES CIEE the default 13 Tap GSS 14 Specity a 90 Inference Numeric View el confidence interval in 82 8833333333 the C field s 0 487510683644 n 6 Confidence Level edit sitmport alc e e e Display 15 Display the confidence x results interval in Numeric e amp Ten Crit T 2 01504837333 Lower 82 4822875184 numerically oh Eae 16 Return to Numeric view 90 SS ED Te ee aaa e l Disp ay 17 Display the confidence 201504837333 amp Crit To 2 01504837333 results interval in Plot view graphically You can see that we can be 90 confident AF 82 8833333333 d that the true boiling 82 4822875184 90 CIS 83 2843791482 point lies between k 82 4822 and 83 2843 Hypothesis tests You use hypothesis tests to test the validity of hypotheses about the statistical parameters of one or two populations Inference app 22 The tests are based on statistics of samples of the populations The HP Prime hypothesis tests use the Normal Zdistribution or the Student s t distribution to calculate
468. you will get the value of Xmin from the Parametric app To get the value of Xmin in the Function app instead you could open the Function app and then return to Home view Alternatively you could qualify the name of the variable by preceding it with the app name and a period as in Function Xminz An introduction to HP apps An introduction to HP apps 101 102 An introduction to HP apps Function app The Function app enables you to explore up to 10 real valued rectangular functions of y in terms of x for example y 1 x and y x D Once you have defined a function you can e create graphs to find roots intercepts slope signed area and extrema and e create tables that show how functions are evaluated at particular values This chapter demonstrates the basic functionality of the Function app by stepping you through an example More complex functionality is described in chapter 4 An introduction to HP apps beginning on page 59 Getting started with the Function app Function app The Function app uses the customary app views Symbolic Plot and Numeric described in chapter 4 For a description of the menu buttons available in this app see Symbolic view Summary of menu buttons on page 76 e Plot view Summary of menu buttons on page 86 and e Numeric view Summary of menu buttons on page 94 Throughout this chapter we will explore the linear function y 1 x and

HP Prime Graphing Calculator User Guide

Contents

Download Pdf Manuals

Related Search

Related Contents